Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
Operator's Handbook Alcatel 1661SM-C 2.5 Gbits Compact AddDrop Multiplexer
Citation preview
957.140.152 R Ed.01 3AL 38249 AAAA Ed.01
Operator’s Handbook
Alcatel1651SM & 1661SM-C
1651SM Rel.2.7.1622Mbit/s (STM–4) Add–Drop Synchronous Multiplexer
1661SM-C Rel.1.7.12.5 Gbit/s (STM–16) Compact ADM
957.140.152 R Ed.01 3AL 38249 AAAA Ed.01
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
1
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1651SM 2.7.1&1661SM–C 1.7.1 OPER.HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDBOOK GUIDE 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 General information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Handbook applicability 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 General 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Product-release handbooks 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Purpose of the handbook 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Handbook structure 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Handbook configuration check 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.1 List of the editions and modified parts 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Notes on Ed.01 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 First aid for electric shock 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Norms and labels 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESCRIPTIONS 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 HW/SW PREREQUISITES FOR SOFTWARE LOADING 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Hardware configuration 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Operative ambient 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Year 2000 Data Time Compliance 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Physical supports of the release software 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 OPERATIVE FUNCTIONS 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Introduction 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Product Applications 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Administrative 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Configuration Application 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Alarms, status and remote–controls 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Maintenance Memory Application 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
01 010312 G. CAPRIOLI ITAVE E. MONZANI ITAVE
1651SM2.7.1&1661SMC1.7.1 OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
C. FAVERO
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
2
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.5 G.784 Performance Monitoring Application 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6 Software Download 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.7 Remote Inventory 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.8 Mediation function 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 PRODUCT INTERFACE 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 DIALOGUE MODE 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Introduction 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Operator access 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Alarm synthesis window 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Administrative application 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Description 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Operator option 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Configuration Applications 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 General 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Equipment Configuration Application 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 LINE SHELF Connection Configuration Application 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 DROP SHELF Connection Configuration Application 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.5 Local Configuration Application 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6 Routing Table Configuration Application 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 Alarm, status & control application 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 LINE SHELF AS&C description 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 DROP SHELF AS&C description 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Options of the AS&C application 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 Maintenance Memory Application 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 Description 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 Receive Option 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 File option 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.4 Clear option 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 G784 Performance Monitoring Application 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Description 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 File option 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3 View option 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.4 Mode option 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.5 Configure option 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.6 Termination point description 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 Software Download Application 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 SW downloading 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.2 Software 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10 Remote Inventory Application 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.1 Remote Inventory operating sequences 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 Remote Inventory detailed description 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11 Mediation Function applications 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.2 Mediation Function: local configuration application 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3 Mediation Function: administrative application 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12 Network Configuration For Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function 332. . . . 4.12.1 Configuration Procedure for Adm Networks Handled By Remote Craft Terminal 332. . . . 4.12.2 How to create the network 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.3 Basic concepts about mediation function 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.4 NECTAS activation 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.5 Configuration of the Network Elements 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.6 Time Management 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
3
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
COMMISSIONING 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 INTRODUCTION 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 START–UP OF THE PC 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Scope of the procedure 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Start–up 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Check on the windows system 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 95 or 98 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 INSTALLATION OF THE ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL” APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE 355. . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Purpose of the procedure 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Installation 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Installation with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Installation with WINDOWS 95 or 98 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 START–UP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of the procedure 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Start–up 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Start–up with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 installed 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Start–up with Windows 95 or 98 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 INTRODUCTION 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL AND Q2 MEDIATION FUNC-TION 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Purpose of the procedure 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Graphical representation of the Network 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Definition of NEs name without Graph. Repres. of the Network 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Remote craft terminal option without Graphical support and without equipment’slabel 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Configuration of the Network elements 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Purpose of the procedure 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Configuration 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of the procedure 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Display alarm status & control 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Display G.784 performance monitoring 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 LOG ACCESS 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Purpose of the procedure 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 History 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Maintenance memory 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFICATION 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Purpose of the procedure 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 How to modify files 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 OPERATING ROUTINE PROCEDURES 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Introduction 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
4
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
7.1.1 How to back–up files 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Configuration files back–up 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Stored alarms and events file back–up 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 G.784 Performance monitoring file back–up 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Remote Inventory file back–up 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 CRAFT TERMINAL LOGOUT AND LOGIN 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Purpose of the procedure 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Craft Terminal logout 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Craft Terminal login 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 INTRODUCTION 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 PC MAINTENANCE 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Purpose of the procedure 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Shut Down with WINDOWS 3.1 (or 3.11) 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Craft terminal shut–down with Windows 95 or 98 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Craft terminal restart 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of the procedure 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Troubleshooting organization 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Troubleshooting by means of Craft Terminal 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Details on the alarms / status common of the various units 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Equipment Controller unit replacement 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL PROCEDURES 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 INTRODUCTION 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 SW Download from REL. equal/greater than 2.1 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Conversion Files from the previous Release to Rel. 2.7 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Replacement or Extensions of Units other than Equipment Controller, with no updatedSW 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Spare Equipment Controller download, with unknown software 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Installing the ”SWP equipment controller SWDL” applicative on the P.C. 434. . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Downloading the running release on the equipment 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 UPGRADING PROCEDURE FROM REL. 2.5/2.5.1 ’C’ TO REL. 2.7/2.7.1 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Substitution of Connection Card with new 16x16 matrix Unit 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Substitution of the Full Matrix Unit with new 16x16 matrix Unit 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 DVB and 21x2 Mbit/s Retiming Units spare parts management 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Insertion of a Rel.2.5 ”C” spare unit into a Rel. 2.7 equipment 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Insertion of a Rel.2.7 spare unit into a Rel. 2.5 ”C” equipment 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 1651SM RING NETWORK UPGRADING INTO 1661SMC RING NETWORK 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Introduction 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Actions and preliminary verifications for 1651SM 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Upgrade 446. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
5
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURESFigure 1. Operator identifier and password 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2. Alarm synthesis 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3. Data on software product 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4. View selection 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5. Main screen 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6. Bell selection 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7. Alarm synthesis – Application choice 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8. Alarm synthesis – History, display, print or file selection 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9. Alarm synthesis – Selection on history 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10. Alarm synthesis – Selection on secondary 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11. Alarm synthesis – Selection on mnemonic 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12. Alarm synthesis – History data 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13. Types of cursor 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14. Administrative 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 15. Administrative – Functions List 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 16. Administrative – Logout acknowledgement 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 17. Administrative – Password change 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 18. Administrative – Password Change Successful 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 19. Administrative – Date 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 20. Administrative – Display 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 21. Administrative – Create Operator 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 22. Administrative – Modify. select Operator 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 23. Administrative – Modify Operator profile 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 24. Administrative – Delete, Select Operator 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 25. Administrative – Delete acknowledge 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 26. Equipment Configuration. Upload 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 27. Equipment Configuration 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 28. Equipment Configuration – Table Choice 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 29. Configuration – File options 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 30. Configuration – Open File 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 31. Configuration – Open, detail 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 32. Configuration – Save as 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 33. Configuration – Send file 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 34. Configuration – Audit 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 35. Configuration – Audit result 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 36. Configuration – Save previous file 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 37. Equipment Configuration – Subrack configuration 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 38. Equipment Configuration – Power Supply 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 39. Equipment Configuration – EPS/APS 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 40. Equipment Configuration – APS configuration on Signal Degrade 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 41. Equipment Configuration – Optical Safety 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 42. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 43. Equipment Configuration – Bidirectional transmission on single fiber. 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 44. Equipment Configuration – Sync. Source Selection 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 45. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – ADM Type and Trib. Config. 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 46. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – Priority List Config. 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 47. Equipment Configuration– Synch. – SSM Value Configuration 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 48. Equipment Configuration – BER Threshold 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 49. Equipment Configuration – PPS activation on EXBER (B3) 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 50. Equipment Configuration – Consequent actions 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
6
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 51. Equipment Configuration – G.784 BBE Thresholds 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 52. Equipment Configuration – G.784 ES Thresholds 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 53. Equipment Configuration – G.784 SES Thresholds 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 54. Equipment Configuration – G.784 Performance Points 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 55. Equipment Configuration – Equipment Alarm criteria 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 56. Equipment Configuration – STM4 Aggregate Alarm criteria 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 57. Equipment Configuration – Alarm Criterion – Housekeeping indications 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 58. Equipment Configuration – Office alarms delay configuration 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 59. Equipment Configuration – Housekeeping assignment in case of parallel alarm 110. . . . . . Figure 60. Output housekeeping criteria and label selection 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 61. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf,subrack configuration 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 62. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, Power Supply 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 63. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, EPS/APS 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 64. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, synchronization:tributary 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 65. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, alarm criterion 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 66. Connection Configuration with . – Tables 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 67. Insert to East 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 68. Bridge 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 69. Drop unprotected, East 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 70. Drop protected, East 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 71. Drop/Insert bidirectional unprotected, East 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 72. Drop/Insert protected, East 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 73. Pass–through 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 74. Unidirectional. Trib. Cross Connection 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 75. Bidirectional–Trib. Cross Connection 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 76. Unidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 77. Bidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 78. Drop and Continue West and Insert West 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 79. Drop and Continue East and Insert West 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 80. Drop and Continue East and Insert East 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 81. Drop and Continue West and Insert East 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 82. MS SPRING – Drop and Continue Interconnection 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 83. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR WEST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC 134. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 84. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR EAST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC 134. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 85. Broadcasting, Drop + Pass Through 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 86. Tributary insert + cross–connection 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 87. Connection configuration – Enhanced Connectivity 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 88. Connection Configuration – West Agg. Payload structure 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 89. Connection Configuration – Tributary payload structure 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 90. Connection Configuration – Signal label Agg. VC4 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 91. Connection Configuration . Signal label for trib. 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 92. Connection Configuration – Path trace VC4 for aggregate West 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 93. Connection Configuration – Path trace for tributaries 140 M 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 94. Connection Configuration – Path trace for tributaries STM 1 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 95. Connection Configuration AU4 drop/insert 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 96. Connection Configuration – AU4’s Concatenation 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 97. Equipment Configuration . MS–SPRING 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 98. Connection Configuration – Squelching table for HO container 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 99. Connection Configuration – AU4 Cross–connection for Aggregates 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 100. Connection Configuration AU4 Cross–Connection for tributaries 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 101. Connection Configuration – AU4 Pass–through 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 102. Connection Configuration – TU drop/insert, tributary 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 103. Connection Configuration – TU cross–connection. Aggregate 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 104. Connection Configuration – TU cross–connection Tributary 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
7
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 105. Connection Configuration . 2 Mb/s tributary conditions 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 106. Connection Configuration . 34 Mb/s, 45 Mbit/s or DVB tributary conditions 162. . . . . . . . . Figure 107. Connection Configuration 34/2 and 5x2 Tran Mux Trib. conditions 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 108. Connection Configuration . 140 Mbit/s tributary port Configuration 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 109. Connection Configuration – 2 Mbit/s retiming configurations 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 110. Connection Configuration – TU pass–through Aggregate 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 111. Connection Configuration – AUX/EOW Connection 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 112. AUX/AEOW cross connections 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 113. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – Tables 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 114. DROP SHELF Connection config. – STM–1E module connection 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 115. DROP SHELF Connection Config. – Drop/Insert allocation DS tributary 173. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 116. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – TU’s cross connection. DS tributaries 175. . . Figure 117. DROP SHELF Connection Config.– 2 Mbit/s trib. condition DS trib.(choice of element) 176Figure 118. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – 2 Mbit/s tributary condition. DS trib. 176. . . . . Figure 119. 2 Mbit/s Retiming Tributary condition. DS Trib. 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 120. Local Configuration – Tables 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 121. Local Configuration 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 122. Local Configuration – OS configuration 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 123. Local Configuration – Server NTP Configuration Table 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 124. Local Configuration – MS LAPD configuration 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 125. Mediation Function Configuration table 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 126. Local Configuration – Ethernet address 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 127. Local Configuration – L2 only parameter 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 128. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration (choice of element) 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 129. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 130. Routing Table Configuration – Tables 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 131. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of Element (RAP) 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 132. Routing Table Configuration – Reachable address prefixes element 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 133. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of element (MESA) 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 134. Routing Table Configuration – Manual ES adjacencies element 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 135. Alarm,Status and Control – Main screen, Line and Drop Shelf 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 136. Alarm Status and Control (AS & C) – Line Shelf, Logical View 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 137. AS & C – Line Shelf, physical view 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 138. AS & C – Main screen – Drop Shelf , Logical View 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 139. AS & C – Main screen, Drop Shelf, physical view 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 140. AS & C – Housekeeping 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 141. Line Shelf Power Supplies Label 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 142. Drop Shelf Power Supplies Labels 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 143. AS & C – AUX/EOW 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 144. AS & C – 21 x 2Mbit/s Tributary 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 145. AS & C – Port 1, Tributary 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 146. AS & C – View option 1 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 147. AS & C – View option 2 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 148. AS & C – 3 x 34 Mbit/s Tributary 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 149. AS & C – 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 150. AS & C – DVB tributary 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 151. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Tributary 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 152. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 5 x 2Mbit/s ports 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 153. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 34 Mbit/s ports 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 154. AS & C – 140 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 155. AS & C – STM1 Electrical Switchable Tributary 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 156. AS & C – Optical LVC STM1 Tributary 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 157. AS & C – Optical HVC STM1 Tributary 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 158. AS & C – Matrix 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
8
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 159. AS & C – Matrix, LOM of HPT 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 160. AS & C – Matrix, LOP of HPA 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 161. AS & C – Matrix, LOP of HPA, TUG3 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 162. AS & C – Matrix, PSE of LPC 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 163. AS & C – Matrix, PSE of LPC, Trib 1 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 164. AS & C – Matrix, Unequipped Signal Label – C2 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 165. AS & C – STM4 Aggregate 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 166. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 167. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate, AU4 PSE of HPC 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 168. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 169. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit (Synch. Reference) 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 170. AS & C – PPS, units 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 171. AS & C – PPS, TUG3 and VC4 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 172. AS & C – PPS, ports/TU 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 173. AS & C – Software version, units 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 174. AS & C – Software version, detail.(Data are an example) 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 175. AS & C – MS SPRING status 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 176. AS & C – OS status 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 177. AS & C – ADM 600 Interface, Drop Shelf 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 178. AS & C – 21x2M trib, Drop Shelf 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 179. AS & C – 21x2M port, Drop Shelf 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 180. AS&C – PPS, units, Drop Shelf 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 181. AS&C – PPS, ports, Drop Shelf 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 182. Drop Shelf – Units Software version 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 183. Drop Shelf – Software version, detail.(Data are an example) 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 184. AS & C – View option 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 185. AS & C – History 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 186. AS & C – History choice 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 187. AS & C – History display 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 188. AS & C – Remote Control 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 189. AS & C – Remote Control Selection 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 190. AS & C – Remote Control, Confirmation 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 191. AS & C – Remote Control results 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 192. Meaning of the loopback command 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 193. Maintenance Memory 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 194. Maintenance Memory – Receive Option 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 195. Maintenance Memory – Display selection 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 196. Maintenance Memory – Group entity selection 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 197. Maintenance Memory – Entity selection 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 198. Maintenance Memory – Group event selection 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 199. Maintenance Memory – Event selection 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 200. Maintenance Memory – Display 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 201. Maintenance Memory – Save File 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 202. Maintenance Memory – File option 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 203. Maintenance Memory – Open File 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 204. Maintenance Memory – Delete File 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 205. Maintenance Memory – Acknowledge Delete 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 206. Maintenance Memory – Clear Option 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 207. Maintenance Memory – Clear acknowledge 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 208. Maintenance Memory – Clear OK 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 209. Maintenance Memory – Selective clear selection 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 210. G.784 Performance Monitoring 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 211. G784 Performance Monitoring. Screen interpretation 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 212. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s synthesis 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
9
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 213. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s value 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 214. G784 Performance Monitoring Example of result (Quarter) 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 215. G784 Performance Monitoring. File option 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 216. G784 Performance Monitoring. Save File 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 217. G784 Performance Monitoring. View option 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 218. G784 Performance Monitoring. Mode option 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 219. G784 Performance Monitoring. TP selection (start, stop) 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 220. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Configure option 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 221. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 222. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options–Synch. Mux. Sect 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 223. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Changing error criteria, SPS. 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 224. Software Download selection 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 225. Software Download main screen 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 226. Software Download Menu 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 227. Download flow chart 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 228. SW Downloading choice 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 229. SW Downloading 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 230. Download in Progress 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 231. SW Information 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 232. Description File 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 233. Software menù 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 234. SW Management 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 235. SW Activation 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 236. SW functionalities 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 237. Server identification 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 238. Remote inventory 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 239. Remote inventory – Receive option 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 240. Remote inventory – Display selection 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 241. Remote inventory – Display 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 242. Remote inventory – Save file 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 243. Remote inventory – File option 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 244. Remote Inventory–Open File 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 245. Remote Inventory–Delete File 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 246. Remote Inventory–Delete Acknowledge 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 247. Operator identifier and password 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 248. Mediation Function selection 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 249. Alarm synthesis – Application choice for Mediation Function 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 250. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 251. Mediation Function: local configuration application list 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 252. Mediation Function: OS configuration table 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 253. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 254. Mediation Function: NE selection 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 255. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 256. Graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels ) 333. . . . . . . . . Figure 257. Network with NEs names defined (first column) 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 258. Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and equipment’s label 334. . Figure 259. Pop–up 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 260. Network Configuration – Network creation 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 261. Network Configuration –Network name 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 262. Network Configuration – map open 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 263. Network Configuration – Save map GENERAL 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 264. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Transport 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 265. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Mediation 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 266. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Q2 devices 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
10
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 267. Network Configuration – Locate Equipment 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 268. Network Configuration – Equipment Location 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 269. Network Configuration –Label 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 270. Network configuration – save and close 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 271. Nectas activation on local network 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 272. Windows – International 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 273. Windows – Date and Time 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 274. Icons to start–up from windows 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 275. General flow chart 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 276. Power supply alarm 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 277. Transmission network level structure 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 278. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 1 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 279. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 2 417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 280. Install Software Package 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 281. Application Choice – Software Download (data are an example) 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 282. Software Download main screen (data are an example) 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 283. Software Download menu (data are an example) 426. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 284. SW downloading choice (data are an example) 426. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 285. Software downloading application (data are an example) 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 286. SW information (data are an example) 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 287. Conversion program – first screen 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 288. Conversion program – Configuration Application Selection 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 289. Conversion program – Old version of Connection Config. file selection 429. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 290. Conversion program – Old version of Equipment Config. file selection to be associated tothe Connect. Config. File 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 291. Conversion program – New version of Connection Config. file choice 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 292. Conversion program – New version converted file comments 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 293. Conversion program – Acknowledgement message 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 294. Initial set–up SW Download 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 295. Download installation interruption 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 296. Installation incomplete 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 297. Directory editing 439. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 298. Installation in progress 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 299. Installation completed 441. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 300. Installation icons 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 301. Software Download main screen 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 302. 1651SM ring network to be chanced in a1661SM–C ring 448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLESTable 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. Handbook Configuration check 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. List of abbreviations 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. Software products 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6. Synthesis labels and colours ( Global Synth., Network Stations) 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7. Synthesis labels and colours ( Local NE ) 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8. TU12 Allocation 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9. AS–C Colors of the Alarms Synthesis 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 10. Card/slot relationship – LINE SHELF 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11. Card/slot relationship – DROP SHELF 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 12. Common CARD STATUS indications ( active ). 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13. Group Event List and relevant Group Entity 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 14. Events details 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15. Thresholds for SES for path types 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
11
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 16. Thresholds for SES for sections types 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 17. Relationship between colours (motifs) and measurement result. 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 18. STM16 Aggregate 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 19. STM4 Aggregate 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 20. Optical HVC STM–1 Tributary and Electrical STM–1 Switch Tributary 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 21. Optical LVC STM–1 Tributary 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 22. APS 1+1 Spare. All STM1 Tributaries (NB1) 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 23. Tributary 140Mb/s 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 24. Tributary 3x34 Mb/s and 3x45 Mb/s– DVB 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 25. Tributary 21x 2 Mb/s, 34/2 & 5Mb/s 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 26. Matrix (NB1) 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 27. Descriptor file 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 28. Alarm Synthesis indication (Global Synthesis – Network Stations) 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 29. Alarm Synthesis indication (Local NE) 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 30. Alarm status and remote control general indication 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 31. Alarms of the STM4/STM16 Aggregates 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 32. Alarms of the STM1 Electrical Tributary (140/STM1 Switch. Unit) 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 33. Alarms of the STM1 Optical Tributary 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 34. Alarms of the 140 Mbit/s Trib. (140/STM1 Switch. unit) 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 35. Alarms of the 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 36. Alarms of the 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s Tributary 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 37. 3/2 TransMux & 5 x 2Mbit/s Trib. Unit alarms 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 38. Matrix Alarms 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 39. Clock Reference Unit alarms 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 40. AUX/EOW Alarms 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 41. ADM 600 INTERFACE Alarms 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 42. STM 1 E MODULE Alarms 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 43. Consequent Action Aggregate STM–4/STM–16 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 44. Consequent Action Trib. STM1 (140/STM1 switch. trib.) 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 45. Consequent Action Optic STM1 Trib. 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 46. Consequent Action 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s trib. 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 47. Consequent Action Trib. 140 (140/STM1 switch. trib.) 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 48. Consequent Action 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s trib. 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 49. Consequent Action 34/2 TransMux and 5 x 2Mbit/s Tributary 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 50. Consequent Action MATRIX 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 51. Consequent Action ADM 600 Interface 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 52. Connection Configurations to be used in the upgrade operations 448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
12
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
13
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
HANDBOOK GUIDE
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
14
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
15
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK
1.1 General information
WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims theimplied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liablefor errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, orspecial, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for informationpurposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on thepart of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
1651SM & 1661SM-C 3AL 34643 AAAA 521.200.100
1641SM-D 3AL 34644 AAAA 521.200.200
PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
1651SM 2.7.1 ––– 3AL 37365 AAAA 521.574.350
1661SM-C 1.7.1 ––– 3AL 37365 AAAA 521.574.350
1641SM–D 1.0.0 ––– 3AL 34434 AAAA 521.551.800
N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONSHandbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are notmodified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers implies man–machineinterface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of theexplained procedures.Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, ifthe screen contents are unchanged.
For further information on the software product and its physical distribution support refer to para.1.3 onpage 35.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
16
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1.3 General
Reference must be made to the Technical Handbook (see next para.1.4) with regard to the followinggeneral information:
– Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
– Handbook supply to Customers
– Aims of standard Customer Documentation
– Handbook updating
• Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)• Supplying updated handbooks to Customers• Changes due to new product-release
1.4 Product-release handbooks
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-releaseis stated in para.1.2 on page 15 consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware
HANDBOOK ANV Part No.FACTORYPart No.
THISHANDBOOK
1651SM Rel.2.7.1 & 1661SM–C Rel.1.7.1Technical Handbook
3AL 38248 AAAA 955.110.222 F
1641SM-D Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook 3AL 35754 AAAA 955.100.182 F
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control
HANDBOOK ANV Part No.FACTORYPart No.
THISHANDBOOK
1651SM Rel.2.7.1 & 1661SM–C Rel.1.7.1Operator’s Handbook
3AL 38249 AAAA 957.140.152 R
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
17
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1.5 Purpose of the handbook
This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that theoperators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook(see para.1.2 on page 15).
This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook and does not replicateinformation contained into it.In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regardingoperations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved fromthe Technical Handbook.
If the application can be accessed by different types of operators, the information for all the operatorsinvolved is properly subdivided into all the chapters constituting the handbook (see para. 1.6 on page 18).
When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know:
• the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment(product-release) this handbook refers to.
• how to use a PC and the Windows environment applications.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
18
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1.6 Handbook structure
This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the ”Code of Practice” for InstructionHandbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RACC. R29/82).
This handbook is divided into the following main topics (SECTIONS) as described in the Table of Contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety rules and handbookstructure.
DESCRIPTION: This section provides all the general and detailed descriptions(including eventual appendices) required by all types ofoperators to properly execute the procedures described in thesections that follow.
COMMISSIONING: The chapters of this section contain the procedures needed toload and activate the software application on the system.
OPERATION: By operation it is meant the use of the software applicationneeded to carry out the main functions according to the designobjectives.Therefore, this section comprises all the application usage pro-cedures, except those indicated in the MAINTENANCE section.
MAINTENANCE: This section contains all the procedures concerningmaintenance (hardware) to the equipment on which theapplication is loaded, and to the software applicative.
GENERAL PROCEDURES: Section included (but not necessarily used) containing all theprocedures common to the COMMISSIONING and/orOPERATION and/or MAINTENANCE functions.
ANNEX: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containingadditional documentation or general information on other topicsnot inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
N.B. The COMMISSIONING, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE and GENERAL PROCEDURESsections consist of chapters representing a specific procedure.Whenever possible, each procedure shall contain the information of a well–defined function sothat the Customer can have various handbooks required for each type of operator.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
19
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1.7 Handbook configuration check
1.7.1 List of the editions and modified parts
The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend
n = new partm = modified partp = provisional partd = deleted part
Table 3. Handbook Configuration check
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
DESCRIPTIONS n
1. HW/SW Prerequisites For Software Loading n
2. Operative Functions n
3. Product Interface n
4. Dialogue Mode n
COMMISSIONING n
1. Introduction n
2. Start–up of the PC n
3. Installation of the SWP Craft Terminal Applicative SW n
4. Start–up of the SWP Craft Terminal Applicative SW n
OPERATION n
1. Introduction n
2.Network Configuration for Remote Craft Terminal and Q2Mediation Function
n
3. NE 1651SM / 1661SM–C Software Configuration n
4. Display of the Network Element Status n
5. Log Access n
6. Configuration files modification n
7. Operating Routine Procedure n
8. Software Shut–Down and Restart n
MAINTENANCE n
1. Introduction n
2. PC Maintenance n
3. Software Shut–Down and PC Restart n
4. Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting) n
5. Unit Replacement with a Spare n
Table continues
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
20
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
GENERAL PROCEDURES n
1. Introduction n
2. Software Download n
3. Upgrading Proc. fro Rel. 2.6/2.6.1 ”C” to Rel. 2.7/2.7.1 n
4. Upgrading Proc. from 1651SM to 1661SMC Ring Net. n
ANNEXES (LIST) n
1. Annexes
A Not envisaged
1.7.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 created on March 12, 2001 is the first validated and officially released version of the handbook.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
21
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS
2.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with drymaterial and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed whilethe artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
• Apply dry gauze on the burns;
• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
22
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is layingon an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in hismouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head.Put a hand under the patient’s head and oneunder his neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’shead and let it recline backwards as far aspossible
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:place your thumb between his chin and hismouth, the index along his jawbone, and keepthe other fingers closed together (see fig.).While performing these operations take a goodsupply of oxygen by taking deep breaths withyour mouth open.
With your thumb between the patient’s chinand mouth keep his lips together and blow intohis nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe ifthe patient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it ispossible that his nose is blocked: in that caseopen the patient’s mouth as much as possibleby pressing on his chin with your hand, placeyour lips around his mouth and blow into hisoral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chestheaves. This second method can be usedinstead of the first even when the patient’snose is kept closed by pressing the nostrilstogether using the hand you were holding hishead with. The patient’s head must be keptsloping backwards as much as possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen expira-tions per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained consciousness, oruntil a doctor has ascertained his death.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
23
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2 Norms and labels
Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATEL’s designed and manufactured equipmentto obtain the following information:
– COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.
– SAFETY RULES
• General rules
• Harmful optical signals
• Risk of explosion
• Moving mechanical parts
• Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
– ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
– ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD)
– EQUIPMENT LABELS
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, Work–Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s, loadedwith software applicatives described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructor’s technicaldocumentation.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
24
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
25
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Other abbreviations, besides the ones indicated below, are directly explained in the Figures, Tables, ect.containing them.For example, the alarm acronyms indicated on the SYNTHESIS and AS & C sceens are specified in therelevant paragraphs and described on the sceens. The unit alarm acronyms are specified in theMAINTENANCE section.
Table 4. List of abbreviations
ABBREVIATION MEANING
ADM UPG Upgrading Add–Drop Multiplexer
AFI Authority and Format Identifier
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
ANV Alcatel
AS&C Alarm Status and Control
APS Automatic Protection Switching ( New terminology is : MS Linear Trail Protection)
ATTD Attended (Alarm storing)
AU Administrative Unit
AUX Auxiliary
BBE Background Block Error
BER Bit Error Rate
BID Bidirectional
BIP Byte Interleaving Parity
CIT (CT) Craft Interface Terminal (Craft Terminal)
CLEI Common Language Equipment Identification
CLNP Connectionless Network Protocol
CNF Configuration
CRC 4 Cyclic Redundancy Code
CRU Clock Reference Unit
D/C Drop and Continue
D/I Drop Insert
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
26
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
ABBREVIATION MEANING
DCC2 Data Communication Channel
DC/DC Power Supply
DL Download
DRT Drift
E East
EACT Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EEPROM Electrically erasable/programmable read only memory
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EQT Equipment
ERS Element Regeneration Section
ES Errored Seconds
ES End System
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESCT Enhanced Shelf Controller Telettra
GOSIP Governement Open System Interconnection Profile
HPA Higher order Path Adaptation
HPC Higher order Path Connection
HPT Higher order Path Termination
HVC Higher order Virtual Container
IDI Initial Domain Identifier
IECB Intra Equipment Card Bus
IP Internet Protocol
IS Intermediate System
IS ACT In service and active
IS STBY In service and standby
ISO International Standards Organization
ITU–T (NB1) International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunications sector
LAN Local Area Network
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
27
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
ABBREVIATION MEANING
LAPD Link Acces Procedure on D–channel
LOP Loss of Pointer
LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
LPC Lower order Path Connection
LPT Lower order Path Termination
LVC Lower order Virtual Container
MAC Medium Access Control
ME Management Equipment ( referred to OS )
MM Maintenance Memory
MNE Master Network Element
MPX Multiplexer
MS – MST Multiplexer Section – Multiplexer Section Termination
MSA Multiplexer Section Adaptation
MS SPRING Multiplexer Section Shared Protection Ring
NE Network Element
NETCAS Network Equipment Craft Terminal Application Software
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NTP Network Time Synchronization Protocol
OFS – OOFS Out of Frame Seconds
OH OverHead
ORA Out of Range of LASER output Power
OS Operation System
OSI Open System Interconnection
PBA Printed Board Assembly (synonymous with ”unit”)
PC Personal Computer
PI Phisical Interface
PJ – PJC Pointer Justification – Pointer Justification Counter
PM Performance Monitoring
P/N Part Number
PPI Plesiochronous Physical Interface
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
28
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
ABBREVIATION MEANING
PPS Path Protection Switching ( new terminology is : Sub Network ConnectionProtection )
PSE Protection Switching Element
QB3 Interface with Protocol B3
QECC Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel
R Read
RAM Random Access Memory
R – ECT REMOTE ECT
R – EACT REMOTE EACT
RS – RST Regenerator Section – Regenerator Section Termination
SA Section Adaptation
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SE Errored seconds
SES Severely Errored Seconds
SETG Sycrhonous Equipment Timing Generation Function
SM Synchronous Multiplexer
SMEC Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment Controller
SM–C Compact Synchronous Multiplexer
SNCP Sub Network Connection Protection (substitutes PPS)
SMS Synchronous Multiplexer Section
SPI Synchronous Physical Interface
SPS Synchronous Path Section
SSM Synchronous Status Messages
SSMM Synchronous Status Messages Management
SSMA Synchronous Status Messages Algorithm
SSMB Synchronous Status Messages Byte
SSU Synchronous Supply Unit
STM1 Synchronous Transport Module 155Mbit/s
STM4 Synchronous Transport Module 622Mbit/s
STM16 Synchronous Transport Module 2488Mbit/s
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
29
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
ABBREVIATION MEANING
SW Software
SWP Software Product
SWDW Software Download
TCA Threshold cross
TMN Telecomunication Management Network
TP Terminal Points
TPI Timing Physical Interface
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group
UAS – UAS BIDI Unavailable Seconds – Bidirectional Unavailable Seconds
UAT–UT Unavailable Time
UN C2 Unequipped Signal label ( byte C2 )
VC Virtual Container
W West/Write
WTR Wait Time to Restore
NB1–
Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR and CCITT)in 1992 ( and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITU–R and ITU–T, respectively.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
30
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
31
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
DESCRIPTIONS
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
32
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
33
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1 HW/SW PREREQUISITES FOR SOFTWARE LOADING
1.1 Hardware configuration
With regard to the installation and the distribution of the product, the system configuration consists of:
– a 486 Personal Computer compliant with the following minimal configuration:
• a monochromatic video
• a Microsoft compatible mouse,
• an asynchronous communication port (referred as COM 1 or COM 2),
• one 3” 1/2 floppy disk drives (1 , 44MB)
Using Windows 3.1 and 3.11 :
– at least 8 MB of RAM,
– one 40 MB hard disk (80 MB or more can be necessary depending on equipment and/or networksize)
Using Windows 95 and 98
– at least 16 MB of RAM (using a configuration with 24 MB of RAM will increase performances)
– one 270 MB hard disk
This configuration can be completed with:
– memory extensions
– a printer (serial or parallel known by WINDOWS)
– a color video with high resolution
Using Windows 95 or 98 it is necessary to check the desktop model and the screen resolution. Select thescreen proprieties and select the Windows standard model for the desktop.
Set the screen resolution to 640x480 16 colors.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
34
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1.2 Operative ambient
The following software items are required:
• MS–DOS Microsoft operative system of a version equal to or greater than 5.0.
• WINDOWS 3.1 (Copyright Microsoft Corporation) or 3.11.
or :
• WINDOWS 95 (Copyright Microsoft Corporation) or 98.
• Applicative software ”SWP ECT 1651 SM” implementing the equipment managementfunctions.NECTAS (Copyright ALCATEL–CIT) is contained in this applicative.
• The above software applicative can be substituted with the ”SWP EACT 1651 SM” featuring:Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool (EACT).
• The Applicative ”SWP R–ECT 1651 SM ” Remote Equip. Craft Terminal Software is availableas an alternative where a centralized management for small SDH networks is requested( ” F ” interface ).
• The previous SWP can be substituted with the ” SWP R–EACT 1651 SM ” that supplies theEACT feature for the Remote Craft Terminal functions.
• Applicative software ”SWP 1651 SM” containing the software program to load on theequipment.
• The ”SWP EQ. CONTR. SWDL ” contains the SW which allows the direct access to the SWDownload function . Through it the Equipment Controller will be updated to the SW releasebeing currently used.
N.B. In this Release the SW applicative managing the equipment is supplied in several versions, oneexcluding the other, with / without EACT ,with / without Remote Craft Terminal functions.This Handbook describes the ”SWP R – ECT 1651 SM applicative software. The alternativeapplicative software ”SWP EACT 1651 SM ” or ”SWP R – EACT 1651 SM” performscongruence checks on the configuration functions, therefore some windows and options maydiffer from those supplied in this handbook and in no way affect correct equipmentmanagement.Each of these applicative SW may manage the ”DROP SHELF equipment (1641 SM – D ) thatis an optional 2Mbit/s extension of the 1651 SM Line Shelf one.The Drop Shelf is described in the relevant Technical Handbook, while the relevant PCmanagement is described in this Operator’s Manual.The Drop Shelf extension management is possible only using the SMEC 2 equipment controllerunit and the DS Future Bus Termination Unit.Nevertheless the upgrading of the ESCT equipment controller unit at 2.4 Release is alsoallowed whether the Drop Shelf extension is not implemented.
1.2.1 Year 2000 Data Time Compliance
The SW product (NE SW Package and CT SW Packages) supplied, are Year 2000 compliant.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
35
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1.3 Physical supports of the release software
The product is supplied on 3.5” disks formatted at 1.4 MB.
The diskettes are indicated in :
Table 5. Software products
FACTORYPart Number ANV Part Number N.B.
SWP 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 415.100.625 D 3AL 38237 AA–– 3
SWP ECT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 415.100.622 A 3AL 38234 AA–– 1,4
SWP EACT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 415.100.621 H 3AL 38213 AA–– 1,5
SWP R–ECT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 415.100.624 C 3AL 38236 AA–– 1,6
SWP R–EACT 1651 SM Rel. 2.7 415.100.623 B 3AL 38235 AA–– 1,7
SWP EQ. CONTROLLER SWDL 415.100.125 Y 3AL 34939 AA–– 2
NOTE 1: Contains, in the first three diskettes, the ”1320 NX ” NECTAS applicative ( ALCATEL–CIT).The release of NECTAS applicative can be read in the first of these diskettes, in the”ETIQ.INF” file.
NOTE 2 : Software to be loaded onto the Craft Terminal to download the Equipment Controller whenthe management Software is not known or not available, starting from rel. 2.3 of the 1641SM or rel. 2.1 of the 1651SM or rel. 1.0 of the 1664SM or rel. 1.0 of the 1641SMTor rel. 1.0 of the 1655/66 SR. For details refer to para.2.3 on page 434.
NOTE 3 : Software to load on the Equipment Controller and on the Card controller of the variousUnits
NOTE 4 : Software containing the Craft Terminal Management Applicatives
NOTE 5 : Software containing the Craft Terminal Management Applicatives with EACT
NOTE 6 : Software containing the Remote Craft Terminal Management Applicative
NOTE 7 : Software containing the Remote Craft Terminal Management Applicative with EACT
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
36
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
37
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2 OPERATIVE FUNCTIONS
2.1 Introduction
As stated in ITU–T Rec. G.784, the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C can be controlled:
• by a PC (CIT) through interface F (in a local mode). NB.
• by a workstation utilized for the TMN through interface QB3* (in a remote mode).
This Operator’s Manual describes the PC management.
N.B. By a PC and F interface each NE can control in a remote way the NEs of a SDH network (max32 NEs included itself) by means of the R – ECT / R – EACT SWP.
This SW Product executes the management functions required by a local operator to locallymanage the NE 1651 SM / 1661 SM–C, (included the 1641SM–D equipment that in the followingit will be considered always present) and performs the same management function for all theNEs connected to the master in a network.
This applicative contains the facilities to recognise and reach the NEs of the network and toperform a dialogue between Master and the other NEs of the network.
While the Master NE must be downloaded with the RECT (or R EACT) SWP, all the NEs mustbe downloaded with a SWP in current release (not necessarily RECT or REACT) because thisrelease support the remote function.
The procedure for a Network Creation is described in para 4.12 on page 332.
In the Local and Remote management the main functions permit to:
• know the failure/event conditions on the equipment
• perform the remote controls
• know information about the service quality level
• set, know and modify information about configurations.
• up–date equipment release through software download (in the local management only)
The ”SWP 1651 SM” software product is used to software load the equipment by the local operator.
The operative sequences of the software download are described in the GENERAL PROCEDURESsection.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
38
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2 Product Applications
After having physically connected the PC to the Equipment, open the NECTAS tool.
The first screen You see, referred as Alarm Synthesis, presents managements options, alarms & statussynthesis for each of the handeled NEs, global alarm & status synthesis.The complete list of indication and meanings is reported in para 4.3 on page 52.
The ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL 1651 SM” functions are carried out through the following applications:
• Administrative• Equipment configuration• Connections configuration with Matrix• Drop Shelf Connections configuration• Local configuration• Routing Table configuration• Alarms, status and remote–controls• Maintenance Memory• G.784 Performance Monitoring• Software download• Remote Inventory
Besides each of these 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be connected to a 1641SM –D equipment.In the following the first will be cited as LINE SHELF and the last one as DROP SHELF.
The 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be utilized as a Mediation device to manage, from Craft Terminalor Operation System, other Alcatel non SDH equipment.
For this function the following applications are available to the operator:
• Administrative• Alarms, status and remote–controls• Local configuration
2.2.1 Administrative
The Administrative application is used for the station operators management.
It is not used for the NE management (except for the ”logout”)
The Administrative application allows to:
• execute equipment logout operation (disconnect the operators from the NE)
• modify the password for the current operators
• create or delete the permission for the operators to access the NEThe relevant password is defined
• define the ”level” of each operator by enabling him or not to use the applications available.
• display the operations made available through the software applications for each configuredoperator
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
39
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.2 Configuration Application
The configuration applications are used for the software setting of the NE.The main use of these applications concerns the turn–on of the NE in order to put it in service (operation).They are also utilized in all the plant extension or modification.It is also possible to verify the configuration without modification.
Different configuration applications are possible:
• Equipment configuration• Connection configuration with Matrix• Drop Shelf Connection configuration ( SMEC EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT AND DS
FUTURE BUS TERMINATION NEEDED)• Local configuration• Routing Table configuration
Each of the above can carry out the following operations:
• Create a configuration file.
The operator can utilize a list of tables called configuration parameters.The default values of each table can be modified and saved in a configuration file.This file will have an univocal name and will be added to the list of the configuration files thatcan be sent to the NE.
• Open/Modify an existing configuration file
The operator can modify the previously created and identified configuration files as long as theyare open.The modified data can be then stored again in the same file or a new configuration file can becreated.
• Forward a previously stored configuration file to the NE.This condition corresponds to a change or reset of configuration data on the NE so as to activatea specific function of the NE.When the operator selects this option, a list of all the configuration files available for the NEappears. The operator can select the desired configuration file.
• Receive the current configuration of the NE.This option permits to know the configuration present on the NE. The required configuration isstored in a file that the operator can read and control.
• Check the configuration values present on different configuration files (audit).With this option the operator can compare different configuration files so as to detect differencesand then clear those files not corresponding to certain criteria.
• Clear a configuration file from the list.A configuration file is cleared only after having selected its name from the list shown to theoperator
• Fill/check–in the File Header, title and indication on files• Check the Default Status of the configuration tables.
The tables of each different configuration application can be modified and up–dated.After having updated the configuration, the tables are sent to the NE. The TMN authorizes the executionof the configuration procedure. The authorization is managed by the NE. If the Craft Terminal cannotmodify the configuration because it has been disabled by TMN, the NE forwards the Access Enabledalarm. The latter is signalled in the general synthesis (AE).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
40
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.2.1 Equipment Configuration Application
The application allows to realize the main software setting relating to equipment’s units functionalities as,for example, the subrack configuration, the synchronization, the EPS/APS protection, the alarm criteria,etc.
For the complete list refer to para.4.5.2 on page 82.
2.2.2.2 Connection Configuration with Matrix Application
The application allows to realize the software setting relating to the connection of the equipment as, forexample, the connection between the incoming/outgoing signals (drop–insert, pass–through, etc), todefine the signal structure etc.
For the complete list refer to para.4.5.3 on page 119.
2.2.2.3 Drop Shelf Connection configuration
The application allows to realize the software setting relating to the connection of the DROP SHELFequipment as, for example, the connection between the incoming/outgoing signals (drop–insert,pass–through, etc).
These selections are only possible with the use of the SMEC and DS Future Bus Termination unit.
For the complete list refer to para.4.5.4 on page 170.
2.2.2.4 Local Configuration Application
This application is utilized for local data configuration inherent to the NE with TMN supervisory networkmanagement with OS or Remote Craft Terminal Management.
For the complete list refer to para. 4.5.5 on page 178 .
2.2.2.5 Routing Table Configuration Application
For the TMN management routing of messages between NE and OS is automatically carried out by meansof ”IS–IS Routing”.Only for elements not supporting this function it is necessary to fill the Routing tables.The Routing configuration tables are listed in para.4.5.6 on page 189.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
41
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.3 Alarms, status and remote–controls
The alarm, status and remote–control application permits to:
• display the alarm and status• display/print the alarm history and status• enter the remote controls
The application is mainly used by the operator during the maintenance phase for troubleshootingpurposes.It also permits, both in the turn–on and in operation phases, to check the alarms and status conditions.By means of the Remote Control, it is possible to test NE operative functions (for turn–on andmaintenance ).
The following description applies to both local or remote NE pertaining to a SDH subnetwork when properlyactivated.
The AS & C subsystem (Alarms, Status and Remote–controls) systematically polls the equipment.The polling time is established by the equipment when this is connected.The messages received from the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C can be:
• alarms/alarm clearing• entity status changes• answers to the remote controls sent to the NE by the Craft Terminal.
Upon receiving the message, the AS & C must identify and display the contents and afterwards file it withall the other alarms that have occurred on the NE.
The video shows both the logical and physical aspects of the NE.
The logical and physical structure will depend on the configuration that the operator has sent to the NE.
Only the configured units appear on the screen.
Each displayed unit is assigned with an alarm–indicating label.
When the AS&C displays a received alarm, it uses different symbols.
Depending on the severity of the alarm, i.e.:
• URGENT
• NOT URGENT
• INDICATIVE
The boxes assigned to the alarms can assume different colours and symbols according to
• the category assigned to the alarm
• the type of alarm occurred on the NE.
Each alarm has an identifier (mnemonic name) associated to a specific source (processed device).The current alarms can be simultaneously displayed in a graphic and text format.The alarm location can be accessed with the aid of the mouse or a set of keys on the keyboard.
The ZOOMING function gives a detailed view of each unit.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
42
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.3.1 Alarm and status handling
The NE forwards alarms and status criteria.
The Alarm, Status and Control applications (AS&C) offer three different informations on the errors:
1 ) Alarm synthesis indicating the active alarms and states.
2 ) Detail of the alarm states
3 ) Alarm history and status
The alarm synthesis displays the alarms occurred on the NEThis synthesis is an OR’ing of alarms classified as URGENT, NOT URGENT, INDICATIVE etc.The alarm report is displayed when the alarms occur.
Each alarm or event is recorded in a history file containing the following information on each alarm:
• date
• hour
• unit
• type of alarm
• alarm severity
• alarm status
Data research in an alarm history file occurs through:
• date
• unit
• type of alarm
• alarm severity
or reading all the alarms
THE ALARM HISTORY IS STORED ON THE P.C. HARD DISK. The storing procedure depends on thehard disk configuration (min. 80 Mbyte).
The video indication of the AS&C application is divided into different levels.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
43
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.3.1.1 First level: Logic and Physic blocks
The first level, for both Line and Drop shelf shows the following functional blocks:
• Alarm Synthesis block
• Logic block rapresentation of the Equipment
• Physical block rapresentation of the Equipment
On the screen are also represented the following functions:
• MS SPRING – Node and command Status, with reference to the MS SPRING protection(1661SM–C Line Shelf only)
• OS – (Operating System Status), it shows which OS,Main or Spare, is active (Line Shelf only)
• SW VERSION – shows the SW version for all units
• PPS (SNCP) – contains two forced switch (EAST/WEST) indications
The synthesis indicates the status of the equipment through highlighted screen labels that reports generalalarms and status indication as urgent / not urgent alarm, power fail, OS isolation, etc.
The complete list can be found in Table 9. on page 193.
The logic block if opened by clicking on it, describes the functional units making up the equipment andit contains two alarm indications.
Logical Alarm Synthesis – It is a synthesis of all alarms coming from all units of the equipment
Abnormal Conditions – Synthesis of AC status indications pertaining the units housed in theEquipment
The physical block shows the equipment hardware configuration and the states of the NE units (the unitsare as those of the Logical Block). It contains the following indications:
Card Fail
Internal Failure
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
44
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.3.1.2 Second level
Clicking inside the Logic box we reach the 2nd screen level.
Each unit housed in both Line and Drop Shelf is provided with the following indicators:
• unit alarm
• unit abnormal condition (not for AUX/EOW Unit)
• Unit in–service or out–of–service status
• Active or stand–by status
Clicking inside the physical box the following indication are provided :
• Card Fail
• Unit alarm
and only for the Switch unit:
• Card missing
• Card mismatch
• Card Fail
The following indication is provided for the Drop Shelf STM – 1 E Module:
• Card fail or card missing
When the slot indicates ”ACTIVE”, the AS&C application displays the units that are really in–service witha blue coloring.
When the slot indicates ”NOT ASSIGNED”, the AS&C application displays a blank slot.If the unit is faulty, extracted or inserted in a not assigned slot, the NE will send an alarm report.
Clicking inside the Physical box we reach a 2nd screen level in which is shown a HW configuration.
The slot No. indicated on the screen is the position of the unit inside the subrack in their sequential orderstarting from left to right and from top to bottom.
2.2.3.1.3 Detailed levels
For the equipment’s unit and for the functional blocks of the main screen, deepest levels of detail areprovided. They are activated by means of the zooming function. They represent, for example, ITU–Tcompliant functional blocks with the detailed alarm and status indications.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
45
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.3.2 Remote controls
These commands are utilized to force functions on the NE as for example: restart the software on theequipment, alarm attending, enable/disable loopback on the units, force/clear EPS/APS protections andsynchronizations.
A complete list of the commands can be found in para 4.6.3 on page 254 .
TMN (if present) must authorize the commands because these reconfigure the NE.The NE manages the authorization protocol. If the alarm indicating OS isolation is present, authorizationis not necessary.
2.2.4 Maintenance Memory Application
The Maintenance Memory application enables access to a NE memory area. The latter shall contain thedata concerning beginning/ending of the events (alarms, status etc.).that have occurred on the NE proper.
The mainly application is used by the operator during the maintenance phase for troubleshootingpurposes.It also permits, both in the turn–on and in operation phases, to check the alarms and status history.
The Maintenance Memory is structured in a series of blocks each of which is associated to an entity definedinside the NE. Each entity consists of a series of events which, by means of blocks, can be stored insidethe Maintenance Memory.
The entities are arranged into groups.
The events can be read from the NE following operator request only, through selections carried out in theapplication proper.
Moreover it is possible to:
• save the maintenance data in a file
• delete a maintenance data file
• clear the whole maintenance memory.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
46
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2.5 G.784 Performance Monitoring Application
The Performance Monitoring Application permits to check the quality of the links on Sections and Path(tributary and aggregate).
This permits to make checks, in sequence of day or quarter–of hour periods, during the ”in service”operation and for Routing Maintenance.
This application permits to:
• Enable/disable the performance monitoring counters of the NE Terminal Points (TP) by meansof different operation and configuration modes
• Display and/or print the performance monitoring results received from the NE.• Store the performance monitoring results in a history file
The performance monitoring information is displayed on the three screen levels:
• The first level displays the error synthesis of all the enabled TP’s.• The second level screen displays the error synthesis of the counters of the selected TP.• The third and last level displayes the values of the counters of the selected TP.
2.2.6 Software Download
This application permits to up–date the software version of the Equipment without interrupting regularoperation.In this way the equipment follows the product evolution.
Software download is carried out by sending through the ”F” interface, the ”NE equipment software”previously installed in the P.C.
Software download can be carried out from the Operation System, in a centralized mode in the network.
2.2.7 Remote Inventory
Remote Inventory application allow to display information about all the unit of the equipment, needed bythe customer to check and monitor the installed equipment (identification, construction data ect.).
In this way it makes easier the NE station management.
2.2.8 Mediation function
The 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be utilized as a Mediation device to manage, from Craft Terminalor Operation System, other Alcatel non SDH equipment.
When this function is used, the following application (referred to the mediation function), are present:
• Alarms, status and remote–controls• Local configuration• Administrative
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
47
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3 PRODUCT INTERFACE
The product has two main interfaces:
• User interface
• 1651 SM/1661 SM–C interface
The first interface consists of the Windows Microsoft system with windows, scrolling–down menu andmouse functions.
The local operator can traverse the tree–structured environment thus selecting the applications andfunctions allowed.With regard to the second interface, the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C is linked to the PC through the RS 232 Cport.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
48
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
49
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4 DIALOGUE MODE
4.1 Introduction
In this chapter all the management operations carried out by means the craft terminal are presented.This is made by means description of all the available screens.
The description given herein, concerns only the equipment management applications obtained with theSWP Equipment Craft Terminal applicative.
The para 4.12 on page 332 describes the creation of a network to remote manage several NEs with a CraftTerminal.
The software product utilizes the MicroSoft WINDOWS system which facilitates the management of thevideo masks utilized for the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C.
The operator can utilize two different instruments (one cannot exclude the other) to move across the videoto select applications, operations and various menus:
• a MOUSE which permits to move the cursor (arrow) across the screen, and selections are madeby clicking one of the 2 buttons;
• a KEYBOARD which permits to use some function keys, i.e.,: TAB and arrows for vertical andhorizontal movements.
Each mask is always provided with some functional keys, specifically:
< RETURN > to confirm the choice made
< OK > \ < Cancel > to confirm or cancel a choice/request/modification
< ESC > to quit the operation in progress
< F1 > The ”Help” information depends on the selected screen.It is arranged in pages and the operator can scroll all the pagesthus viewing all the instructions inherent to the applicationinvolved.
The information stated above is applicable to all the operations handled by the operator.The operative sequences concerning download is given in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section.
In different screen of this handbook is not indicated the release number which is instead presentin the screen displayed to the operator.This is due to the fact that the same screen is associated to different release.
Sometimes the release number reported is only for example.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
50
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.2 Operator access
After having activated the procedure (see Chapter 4 on page 361 , Commissioning Section) the screenof Figure 1. is displayed indicating the need for operator identifier and password to login.
Figure 1. Operator identifier and password
Hence the Alarm Synthesis window will appear.The window is referred to the whole network which the present NE belongs to (see Figure 2. )
The screen shows the following indications:
• the title• the options• the Global Synthesis alarm pertaining to all NEs of the Network• the equipment above / below (if any ) alarm synthesis for all those NEs that don’t take place
in main screen.• the alarm synthesis of the NE’s
TITLEOPTIONSGLOBALABOVENE’s
BELOW
(LOCAL)
Figure 2. Alarm synthesis
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
51
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
For each Network Element is presented one string with the relevant synthesis of the alarm.
When for a NE the Q2 Mediation Function is activated (to manage non SDH equipment), another synthesisstring is present.
Further, for each non SDH equipment, a proper accessible synthesis string is activated.
The software is suitable for:
• operators without technical know–how• operators with technical know–how
The ADMINISTRATIVE application assigns operators of different technical know–how with various levelsof applications.For example, operators having no technical background must be assigned with a level which preventsthem accessing Configurations or Remote Controls. Moreover, each operators must be given aPASSWORD.
Upon activating the application, the Synthesis line of the PC screen will display the DC alarm indicatingthe Default Configuration.The indication will disappear after that the operator sends a configuration file for each of the configurationapplications.Moreover, each window can display the software product utilized by clicking the mouse button on thetriangular glyph at the top–left screen in the options row ( see as an example the Figure 3. )
Figure 3. Data on software product
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
52
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.3 Alarm synthesis window
Through the Alarm synthesis window is utilized the software product and displayed the alarms withoutdetailing the applications.
This window provides the following options:
VIEW, BELL, APPLICATION CHOICE, HISTORY and HELP
VIEW this option, if selected, shows the following choices (see Figure 4. onpage 53 ).
• ALPHAMODE• GRAPHIC MODE• FAULTY ELEMENT / ALL ELEMENT• COMPLETE SYNTHESIS LIST• NETWORK• SUBNETWORK / EQUIPMENT• REFERENCES
The ALPHA MODE and GRAPHICAL MODE options allows to choosebetween textual or graphical equipment synthesis and equipment ma-nagement.
The FAULTY ELEMENT / ALL ELEMENT option permits to display thealarm synthesis of the NEs with active alarms or the alarm synthesisof all the NEs.
By activating the COMPLETE SYNTHESIS LIST option is activated thestring inherent to the master NE 1651SM in addition to the GlobalSynthesis alarm string. See Figure 5. on page 53. By clicking on the NE1651SM string, the ”Application Choice ” option is activated.
The NETWORK option allows to initialize the Remote functionalitiesafter having applied the RECT configuration, stated in the Chapter4.12 on page 332. The alternative SUBNETWORK / EQUIPMENTchoice if selected deactivates the Remote functions and enable thesimple local management.
The REFERENCE OPTION is not active. For each unit the SWversion is indicated in the file ” SWKIT.TXT” of SWP 1651SM of thecurrent release (diskette 1).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
53
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 4. View selection
Figure 5. Main screen
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
54
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
BELL this option permits to choose the DISABLE, the CUT OFF and theALARM CUT OFF functions. See Figure 6.
The first disables the BEEP that indicates an alarm condition on theNE, symbol V denotes disabling; the second disables the BIP butenables the Craft Terminal to receive the N.E.’s further alarms; thethird ” ALARM CUT OFF” attents the alarms (AT label indication)One alarm at time is attended.
Figure 6. Bell selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
55
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
APPLICATION CHOICE this option opens a subwindow (see Figure 7. ) which permits toselect one application among those available.
The ”application choice” option is accessible after having activatedthe NE local alarm synthesis string.
When activating the ”Mediation function”, another different list of”application choice” is presented. This function is presented at para4.11 on page 324.
Figure 7. Alarm synthesis – Application choice
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
56
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
HISTORY This function allows to store in the PC events occurred during theoperation, only when the PC is connected th the NE.
The ”HISTORY” option permits to DISPLAY, PRINT or save in aFILE the synthesis information received from the NE(see Figure 8. ).
The operator can select the data to DISPLAY or PRINT through thefollowing choices ( See Figure 9. on page 57 ):
Secondary to define which NE of the network to select the data See Figure 10. on page 57.
Mnemonic it is possible to select ALL the synthesis alarms or aspecific Synthesis alarm from the presented list.See Figure 11. on page 58.
Date Filter When enabled (X) permits to define the Begin/end data time of the selected ” MNEMONIC ” Synthesis alarm.
After having selected the desired data, a 12–row video window(containing the last 12 alarms) is available.
This window can be scrolled so as to display all the alarms con-cerned with the selections made, listed from the most recent to theleast recent ones (see Figure 12. on page 58).
If printing had been selected instead, the printer will receive all themessages inherent to the characteristics entered.
HELP This option permits to obtain information on the alarm synthesisoption and display the types of cursors.
To select an option, click the mouse left–button once.
Figure 8. Alarm synthesis – History, display, print or file selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
57
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 9. Alarm synthesis – Selection on history
Figure 10. Alarm synthesis – Selection on secondary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
58
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 11. Alarm synthesis – Selection on mnemonic
Figure 12. Alarm synthesis – History data
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
59
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
In this release by means of the R–ECT functionality the 1651SM equipment can manage devicefunctions towards a max of 32 equipment pertaining to the same local network.
The management functionalities offered by the R–ECT function are similar to those offered by an OS
In fact the R – ECT product allows a centralized management system for small SDH networks.The R–ECT functions provide a remote login facility allowing the R_ECT operator attached to oneNE via F interface, to monitor several NEs and to start a login session on the local NE or on any ofthe remote configured NEs on condition that they had been loaded with a software version supportingthe R–ECT feature.The R–ECT product permits to realize the same application of the Craft Terminal Local managementexcept for the Software Download, not allowed.The R–ECT operator can select by means of the VIEW option the connection with all the NEs of thenetwork or the local connection directly through the F interface. For all these connections theoperator is requested to type the relevant LOGIN.
The Figure 5. on page 53 shows the Main screen in the case of single NE alarm synthesis.
It is shown the alarm synthesis of the whole network that is the ”Global synthesis” alarm string. It isthe system synthesis alarms OR’ing of the NEs managed by the R_ECT operator.
The ”Equipment above ” and the ”Equipment below” alarm synthesis concern the NEs managed bythe R_ECT operator and not displayed on the current screen.
The ”Application choice” option associated with the equipment selected, is accessed when selectingthe Equipment string.
The window also indicates the equipment name and release and the OSI address (M for ADM NEof the network and S, not applicable in this release, for eventual PDH equipment connected to thesingle NE acting as a Mediation Device). As an alternative the R_ECT operator can give a name tothe NE .
The ”Equipment above / below” alarm indication rows are always present.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
60
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The labels on these windows will change colours when an alarm condition arises. See Table 6. andTable 7. on page 61.
The Global Synthesis labels on the Network Stations window with reference to Figure 5. on page 53 arethe followings:
Table 6. Synthesis labels and colours ( Global Synth., Network Stations)
NORMAL ALARM (or active)
EF Equipment Failure – No answer from NE White Red
DF Dialogue Failure – Wrong answer from NE White Red
AS Alarm Stop – Bell disable White Green
AT Alarm receiving attention White Magenta
UG Urgent Alarm White Red
NG Not Urgent Alarm White Yellow
HA Housekeeping Alarms White NB1
SA Service affecting – (dialog with OS) White Magenta
DA Distant Alarm (IND Network alarm synthesis) White Magenta
SF Signal Failure – (dialog with OS) White Magenta
ST Status indicator (abnormal indication) White Green
TC Craft Terminal Connected to the NE Green White (Not connected)
AE
Access Enable: Local Craft Terminal accessenabled by the management Operative System.
When ”disabled” the Local operator can ”read”information without ”writing”.
Green White (disabled)
DC Default Configuration: the NE is configured withthe default values
White Black (default)
LC Loss of Configuration: The configurations in the N.E. are lost
White Red (loss)
BU
Three Remote F Terminals connected.It rises in the case of three R–ECT operatorsopened a management session at the same timeon the present NE. NB2
White Blue
NB1 : The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping Alarms received: red for Urgent, yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most severe alarm is present when more than one alarm is detected.
NB2 : BU indication is only shown when a network has been created for the Remote Craft Terminalmanagement.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
61
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The managed labels and colours relevant to the Local NE are:
Table 7. Synthesis labels and colours ( Local NE )
NORMAL ALARM (or active)
EF Equipment Failure – No answer from NE White Red
DF Dialogue Failure – Wrong answer from NE White Red
AT Alarm receiving attention White Magenta
UG Urgent Alarm White Red
NG Not Urgent Alarm White Yellow
HI Housekeeping Indication White NB1
IN Indicative alarm White Magenta
AC Abnormal Condition White Magenta
TC Craft Terminal Connected to the NE Green White (Not connected)
AE
Access Enable: Local Craft Terminal accessenabled by the management Operative System.
When ”disabled” the Local operator can ”read”information without ”writing”.
Green White (disabled)
DC Default Configuration: the NE is configured withthe default values
White Black (default)
LC Loss of Configuration: The configurations in the N.E. are lost
White Red (loss)
BU
Three Remote F Terminals connected.It rises in the case of three R–ECT operatorsopened a management session at the same timeon the present NE. NB2
White Blue
NB1 : The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping received: red for Urgent,yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most severe alarmis present when more than one alarm is detected.
NB2 : BU indication is only shown when a network has been created for remote Craft Terminal management.
The labels report the alarm mnemonic only. To display the whole name of the alarm, position the mousepointer (depicted as a hand with pointing forefinger, see Figure 13. on page 62) on the relative label andclick and keep pressed the left mouse–button.
The alarm name will appear. This condition does not indicate if the alarm is present or not.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
62
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 13. Types of cursor
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
63
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4 Administrative application
4.4.1 Description
By means of the Administrative application the following functions are carried out:
• Logout, thus interrupting connection between the Craft Terminal and NE.• Modify the operator’s current password• Display the enabled operator list and relevant allowed applications• Create new operators• Modify the level of the enabled operators• Delete operators’ enable
The Administrative application can be activated by executing the following selections:
• the option ”Application choice” from the main menu.This selection displays the list of applications available.
• the option ”Administrative” from the list of applications available.
Upon selecting the Administrative option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 14. ):
• File• Receive• Operator• Help
Figure 14. Administrative
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described maintenance menu.General information on the Administrative product is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
The ”Help” option displays the description of each administrative command.The ”File” and ”Receive” options are not operative.
The ”Operator” options is detailed in the paragraph that follow.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
64
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4.2 Operator option
By selecting this option the operator accesses the administrative function (see Figure 15. ) describedhereinafter.
Figure 15. Administrative – Functions List
4.4.2.1 Logout
The selection of the ”Logout” option permits to interrupt the connection between the Craft Terminal andthe NE. The screen of Figure 16. displays the request for logout acknowledgement.By pressing OK the Craft Terminal and the NE are disconnected and the procedure returns to the initialphase illustrated in Figure 1. on page 50.The ”Logout” must be executed at the end of the operations for safety reasons.
Figure 16. Administrative – Logout acknowledgement
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
65
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4.2.2 Password
The selection of the Password option allows to modify the password of the operator that is executing theapplication.The screen of Figure 17. is displayed. It is necessary to enter the previous password and twice the newpassword. Hence click on OK, at this point the screen of Figure 18. is displayed indicating that operationhas taken place.
Figure 17. Administrative – Password change
Figure 18. Administrative – Password Change Successful
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
66
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4.2.3 Date
Date and Time are given to the NE from one of the following sources (according to their presence) in thefollowing order:
– from the NTP (Network Time synchronization Protocol) server
– from the OS
– from the R–ECT
Current date represents the NE date received from one of the above listed sources.
New date represents the date the user wants to set if the NE receives date and time from the R–ECT .Tomodify it, connect the Craft Terminal to the MASTER NE and use the Windows Control Panel .
If the NE receives date and time from the NTP / OS a change of date performed from CT is not effective.
TZ represent the time zone .
Please refer to para 4.12.6 on page 347 for Time Management.
Figure 19. Administrative – Date
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
67
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4.2.4 Display
The selection of the Display option permits to view the list of authorized operators and the applicationswhich he is authorized to read (consult) and eventually write (intervene) (see Figure 20. ).
Figure 20. Administrative – Display
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
68
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4.2.5 Create
The Create option permits to enter a new operator.The screen of Figure 21. is displayed and the following operations must be carried out:
• Enter the Operator’s identifier
• Select the operator’s level for which he has been enabledFigure 21. illustrates the levels and relevant names of the enabled applications(R=read – consult, W=write – modification)
• enter the relevant password twice.
To enable click on OK.
Figure 21. Administrative – Create Operator
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
69
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4.2.6 Modify
The Modify option permits to modify the operator’s profile (level). The screen of Figure 22. is displayed,the operation required here is that of entering the selected operator’s identifier.By clicking on OK the screen of Figure 23. is displayed.The operator’s level can be modified. To enable, click on OK.
Figure 22. Administrative – Modify. select Operator
Figure 23. Administrative – Modify Operator profile
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
70
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.4.2.7 Delete
The Delete option permits to cancel one of the authorized operators.The screen of Figure 24. allows to enter the operator’s identifier.Hence by clicking on OK the screen of Figure 25. is displayed requesting acknowledgement.By clicking on OK cancelling is enabled.
Create, Modify and Delete option are enabled only for ADMINistrator.
Figure 24. Administrative – Delete, Select Operator
Figure 25. Administrative – Delete acknowledge
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
71
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5 Configuration Applications
4.5.1 General
There are the following types of configuration applications:
• Equipment Configuration
• Connection Configuration with Full Matrix
• Drop Shelf Connection Configuration.
• Local Configuration
• Routing Table Configuration
Each of the above permit to:
• build and change a configuration file containing the connection information for the NE.
• Download and upload the file
• display or print the file
• audit the file.
The Configuration applications can be activated only by a privileged user executing the followingselections:
• the ”Application Choice” option from the main menu; this selection displays the list of theavailable applications.
• one out of the Configuration Applications option from the list of applications available.
When opening a configuration application the craft terminal ”upload” the configuration of the NE.A window shows this function (see Figure 26. on page 72) that can be stopped with ”CANCEL”.It is possible to SAVE in a file the uploaded data (see details in the next paragraphs).
The following menu is displayed (see Figure 27. on page 72 i.e., if Equipment or ConnectionConfigurations are involved):
• File• Clear Screen• Tables• Help
Note that the option Clear Screen is active only for SWP–RECT and SWP–ECT 1651SM packages if youare dealing with Equipment or Connection Configuration.Other two SW products indicated as SWP–REACT and SWP–EACT 1651 SM are available. Differenceswith the previous cited SWP are indicated in the next paragraphs.
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described configuration menu.General information on the user product is displayed by clicking on this triangle.The functions of the above three options are identical for all the Configuration Applications.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
72
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 26. Equipment Configuration. Upload
Figure 27. Equipment Configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
73
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.1.1 Configuration with ”SWP ECT or SWP R–ECT 1651SM Rel.2.7”
Option ”tables”
This option allows the user to access the configuration tables of the NE (see Figure 28. on page 76 ifEquipment Configuration is involved).
By selecting option Table the user can:
• display the tables of a previously built configuration file
• build a configuration file
The user can display a configuration file in the following manner:
• select the option File from the configuration menu. This selection displays the list of commands
– select the option Open from the list of commands and choose the configuration file to bedisplayed
• select the option Tables from the configuration menu. This choice displays the list of tablescontaining the chosen configuration file.
– select the tables to be displayed
The user can build a configuration file
• By using an already existing configuration file the user can:
– select the option File from the configuration menu. This selection displays the list ofcommands.
– select the option Open from the list of commands and chooses the configuration file to bemodified.
– select the option Tables from the configuration menu. This choice displays the list of tablescontaining the selected configuration file.
– select the tables to be modified
– modify the tables
– select the option Save as or Save from the list of commands of the option File to store thelisted table in a new configuration file or in the same previously opened file.
• by selecting the option Tables directly the listed tables are loaded with default values.The user:
– selects the tables to be modified
– modifies the tables
– selects the option Save as or Save from the list of commands of the option File to storethe listed table in a new configuration file.
When the application is executed for the first time, no configuration file will be present; therefore if theoperator selects the option ”Open....” from Menu ”File”, no file will appear.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
74
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
To create a configuration file the operator must select the option ”Tables”, and then he can access all thetables of the NE Configuration.
The operator receives the list of all the NE configuration tables through a window system.The operator can browse through the whole list by scrolling it up and down using the arrow keys.The operator can select the table with the Mouse or the enabled functional keys and click the leftmouse–button when the arrow is positioned on the <OK> indication.He can also press the <RETURN> key to confirm selection.Further confirmation is required to save the data that has been inserted/modified in the table. The datais confirmed through the <OK> key which appears on each screen concerning ”Data insertion in table”.To clear the modified/inserted data the operator must utilize the <Cancel> key. Out of the two, the<Cancel> key has been assumed as default, because if the <Return> key is accidentally pressed,important previously filed information could be lost.
To notify the selection made by the operator, the data of the table selected has a darker backgroundrespect to the data of the other tables.
Options File
When the operator has inserted or modified all the table values, the save operation is still not terminated.
All the values must be saved through the option ”Save as”, or ”Save”.This option can be selected through the FILE option in the Configuration window (see Figure 29. on page76). The figures concern Equipment Configuration.
The complete list of the options is:
• Open....• Save As ....• Save ....• Delete....• Default Status...• File Header...• Print...• Send....• Receive...• Audit...
The following analyzes in detail each option:
• The option ”Open” displays the list of all the configuration files present on the hard disk and alsoaccesses the other disks to read other configurations (see Figure 30. on page 76).The user can select the configuration file to open, and then by means of the TABLE option canmodify the tables of the file.With the ”Detail” selection the screen of Figure 31. on page 77. is obtained, showing moredetailed information on the selected file.
• The option ”Save As ” permits to save the modifications made in the configuration tables.The operator can insert the name of a new file or that of an existing file (see Figure 32. onpage77 ).In the first case the created file will contain the new configuration tables; in the second case thenew tables will be written over the existing tables if authorized by the operator.The same screen permits to the selections:– the configuration can be stored on different disk units– description of the file (title) can be inserted into the created configuration file– the operator name can be inserted.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
75
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
After this operation the operator store the configuration.
• The option ”Save” permits to save the modifications made in the configuration table over writingthe existing table with the same name.
• When the option ”Delete” is chosen by the user, the application displays the list of all the builtconfiguration files stored on the hard disk.The application allows access to other configuration files on the hard disks, the user can thenselect the configuration file to delete.Detail on the files can be obtained
• The option ”Default Status” permits to access a new configuration file that holds tablescontaining default values.
• The option ”File Header” displays the ”Detail” information of the currently opened configurationfile.
• The option ”Print” permits to print the configuration tables of a particular file.The name of the file to print as well as the disk must be stated in the window.It is also possible to print only tables different from the defend values ( x )
• The option ”Send” permits to send the selected configuration file to the NE.After having selected this option, the operator receives the list of the configuration files thatcan be sent to the NE (see Figure 33. on page78 ).The operator must choose (from the selected disk) the configuration file to send to the NE andconfirm it through the <OK> key. ”Detail” on the files can be obtained.The selected configuration is sent to the NE, and the download of the tables is indicated.
• The option ”Receive” permits to receive the configuration loaded on the NE.The ”upload” function of the table is presented in a new window, in which is possible (CANCEL)to stop the procedure.The user inserts the file name which will store the NE configuration, as well the disk and the”Detail ” on the file.
• The option ”Audit” permits to compare the two configuration files (see Figure 34. on page 78):
– Current file: the currently opened configuration file– File on disk: the user selected configuration file
If differences are encountered, the application will display the relevant data for eachconfiguration table (see Figure 35. on page 79).
Option clear–screenAfter having utilized the ”audit” option, the clear–screen option permits to clear any information from theApplication window, by clicking the left mouse–button on the Clear – Screen option.
ATTENTION: when a FILE is open and the operator needs:– open another file– Select the Default Status– Send a file– Receive a fail
another screen is present, in which is possible to decide to save the previous file data (see for example Figure 36. on page 79 ).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
76
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 28. Equipment Configuration – Table Choice
Figure 29. Configuration – File options
Figure 30. Configuration – Open File
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
77
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 31. Configuration – Open, detail
Figure 32. Configuration – Save as
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
78
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 33. Configuration – Send file
Figure 34. Configuration – Audit
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
79
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 35. Configuration – Audit result
Figure 36. Configuration – Save previous file
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
80
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.1.2 Configuration with ”SWP–ECT or SWP–REACT 1651SM Rel. 2.7”
This software product performs checks while compiling the Equipment and Connections configurationstables to prevent the operator from making errors when introducing the configuration data.
To that purpose the options of the two applications are enabled in subsequent steps in compliancy withthe configurations that the operator realizes. The operator is therefore guided while compiling the tables.
The ”Equipment configuration” tables are to be compiled before any other.
In particular, as far as concerns the equipment synchronization, the following compiling order has to befollowed :
1 ) Synchronization : ADM type and Tributary configuration
2 ) Synchronization : priority list configuration
3 ) Synchronization : SSM value configuration
Also the tables compilation is guided : the only options enabled are those compliant with the previouslymade configurations.
Checks are operative inside each application (Equipment and Connection Configuration) and between thetwo applications. Logical mistakes in the configuration data interrupt the configuration proper andexplanatory error messages are displayed to help the operator removing incoherences.
Two types of messages are displayed : the ”warning ” and the ”error messages” . The latter prevents theoperator from proceeding in configuring the equipment and the connections.
The Equipment Configurations allowed through the EACT control function are stored in a ”.b60” extensionfile. The system opens a file using the same ”file name” with extension ”.b56” (Connection Configurationfile extension) or ”.b58” (Drop Shelf Connection Configuration file extension ) into which are stored the”Connection configurations” tables associated to the previously defined ”Equipment Configuration”.The two files are interdependent in that the control system allows changes to be made (e.g., equipmentconfiguration) only if compatible with the contents of the ”Connection” configuration file.When accessing the ”Connection Configuration” application it is mandatory to open the relevant fileautomatically created. It is possible to modify it only in compliancy with the equipment connections madewith the ”Equipment Configuration” application ( only the possible options are enabled ) . The file changescan be saved only if the ”Equipment Configuration ” application is closed.
When a ”receive” operation is performed and the equipment has been configured by using the EACT SWP,both the Equipment and the Connection configuration files are received from the equipment.
When a ”send ” operation is performed , the two files are sent independently.
If a ”receive” operation is performed using the EACT SWP and the equipment was configured using ECTSWP, checks are performed between the Equipment and the Connection configuration files. Messageswill appear if the files are not congruent according to EACT rules.
Option ”Tables”.
The only difference is that in the ”Connection Configuration” the ”Table” function is accessed after havingopened one of the ”.B56” files if for example we have to configure connections (”untitled .B56” in the firstwork session) through the ”OPEN” command of the options ”File”.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
81
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Option File
The following is a complete list of the applications provided by the option File (see Figure 29. on page 76):
• Open....• Save as ....• Save ....• Delete....• Default Status...• File Header...• Print...• Send....• Partial Send (not used)....• Receive...• Audit...
Through these applications are carried out the operations described for the option File, except for:
• The option ”Update...” – it can be applied to the Equipment and Connection configurations.It permits to send the modifications made on the configuration file to the Controller.
• Graphic format of the screens and files. The latter are located through extension number anddirectory.
• The option ”Exit” that closes the application.
4.5.1.3 How to select
In either case (software product with/without EACT) and for all the Tables, configuration is achievedthrough selection.
Selections are possible by clicking on the ”small box” or ”small circle” or on the relevant string present ineach table.
The cross (X) or the circled dot indicates selection mode enabled.
By clicking again, the cross or the circled dot disappears thus disabling the selection mode.
When selecting from a list, the selection operated is displayed next to the circle to which the selection isreferred.
To confirm the selections made click the OK button; to cancel click the CANCEL button.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
82
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2 Equipment Configuration Application
The following is a list of the equipment configuration table available (see Figure 28. on page 76):
– LINE SHELF CONFIGURATION:
• Subrack Configuration• Power Supply Configuration• 1664OA Subrack Configuration• EPS – APS Configuration• APS Configuration on Signal Degrade• Optical Safety Configuration• Bidir. Transmission on single Fiber Configuration• Synchronization:
– ADM Type and Tributary Configuration– Priority List Configuration– SSM Value Configuration
• BER Threshold Configuration• PPS Activation on Excessive B3• Consequent Actions• G.784 BBE Threshold Configuration• G.784 ES Threshold Configuration• G.784 SES Threshold Configuration• G.784 Performance Points Configuration• Alarm Criterion:
– Equipment– STM4/STM16 Aggregate East/West– Electrical HVC STM1 Trib.– 140M Switchable Trib.– 21x2M Trib. (1–3)– 21x2M Trib. (1–3) Port (1–21)– 3x34 Trib./3x45M Trib.– Full Matrix– Optical HVC STM1 Trib.– CRU– AUX/EOW– Optical LVC STM1 Trib.– 34/2 and 5x2M Tran. Mux Trib. (1–3)– 34/2 Tran Mux 8M Port (1–3)– 5x2M Tran Mux Trib (1–3) port (1–5)– Housekeeping indication
• Office alarms delay facility configuration• Input Housekeeping alarm indication labels• Output Housekeeping criteria and alarm selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
83
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– DROP SHELF CONFIGURATION
• Subrack Configuration
• Power Supply Configuration
• EPS – APS Configuration
• Synchronization: tributary configuration
• Alarm criterion:
– Equipment
– ADM 600 Interface unit
– STM–1 Module
– 21x2Mbit/s DS trib (1 to 9 )
– 21x2Mbit/s DS trib (1 to 9 ) port (1 to 21 )
Each of the above tables will be described in detail in the paragraphs that follow.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
84
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.1 Subrack configuration
The SUBRACK CONFIGURATION table, displayed as in Figure 37. on page 87, permits to configureeach of the cards in the slots of the NE.Each slot is represented by a rectangle which in turn displays the following elements:
• slot number – identifies its position in the NE’s physical configuration
• slot name – identifies the type of card to be inserted into the slot
• small circle and associated string defining card insertion into the slot.By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select from the list shown in the middleof the screen.The selected option is displayed next to the circle. Displaying after a selection isapplicable to all the configuration screens.
The selectable options for the SWITCH UNIT / ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE (NB) slots 1 and15 are:
• Unassigned Card
• SW Unit 34 M or 45 M
• SW Unit 140 M or 155 M
The selectable options for SWITCH UNIT / ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE (NB) slot 14 are:
• Unassigned Card
• SW Unit 34 M or 45 M
N.B. With the New Practice equipment physical structure, the SWITCH UNITS are not present.The switching function is realized by means the ACCESS MODULES connected to the units.Nevertheless to configure also in this case the different types of switching, the same selectionspreviously indicated must be done.
The selectable options for the AUX (slot 17) are:
• AUX/EOW
• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for the Aggregate, slots 18 and 22 are:
• L–4.1 Aggregate STM–4
• L–4.2 Aggregate STM–4
• S–4.1 Aggregate STM–4
• Unassigned Card
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
85
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The selectable options for the Aggregate, slots 19 and 23 are:
• L–4.1 Aggregate STM–4• L–4.2 Aggregate STM–4• S–4.1 Aggregate STM–4• S.16.1 Aggregate STM–16• L–16.1 Aggregate STM–16• L–16.2 Aggregate STM–16• UP S–16.1 Aggregate STM–16• UP L–16.1 Aggregate STM–16• UP L–16.2 Aggregate STM–16• UPE S–16.1 Aggregate STM–16• UPE L–16.1 Aggregate STM–16• UPE L–16.2 Aggregate STM–16• Unassigned Card
ATTENTION:
STM–4 Aggregate slot 18 West 1, slot 19 East 2slot 22 East 1, slot 23 West 2
STM–16 Aggregate slot 18+19 East,slot 22+23 West.
two slots (18+19, 22+ 23) are assigned to each STM–16 Aggregate.
The selectable options for TRIBUTARY slots 2, 3, 4 are:
• Unassigned Card• 21x2Mb Tributary• 21x2Mb Retiming Tributary• 34/2 5x2M Trib.• 3x34M Trib.• 3x45M Trib.• 140M SW Tributary (*)• Elect HVC STM1 Tributaries (*)
(*) both are referred to the 140/STM1 Switch. Trib. unit software selection)• S–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.2 LVC Trib.• S–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.2 HVC Trib.• DVB Trib
The select option for Tributary slots 5, 9, 10, 11, 12 are:
• Unassigned card• 3x34M Trib.• 3x45M Trib.• 140M SW Trib.• Elect HVC STM1 Trib.• S–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.2 LVC Trib.• S–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.2 HVC Trib.• DVB Trib
The select option for Trib. spare 1, (slots 6), are:
• Unassigned card• 21x2 M Trib.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
86
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• 21x2Mb Retiming Tributary• 34/2 5x2M Trib.• 3 x 34 M Trib.• 3 x 45 M Trib.• 140 M SW Trib.• Elect HVC STM–1 Trib.• 140M/EL STM1 Trib. (*)
The select option for Trib. spare 2, (slots 13), are:
• Unassigned card• 140 M SW Trib.• Elect HVC STM–1 Trib.• 3 x 34 M Trib.• 3 x 45 M Trib.• 140 M SW Trib.• Elect HVC STM–1 Trib.• 140M/EL STM1 Trib. (*)
To protect a mixed composition of 140 M SW and Elect HVC STM–1 Tributaries, select the ”140 M / ECSTM–1 TRIB” (*) option for the TRIB. Spare 1 or 2 configuration.
The select option for Matrix main. slot 7 are:
• Full Matrix
The select option for Matrix spare slot 8 are:
• Full Matrix• Unassigned card
The selected options for CRU Spare, slot 20 are:
• Assigned card• Unassigned card
The selected option for CRU Main, slot 21 is only Assigned Card.
DROP SHELF supported
This block is present to declare (with a cross) the possibility to manage the DROP SHELFEquipment .
To store the selections made, click the OK key.This operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
This configuration table will be utilized by the AS & C to read the value assigned to each slot in order todisplay the logic and physical configuration of the NE.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
87
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 37. Equipment Configuration – Subrack configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
88
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.2 Power Supply Configuration
The table shown in Figure 38. defines the availability of each of the three converters installed on the NE.Each converter is represented by a small box and by a string indicating the converter’s name.By clicking on the box or on the string, a cross (X) will appear inside it to define the converter as ”Assigned”.Click again to remove the cross.
This selection operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
Figure 38. Equipment Configuration – Power Supply
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
89
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.3 EPS/APS Configuration
The table shown in Figure 39. on page 90 permits to select the protections available in the NE.The EPS/APS protection functions are described in the Technical Handbook.While selecting the options are listed on the right of the screen.The different units are selected as follows:
• CRU units– Type of protection
� None� EPS (protection against unit failure)
• Full Matrix (16x16 Matrix) unit– Type of protection
� None� EPS
– Protection Architecture� Unset (of no significance, when NONE has been previously selected)� 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare)
– Protection Mode� Unset� Revertive: After protection intervenes, the initial condition is restored (Main Working)
when the unit alarm disappears.� Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition
– Wait Time to Restore� Select the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 seconds.), when the Revertive mode hasbeen selected.Unset selection is possible.
• Aggregate units (East and West)– Type of Protection
� None� APS (protection against unit and line failure)
– Protection Architecture� Unset� 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare)
– Protection Operation� Unset� Simplified. Unidirectional (single ended)
– Protection Mode� Only Unset (automatically not revertive)
– Wait Time to Restore� Only Unset
• Tributary units (1 to 8)– Type of protection
� None� EPS (for electrical tributary)� APS (for optical tributary)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
90
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
When EPS 1+1 is selected for main trib. (odd slots) the spare Trib. (subsequent even slot)must be ”None”
– Protection Architecture� Unset (of no significance, when NONE has been previously selected)� 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare). Not available for 21 x 2 M Trib.� N+1 (1 spare for N main). Not available for APS Not available for optical STM1 Trib.
When 1+1 is selected for main trib. (odd slots) the spare Trib. (subsequent even slot) mustbe ”unset”.
– Protection priority� Unset� Default. Only possible for N+1. The sequence priority is 1–> 2–>3–>4.
– Protection operation
� Unset� Simplified (Unidirectional). Only for APS optical STM1 Trib.
– Protection Mode� Unset� Revertive. (for the 1+1 EPS only). After protection intervention, the initial condition
is restored (Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears.� Not revertive. The spare works even if main returns to manual conditions (for the 1+1
EPS only).
– Wait time to Restore (WTR)Fixed at 5 min.
Figure 39. Equipment Configuration – EPS/APS
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
91
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.4 APS configuration on Signal Degrade
The table shown in Figure 40. allows to enable or disable the activation of the APS protection in case ofSignal Degrade alarm.
Figure 40. Equipment Configuration – APS configuration on Signal Degrade
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
92
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.5 Optical Safety Configuration
The Table shown in Figure 41. contains the configuration parameters for the optical safety managementof each of the optical cards.For each optical card the table allows:
• to select the ALS implemented option. If not selected (no cross inside the box) there is no needto configure the next data.
• To define the ALS status after having implemented it, select one of the following values fromthe list:
– Automatic Laser Shutdown enabled, or
– Automatic Laser Shutdown disabled and Laser forced ON (useful during tests) or
– Automatic Laser Shutdown disabled and Laser forced OFF (useful during maintenanceoperation)
The latter two selections force the ABN condition.
• When ALS is enabled, to define the ALS procedure parameter by selecting one or both thefollowing values from the list:
– Automatic Restart Enabled (ALS automatically operated by the equipment)
Manual Restart Enabled (ALS commanded by the operator, with equipment push–button)
Figure 41. Equipment Configuration – Optical Safety
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
93
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.6 Bidirectional Transmission on single Fiber Configuration
This type of connection has been set up with passive optical couplers ( see Figure 42. )The interruption of the optical fiber must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx.To this concern and in general to avoid poor decoupling performance of the hybrid , an identification labelhas been assigned to the local Tx an to the Rx one of the opposite side. ( ”1” given in the Figure 42. , fromTx1 to Rx2)Spare bits (1–4) of bite S1 are utilized by the Aggregate units.The STM1 optical tributaries also use , as an alternative , byte MD1 ( Media Dependent byte on 2,2 RSOHbyte position) .
Tx1
Tx2
Rx1
Rx2
Tx 1
Label : 1 Tx 2
Label : 2
Rx1
Label : 2 Rx2
Label : 1
OPTICALPASSIVE
COUPLER
OPTICALPASSIVE
COUPLER
Figure 42. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
94
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 43. illustrates the configuration concerning the Aggregate units and the STM1 tributaries:
• first column – select the transmit mode on the single fiber ( X on the chosen window).
• second and third column – for the STM1 Trib. only.Select, as alternative, the byte to use : M1 or S1
• fourth and fifth columns – label assignment to Rx and Tx, to be selected in the window on theright of the screen.
Figure 43. Equipment Configuration – Bidirectional transmission on single fiber.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
95
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.7 Synchronous Source Selection
The configuration tables defining the Synch. parameters are shown in Figure 45. on page 97,Figure 46. on page 99 and Figure 47. on page 101. Specifically:
• ADM Type and Tributary Configuration
• Priority List Configuration
• SSM Value Configuration
The tables are used to preset the selection criteria for the synch. references within the ”Timing Marker”function managing network synchronization.
This function allows to receive, select and transmit the synchronism reference inside the SDH network.It also reconstructs the synchronism and automatically reroutes it should a failure arise on thesynchronization distribution network.
The first Z1 (S1) of the SDH frame is utilized as ”Synchronous Status Messages” vector (SSM).The S1 byte information is managed by the ”Synchronous Status Messages Management” (SSMM)function and is utilized by the equipment to implement the SSM Algorithm (SSMA).
This algorithm permits the selection of higher quality synchronism sources.
The Synchronization Equipment Timing Set architecture complies with ITU–T G.783.
Figure 44. on page 96 illustrates the synchronous source selection for single ADM.
In this figure, T1, T2 and T3 are the input reference signals from which the selection algorithm must choosethe timing references T0 and T4.
”T0” is the synch. reference signal for the NE, while T4 is utilized to synchronize other external equipment.
The SQUELCH function can be activated either on the basis of four settable quality threshold levels of thesignal, or through operator presetting.
The SQUELCH function is always enabled on the T1–T4 path, while it can be disabled on path T0–T4.
To activate the selection process, the following must be defined:
• the Allowable Synch. sources
• the Priority level assigned to each
• the Quality associated to the timing that does not carry the synchronization status message.
In this paragraph are defined the Allowable Timing References for a max of 6 prioritized inputs.Selectors A and B (see Figure 44. on page96 ) have their own reference list with relevant priority.
Several inputs can have the same priority level. Therefore, a ”non revertive” switching mode is obtainedfrom these timing references.
The quality level of the SDH inputs is read through the SSMB.
During the configuration phase the operators assign the quality level of those inputs that are not SDH(2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s)or come from equipment not managing the SSMB.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
96
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Having to select among signals with the same quality level, the one with the highest priority will be chosen.
Selection depends on the alarm indications associated to the reference signals.
If all the sources are disabled by the manager, the local oscillator will be activated as synchronismreference.
Timing Reference might not be available for:
• alarms on the received reference signals
• the operator–driven LOCKOUT command
• the QL6 quality level (don’t use), only if the SSM algorithm is active and not applicable whenthe criteria based on Priority is active.
During the configuration phase the byte S1 management might be disabled. In this case the priority–basedalgorithm is utilized.
SelectA
SquelchSelect
C
Squelch
EXTERNALREFERENCE
T4
SelectB SETG
NE TIMINGREFERENCE
T1T2T3
INPUTS:(STM–N)(2Mbit/s)(2MHz)
INTERNALOSC.
T0
Figure 44. Equipment Configuration – Sync. Source Selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
97
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.7.1 Synchronization. ADM Type & Tributary Configuration
This table ( see Figure 45. ) allows:
• To configure the equipment type for the Timing Marker management. The user can choose theequipment type from the list on the right of the screen named ”Equipment Type”.The possible selections are:
– Single ADM– ADM with SSU (when an external SSU Equipment is connected to filter the Clock signal)
• to configure (if ”ADM with SSU” has been already selected”) the quality level for the ”ADM withSSU” equipment type from a list named ”SSU Quality” displayed on the right of the screen.The user can select the following values from the list named ”SSU Quality”:
– G.812T– G.812L– G.81s– None
• to select a clock source coming from the tributary cards.
For each main tributary the user can select:
– the clock sources from a list named ”Tributary Reference” displayed on the right of thescreen. The possible tributary clock sources are the STM1 tributaries, the 21x2Mbtributaries and the 34/2 & 5x2Mb Tributaries. For the 21x2Mb tributary sources the usercan select one of the twenty–one 2 Mbit/s ports. For the 34/2 & 5x2Mb tributary sources,the user can select one of the five 2 Mb ports.
– the mode from a list named ”Mode” displayed on the right of the screen only is he haschosen the 21x2M Tributary as clock source. The possible modes are: Not Used, NotFramed, PCM, PCM CRC4
Figure 45. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – ADM Type and Trib. Config.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
98
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.7.2 Synchronization: Priority List Configuration
This table (see Figure 46. on page 99) defines the synchronization parameters for an equipmentconfigured as Single ADM or ADM with SSU. The table allows the user:
• To enable/disable ”T0–T4” selection for the External synchronization
– T0: clock supplied to the equipment. T4: external clock
• to configure six clock references for the External/Internal synchronization, and for each of themthe user can select:
– the clock source from a list named ”Reference Type” displayed on the right of the screen.The possible values are:
� Not Used
� 2 MHz A
� 2 MHz B
� Aggregate STM4 West 1
� Aggregate STM16 West
� Aggregate STM4 East 1
� Aggregate STM16 East
� Tributary 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
– the priority level from a list named ”Priority Level” displayed on the right of the screen.The possible values are:
� 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and None
• to enable/disable the SSM algorithm for the External/Internal synchronization
– a priority based selection is performed when the algorithm is disabled
N.B. If T0 is utilized to supply T4 towards the outside of the equipment, the operator must not fill–inselection table ”External Synchronization”.
When SSU is present , ”T0” must be set different from ”T4”.
• to select the T1/T4 Squelch criteria from a list named ”Squelch Criteria” displayed on the rightof the screen. The possible values are:
– Threshold G.811– Threshold G.812T– Threshold G.812L– Threshold G.81s
• to select and enable/disable the T0/T4 Squelch Criteria from the list named ”Squelch Criteria”displayed on the right of the screen. The possible values are as those described fro the T1/T4Squelch Criteria.
• to enable/disable the Force Squelch.In this case the external clock T4 will be inhibited.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
99
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 46. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – Priority List Config.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
100
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.7.3 Synchronization: SSM Value Configuration
This table (see Figure 47. on page 101 ) defines the management of the SSM bytes in both Reception (see2nd column), and Transmission (see 3rd column). For the Reference signals see 1st column.
In Reception and in Transmission, the table allows (only for the Single ADM, the case of ADM with SSUbeing already defined in Figure 45. on page 97 ) for each Aggregate and Tributary clock reference, tochoose the quality value to supply to the Selection Algorithm, chosen from a list named ”Quality Level”displayed on the right of the screen (only in reception for the 2MHz A and 2 MHz B clock references).
The user can select, for each port, the following values from the list named ”Quality Level” for both themanagement of the ”Rx SSM Byte” and ”Tx SSM Byte”:
• Rx SSM Byte
The user can select the following from the Rx Quality Level:
– Extracted– Threshold G.811– Threshold G.812T– Threshold G.812L– Threshold G.81s– Q. Unknown– Don’t Use
Setting the ”Extracted” quality level on the single port enables the termination of Byte S1 received on theSTM–N Aggregates or Tributaries coming from the equipment managing the Byte.The selection algorithm will choose from the six Rx signals that to use as timing reference for theequipment.
Choosing a Quality Level other than the ”Extracted” one means that the relevant signal will be sent to theselection algorithm with this set Q.L..This presetting operation is optional for the STM–N signals, but is mandatory for the 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHzsignals.
• Tx SSM Byte
The user can select the following from the Tx Quality Level:
– Insert– Threshold G.811– Threshold G.812T– Threshold G.812L– Threshold G.81s– Q. Unknown– Don’t Use
Setting the ”Insert” criteria on the single port the operator enables to transmit on the output signal theQuality Level selected with the algorithm .
A chosen Q.L. other than ”Insert” is preset when wanting to transmit a fixed Q.L. preset value whateverit is the Q.L. of the reference signal selected with the algorithm.This modality applies only to STM–N signals assigned to the equipment managing Byte S1.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
101
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 47. Equipment Configuration– Synch. – SSM Value Configuration
4.5.2.8 BER Threshold Configuration
The BER THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION table shown in Figure 48. indicates information on theACTIVATION and DEACTIVATION thresholds of B2 Signal Degrade.The application defines the activation/deactivation threshold values selected by the user and the defaultvalues.The Signal Degrade alarm values are 10–5, 10–6, 10–7, 10–8, 10–9 (for activation), 10–6, 10–7, 10–8, 10–9,10–10 (for deactivation). The normal values for activation/de–activation are 105/ 10–6.
Figure 48. Equipment Configuration – BER Threshold
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
102
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.9 PPS activation on EX B3
See Figure 49. on page 102
This option permits to enable PPS protection on excessive BER B3 .
Figure 49. Equipment Configuration – PPS activation on EXBER (B3)
4.5.2.10 Consequent Actions
The table shown in Figure 50. allows to enable or disable the consequent actions for the B2 ExcessiveBER alarm of the Aggregate and STM1 Tributary.
Figure 50. Equipment Configuration – Consequent actions
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
103
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.11 G.784 BBE Thresholds configuration
The table shown in Figure 51. allows to configure the BBE (Background Block Errors detected on theParity Bytes) thresholds values of the Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and overa one day period. For the 15 minutes period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. ForSTM–n flows it is possible to declare the Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds.
BBE – STM16 RS (B1)BBE – STM16 MS (B2)BBE – STM4 RS (B1)BBE – STM4 MS (B2)BBE – STM1 RS (B1)BBE – STM1 MS (B2)BBE – VC4 (B3)BBE – VC3 (B3)BBE – VC12 (BIP2)
The Operation System is informed on the results.
Figure 51. indicates the default values within the range defined by ITU–T Rec. G.784.
When exceeding the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lightsthe labels ”15 M TCA” or ”DAY TCA” on the corresponding tributary in the Alarm Status & Controlapplication.15 M TCA lights on when exceeding the High Threshold and lights off when decreasing below the LowThreshold.To activate the counters it is necessary to ”start” the Terminal Points in the Performance Monitoringapplication (see para 4.8.4 on page 291).
Figure 51. Equipment Configuration – G.784 BBE Thresholds
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
104
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.12 G.784 ES Thresholds configuration
The table Figure 52. shown in allows to configure the ES (Errored seconds) thresholds values of thePerformance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over a one day period. For the 15 minutesperiod, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For STM–n flows it is possible declare theMultiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds.
ES – STM16 RS (B1)ES – STM16 MS (B2)ES – STM4 RS (B1)ES – STM4 MS (B2)ES – STM1 RS (B1)ES – STM1 MS (B2)ES – VC4 (B3)ES – VC3 (B3)ES – VC12 (BIP2)
The Operation System is informed on the results.
Figure 52. indicates the default values within the range defined by ITU–T Rec. G.784.
When exceeding the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lightsthe labels ”15 M TCA” and DAY TCA on the corresponding tributary in the Alarm Status & Controlapplication.15 M TCA lights on when exceeding the High Threshold and lights off when decreasing below the LowThreshold.To activate the counters it is necessary to ”start” the Terminal Points in the Performance Monitoringapplication (see para 4.8.4 on page 291).
Figure 52. Equipment Configuration – G.784 ES Thresholds
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
105
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.13 G.784 SES Thresholds configuration
The table shown in Figure 53. allows to configure the SES (Severely Errored seconds) thresholds valuesof the Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over a one day period. For the 15minutes period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For STM–n flows it is possible todeclare the Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds.
SES – STM16 RS (B1)SES – STM16 MS (B2)SES – STM4 RS (B1)SES – STM4 MS (B2)SES – STM1 RS (B1)SES – STM1 MS (B2)SES – VC4 (B3)SES – VC3 (B3)SES – VC12 (BIP2)
The Operation System is informed on the results.
Figure 53. indicates the default values within the range defined by ITU–T Rec. G.784.
When exceed the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lights thelabels ”15 M TCA” and ”DAY TCA” on the corresponding tributary and of the UT label in the Alarm Status& Control application.15 M TCA lights on when exceeding the High Threshold and lights off when decreasing below the LowThreshold.To activate the counters it is necessary to ”start” the Terminal Points in the Performance Monitoringapplication (see para 4.8.4 on page 291).
Figure 53. Equipment Configuration – G.784 SES Thresholds
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
106
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.14 G.784 Performance points configuration
From the table shown in Figure 54. is selected, for each STM4 or STM16 Aggregate, the AU channel forthe PJC/B3 performance point.
Clicking on the circle in one of the unit presented, the operator can select from the list of AU4 displayedon the right of the screen.The selected AU4 will appear next to the circle.
This AU4 will be checked to verify the quality of the network synchronization and of the VC4 payload inthe G 784 Performance Monitoring.
Figure 54. Equipment Configuration – G.784 Performance Points
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
107
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.15 Alarm Criteria
The alarms detected on the Units can be classified as:
• Urgent / Not Urgent / Indicative (if pertaining) / Disabled
Figure 55. up to Figure 57. on page 108 illustrate some examples of the various selections for each unit.
Figure 55. Equipment Configuration – Equipment Alarm criteria
Figure 56. Equipment Configuration – STM4 Aggregate Alarm criteria
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
108
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 57. Equipment Configuration – Alarm Criterion – Housekeeping indications
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
109
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.16 Office alarms delay facility configuration
The screen of Figure 58. allows to select the ”Filter period” for the activation of the following remotealarms:
• URG, which is the OR’ing of the urgent alarms occurred in the NE,
• NURG, which is the OR’ing of the not urgent alarms occurred in the NE.
For each ”remote alarm” the application displays a string specifying the alarm, and a small circle. Clickingon the circle, the user can select the alarm filter period from a list displayed on the right of the screen.
The periods are expressed in seconds and the default value is 10.
Figure 58. Equipment Configuration – Office alarms delay configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
110
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.17 Input Housekeeping alarm indication configuration
The table shown in Figure 59. allows to define the HOUSEKEEPING signal received from the external
– Housekeeping 1,2,3, can be defined by the operator according to the type of alarm/signal connected(default CP1, CP2, CP3).
– Housekeeping 4 is devoted to alarm of the external Synchronous Supply unit.
– Housekeeping 5, 6, 7 are assigned to the alarms (URG / ABN / NURG) of external Optical FiberAmplifier
– Housekeeping 8 is assigned to the AND BATT EXT (Optical Fiber Amplifier station power supplyalarm) or for the DROP SHELF the AND BATT ALARM.
Housekeeping 4 to 8 cannot be modifiedFor Housekeeping 1, 2, 3, 4 and 8, the alarm criterion can be selected as indicated in para 4.5.2.15.on page 107.
These alarms are so managed by the control function.
N.B. The Housekeeping string label can have 16 characters Max.
Figure 59. Equipment Configuration – Housekeeping assignment in case of parallel alarm
When the serial alarm signal is sent from the OA the CPI#5 is not used, the CPI#6 carries the Synchronismsignal and the CPI#7 carries the serial data stream from the external OFA. The Operator can consistentlymodify the relevant label.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
111
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.18 Output housekeeping criteria and label selection
See Figure 60. on page 112.
If a serial external 1664 OFA is not present , all the Output Housekeeping are all labelling from the user.If a serial 1661 OFA is present , CPO_5 is reserved for the clock outputting from the equipment controllertowards the external OFA.
N.B. The Housekeeping string label can have 16 characters Max.
The CPO can be managed in two possible ways:
• dynamic output : the CPO is coupled to an event ( among the listed ones) . When the eventis set also the CPO is set, moving from the idle status to the event’s status.
• fixed output : the CPO are defined in a persistent configuration , not depending from an event.In this case NONE must be chosen from the list.
At the power off / restart of the equipment controller the value of the dynamic output is re–establishedonly if the specified criteria is still present.
Following there is the list of possible criteria selectable for dynamic output management :
– EXTLOS: a LOS on any equipped aggregate
– LOS AGG W : a LOS on the WEST aggregate
– LOS AGG E : a LOS on the EAST aggregate
– RDI AGG W : an RDI on the WEST aggregate
– RDI AGG E : an RDI on the EST aggregate
– WRK AGG W : the aggregate WEST main is active ( the status is closed to ground)
– WRK AGG W : the aggregate EST main is active ( the status is closed to ground)
The IDLE selection defines an output not connected.
The CPO VALIDATION selection will set to ground the chosen CPO to validate the status of all the others.This selection is usually applied after an equipment controller restart in order to validate ( declare correct)the status of the CPOs after the transient due to the restart itself.
The OUTPUT FORCED selection force the output in the open state.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
112
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 60. Output housekeeping criteria and label selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
113
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.19 Drop Shelf – Subrack Configuration
The SUBRACK CONFIGURATION table, displayed as in Figure 61. permits to configure each of thecards in the slots of the Drop Shelf .
Each slot is represented by a rectangle which in turn displays the following elements:
• slot number – identifies its position in the subrack physical configuration• slot name – identifies the type of card to be inserted into the slot• small circle and associated string defining card insertion into the slot.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select from the list shown in the middleof the screen. The selected option is displayed next to the circle. Displaying after aselection is applicable to all the configuration screens.
The options for the OH Interface Unit (slot 1 ) are not selectable in this release:• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for Tributaries (slots 2, 3, 4, 5 , 6 , 7 12, 13, 14 ), are:• 21x2Mb Tributary• Unassigned Card
The selectable option for Trib. spare , (slots 11), is:• 21x2 M Trib.
The options for Switch Unit, (slot 10 ) are not selectable in this release :• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for ADM 600 Interface (slots 8, 9 ) :• Assigned Card• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for STM – 1 E Modules (slots M1, M2. M3 ):• Assigned Card• Unassigned Card
Figure 61. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf,subrack configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
114
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.20 Drop Shelf – Power Supply Configuration
The table shown in Figure 62. ,defines the availability of each of the two converters installed on theextension subrack.Each converter is represented by a small box and by a string indicating the converter’s name.By clicking on the box or on the string, a cross (X) will appear inside it to define the converter as ”Assigned”.Click again to remove the cross.
This selection operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
Figure 62. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, Power Supply
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
115
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.21 Drop Shelf – EPS/APS Configuration
The table shown in Figure 63. on page 116 permits to select the protections available in the D.S. extension.The EPS/APS protection functions are generally speaking described in the Technical Handbook.While selecting the options are listed on the right of the screen.The different units are selected as follows:
• ADM 600 A– Type of Protection
� None� EPS
– Protection Architecture� Unset� 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare)
– Protection Mode� Unset� Revertive: After protection intervention, the initial condition is restored
(Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears.� Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition
– Wait Time to RestoreSelect the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 secs) when the revertive mode has beenselected. Unset selection is possible.
• Tributary units (1 to 9)– Type of protection
� None� EPS (for electrical tributary)
– Protection Architecture� Unset (of no significance, when NONE has been previously selected)� N+1 (1 spare for N main).
– Protection priority� Unset� Default. Only possible for N+1. The sequence priority is 1–> 2–>3–>4...–>8–>9.
– Protection operation� Unset
– Protection Mode� Unset� Revertive. After protection intervention, the initial condition is restored
(Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears.� Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition.
With the N+1 EPS protection the Protection Mode should be always Revertive.
– Wait time to RestoreThe waiting time to Revert is fixed at 5 min. when the revertive mode has been selected.Unset selection is possible.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
116
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 63. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, EPS/APS
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
117
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.22 Drop Shelf – Synchronization: Tributary Configuration
The configuration tables defining the Synch. parameters are shown in Figure 64. Specifically:
• ADM 600 Interface (A /B ) and Tributary Configuration
The tables are used to preset the selection criteria for the synchronous references within the ”TimingMarker” function managing network synchronization.
For each main tributary the user can select:
– the reference Tributary from a list named ”Tributary Number” displayed on the top rightof the screen.
– the clock sources from a list named ”Tributary Reference” displayed on the right of thescreen. The possible tributary clock sources are the 21x2Mb tributaries .For these the user can select one of the twenty–one 2 Mbit/s ports.
– the mode from a list named ”Mode” displayed on the right of the screen .The possible modes are: Not Used, Not Framed, PCM, PCM CRC4
Figure 64. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, synchronization:tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
118
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.2.23 Drop Shelf – Alarm criterion Configuration
The alarms detected on the Units can be classified as:
• Urgent / Not Urgent / Indicative / Disabled
Figure 65. illustrates an example of the various selections for the ADM 600 I/F unit.
Figure 65. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, alarm criterion
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
119
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3 LINE SHELF Connection Configuration Application
For LINE SHELF Connection Configuration the following is a list of the connection configuration Tablesavailable (see Figure 66. on page 120):
• ENHANCED CONNECTIVITY• WEST AGGREGATE PAYLOAD STRUCTURE• EAST AGGREGATE PAYLOAD STRUCTURE• TRIBUTARY PAYLOAD STRUCTURE• SIGNAL LABEL FOR AGGREGATE VC4• SIGNAL LABEL FOR TRIBUTARY CARDS• PATH TRACE VC4 FOR AGGREGATE WEST• PATH TRACE VC4 FOR AGGREGATE EAST• PATH TRACE VC4 FOR TRIBUTARIES 140 M• PATH TRACE VC4 FOR TRIBUTARIES STM1• AU–4’s DROP/INSERT ALLOCATION• AU–4’s CONCATENATION• MS–SPRING CONFIGURATION• SQUELCHING TABLE FOR EAST HO CONTAINERS• SQUELCHING TABLE FOR WEST HO CONTAINERS• AU–4’s CROSS–CONNECTION FOR AGGREGATES• AU–4’s CROSS–CONNECTION FOR TRIBUTARIES• AU–4’s PASS–THROUGH ALLOCATION
• TU’s D/I ALLOCATION TRIBUTARY 1 TUG3• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• TU’s D/I ALLOCATION TRIBUTARY 8 TUG3
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. WEST AU4–1 TUG3• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. WEST AU4–16 TUG3
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. EAST AU4–1 TUG3• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. EAST AU4–16 TUG3
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION TRIBUTARY 1 TUG3• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION TRIBUTARY 8 TUG3
• 2 M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION• 34M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION (and 45M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION)• 2/34 CONDITIONS OF 34/2 AND 5X2M TRIB. #1 TO #3• 140M TRIBUTARY PORT CONFIGURATION• 2M RETIMING CONFIGURATION
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
120
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• TU’s PASS–THROUGH FOR AGG. EAST AU4–1 TUG3• ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ”• ” ” ” ” ” ”• TU’s PASS–THROUGH FOR AGG. EAST AU4–16 TUG3
• CONNECTIONS CONFIGURATION by AUX/EOW• AUX/EOW CROSS CONNECTION
Each of the above Tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
Herebelow are briefly described some of the parameters indicated in the configuration tables:
• TU’s allocation inside the AU4 structure
• Definition of the connection traffic
• Connection possibilities
Figure 66. Connection Configuration with . – Tables
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
121
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
TU’s allocation inside the AU4 structure
• TU12 Allocation
The sixty–three TU12’s of the STM frame are located through:
– TUG3 (1, 2, 3)TUG2 (1, 2 ... 6,7)VC12 (1, 2, 3)
Therefore, each TU12 is located through a sequence of three numbers e.g., 1, 7, 2) where the 1st numberindicates the TUG3, the 2nd the TUG2, the 3rd the VC12.
Table 8. states TU’s relationship.
• TU3 Allocation
With regard to TU3 (1–3) allocation inside the frame use is made of the relevant TUG3.
– TUG3 (1, 2, 3)
Table 8. TU12 Allocation
TUG 31st Number
TUG 22nd Number
VC 123rd Number
TU12 (1–63)Position in the frame
1 1 1 1
2 1 1 2
3 1 1 3
1 2 1 4
2 2 1 5
3 2 1 6
1 3 1 7
2 3 1 8
3 3 1 9
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
1 7 3 61
2 7 3 62
3 7 3 63
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
122
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.1 General information un Connection Configuration
Herebelow are briefly described some of the parameters indicated in the configuration tables:
• Definition of the connection traffic (see para 4.5.3.1.1 on page 122)
• Connection possibilities (see para 4.5.3.1.2 on page 136)
• MS SPRING connection advices (see para 4.5.3.1.3 on page 137)
4.5.3.1.1 Definition of the connection traffic
The main type of connection are:
• Drop/Insert
Terminated connections between tributaries and Aggregates (Trib. to Agg.)
• Pass–Through
Connection between Aggregate west and Aggregates East (Agg. to Agg.)
• Cross Connection
Connections within the Aggregate of one side or between tributaries (Trib. to Trib. or AGG. to AGG.)This connection are possible only with Matrix unit.
• Drop and Continue
Unidirectional pass–through, protected drop, insert in one direction are simultaneously allowed.
• Mixed configuration of previous connections
All the previous connections are possible on:
– AU–4
can be referred to tributaries (140 Mbit/s plesiochronous or STM1) or Aggregate
– TU
can be referred to:
– plesiochronous tributaries 2 Mbit/s (TU–12) or 34 Mbit/s and 45 Mbit/s (TU–3)
– STM–1 tributaries structured with TU–12 or TU–3.
– Aggregate
By utilizing the Matrix all the streams can be managed.
For each type of main connection is listed the available mode. In order to simplify the figure the MATRIXis not indicated.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
123
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Drop/Insert
– Insert to West (or East) (see Figure 67. )
The selected TU/AU is transmitted from the tributary to only one of the Aggregate
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 67. Insert to East
– Bridge (see Figure 68. )
The selected TU/AU is transmitted to both side Aggregates.
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 68. Bridge
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
124
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– Drop unprotected West (or East) (see Figure 69. )
The selected TU/AU is received from only one Aggregate.
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 69. Drop unprotected, East
– Drop protected West (or East) (see Figure 70. )
The selected TU/AU is received from one side Aggregate. When this side is out of service,the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite side Aggregate.
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 70. Drop protected, East
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
125
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– Drop/insert bidirectional unprotected West (or East) (see Figure 71. )
The selected TU/AU is transmitted and received by only one side Aggregate
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 71. Drop/Insert bidirectional unprotected, East
– Drop/insert protected West (or East) (see Figure 72. )
The selected TU/AU is transmitted to both side Aggregates and received from the selected
side Aggregate. When this side is out of service, the TU/AU is dropped from the oppositeside Aggregate
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 72. Drop/Insert protected, East
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
126
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Pass–through (see Figure 73. )
With regard to pass–through traffic the same TU/AU can be used for both directions, i.e.,West to East, East to West).Both modes can be selected, therefore, a bidirectional channel can be obtained byselecting both modes using the same TU/AU.
The following modes can be distinguished:
• West to East
• East to West
Reference is made to the TU/AU accessing the East Aggregate
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
BIDIRECTIONAL
PASS THROUGHWEST TO EAST
PASS THROUGHEAST TO WEST
WEST 1Rx
Tx
EAST 1Tx
Rx
AGGREGATES
UNIDIRECTIONALS
PASS THROUGHWEST TO EAST
PASS THROUGHEAST TO WEST
WEST 2Rx
Tx
EAST 2Tx
Rx
Figure 73. Pass–through
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
127
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Cross–connection
– Cross connection between tributaries
With this kind of traffic a TU/AU is connected between tributaries, without connection withAggregates.
The following mode can be distinguished:
∆ Unidirectional
The TU/AU is transmitted from the tributary indicated to the selected TU/AU tributary(Figure 74. )
∆ Bidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted/received between the tributary indicated and the selected TU/AU tributary (Figure 75. )
RxTx
INDICATEDTU/AUTRIB.
RxTx
SELECTEDTU/AUTRIB.
Figure 74. Unidirectional. Trib. Cross Connection
RxTx
INDICATEDTU/AUTRIB.
RxTx
SELECTEDTU/AUTRIB.
Figure 75. Bidirectional–Trib. Cross Connection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
128
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– Cross connection between TU/AU of the same side Aggregate
With this type of traffic the TU/AU is not connected with tributaries or opposite sideAggregate.
The following mode can be distinguished :
– ∆ Unidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted to another TU/AU of the same side Aggregate (see Figure 76. )
– ∆ Bidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted/received between TU/AU indicated and the TU/AU selected of thesame side Aggregate (see Figure 77. )
WESTRx
Tx
AGG.WEST
INDICATED TU/AU
SELECTED TU/AU
Figure 76. Unidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection
WEST
Rx
AGG.WEST
INDICATED TU/AU
SELECTED TU/AU
Tx
Rx
Tx
Figure 77. Bidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
129
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Drop and Continue for SNC/P (PPS)
The allowed selections are:
D/C W INS WD/C E INS WD/C E INS ED/C W INS E
D/C stands for Drop and Continue
The letter that follows (W=West, E=East) indicates the ”drop protected” side ( e.g., Wmeans West main, and East spare side).
The last indication (INS E or INS W) indicates the ”insert” side.
The ”unidirectional pass–through” is always in the direction opposite to that of the ”insert”side, e.g. when ”INS E”, the pass–through is from East to West.
– D/C W INS W ( see Figure 78. )
The selected TU/AU is simultaneously:
∆ Drop–protected West, received from the West side Aggregate. When this side isout–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite East side Aggregate.
∆ Insert West, transmitted from the tributary to the West side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the West to the East side (unidirectional)
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 78. Drop and Continue West and Insert West
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
130
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– D/C E INS W (see Figure 79. )
The selected TU/AU is simultaneously:
∆ Drop–protected East, received from the East side Aggregate. When this side is out–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite West side Aggregate.
∆ Insert West, transmitted from the tributary to the West side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the West to the East side (unidirectional)
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 79. Drop and Continue East and Insert West
– D/C E INS E (see Figure 80. )
The selected TU/AU is simultaneously:
∆ Drop–protected East, received from the East side Aggregate. When this side is out–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite West side Aggregate.
∆ Insert East, transmitted from the tributary to the East side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the East to the West side (unidirectional)
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 80. Drop and Continue East and Insert East
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
131
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– D/C W INS E (see Figure 81. )
The selected TU/AU is simultaneously:
∆ Drop–protected West, received from the West side Aggregate. When this side is out–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite East side Aggregate.
∆ Insert East, transmitted from the tributary to the East side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the East to the West side (unidirectional)
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 81. Drop and Continue West and Insert East
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
132
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Drop and Continue Interconnection
See Figure 82.
It is used in case of interworking between SNCP – MS SPRING or MS SPRING – MS SPRING or SNCP– SNCP, to protect the AU4s flowing through these rings.
The allowed selections are:
D/C IC WD/C IC E
D/C IC PASS THROUGH WD/C IC PASS THROUGH E
– The acronym” D/C IC W (E)” means:
• D/C: DROP and CONTINUERX signal : DROP towards the tributary and CONTINUE towards opposite side
• IC W (E): INTERCONNECTION West (or East)TX side: INSERT towards TX West (or East) selected between the incomingtributary (MAIN) or the PASS THROUGH received from the opposite LINE side(PROTECTION).
– The acronym” D/C IC PASS THROUGH W (E)” indicates that the main side is not fromthe Tributary like the previous case but from the Aggregate Line side and the protectionis realized by the Tributary.
If one of the D/C IC connections cited above is applied on a NE inserted in a ring not MS SPRINGprotected, all the 16 AU4s of the STM 16 frame are available.
WEST
Rx
Tx
EAST
Tx
RxAGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
(*)
(*) SS= ServiceSelector
Figure 82. MS SPRING – Drop and Continue Interconnection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
133
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Trib to Trib / Aggregate Connection (”TTA”)
This connection is used in SNCP/I and MS SPRING ring interworking
The path protection is realized in the node where this TTA connection has been defined, through a switchfunction that sends to the path termination Tributary either the signal coming from the line (Aggregate)or the signal coming from a second Tributary (that must be always an STM1 Trib.) equipped in the node.The selection is based on path–AIS (AU, TU) detection.
The Tributary receiving the protected path inserts the transmitted signal towards both the line (AggregateE or W) and a second Tributary (STM1). The connections between the rings at the interconnection nodeshave always to be at STM1 level. The stream accessing this STM1 Tributary will be cross–connected onthe path termination Tributary.
It is to be noticed that SNCP/I connections terminated on MS SPRING nodes are not supported.The available TTA connections are the following:
– D/I PROT W (or E) /TRIB– D/I PROT TRIB / W (or E)– DROP PROT W (or E) / TRIB– DROP PROT TRIB / W (or E)
The TTA connection can be established both in a Bidirectional and a Unidirectional mode.
– The Bidirectional connection is realized by the following operations:
for the Drop/Insert protected mode
– an insert from tributary to aggregate– a TTA mode of protected drop.– an bidirectional cross–connection from trib to trib.
– The Unidirectional connection is realized in the following way:
for the Insert mode
– an insert from tributary to aggregate– an unidirectional cross–connection from trib to trib.
for the Drop protected mode
– a TTA mode of protected drop.– an unidirectional cross–connection from trib to trib.
Note that the TU allocation at STM1 and Aggregate side must be the same.
As defined for every Path Protection connection, the switch function can be either Revertive or NotRevertive. In Revertive mode, a fixed 5 minutes of Wait Time to Restore (W.T.R.) before restoring the Mainposition, is available.
Figure 83. on page 134 and Figure 84. on page 134 report some examples of the TTA connections andtheir acronymic.
Notice that, with reference to the acronymic, the card type on the left side of the slash, indicates the Mainside of the switch. For example the indication ”D/I PROT AGG W/TRIB” is related to West Aggregate asMain position of the switch, the indication ”D/I PROT TRIB/AGG W is related to STM1 Tributary as Mainposition of the switch.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
134
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
a. D/I PROT W/TRIB b. DROP PROT TRIB/ W
Agg
SM1 Trib
TribTrib
SM1 Trib
Agg W
WW E E
c. INSERT TO WEST + CROSS–CONN. UNIDIR TRIB TO TRIB
W E
Agg
SM1 Trib
Trib
Figure 83. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR WEST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC
a. D/I PROT E/TRIB b. DROP PROT TRIB/E
Agg E
SM1 Trib
TribTrib
SM1 Trib
WW E E
W E
Agg E
SM1 Trib
Trib
c. INSERT TO EAST + CROSS–CONN. UNIDIR TRIB TO TRIB
Agg E
Figure 84. TRIB TO TRIB/AGGR EAST CONNECTIONS MODES & ACRONYMIC
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
135
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Mixed Connection
To realize this connection the operator must correctly set different connection tables
– Broadcasting: Drop + Pass through (see Figure 85. )
The TU/AU received from one Aggregate side is simultaneously dropped towards thetributary side and sent in pass–through toward the opposite Aggregate side. One tributaryonly (in one station) can also insert the proper signal.
– Tributary insert + cross–connection (see Figure 86. )
The TU/AU of one tributary can be simultaneously sent towards Aggregate (also bothsides) and toward other tributary TU/AU (cross–connection).One of the two connections can use both directions (drop/insert for Aggregates sidebidirectional for cross connection)
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
TRIBUTARY
RxTx
Figure 85. Broadcasting, Drop + Pass Through
WESTRx
Tx
EASTTx
Rx
AGGREGATES
RxTx RxTx
Figure 86. Tributary insert + cross–connection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
136
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.1.2 Connection Possibilities
• STM–4 Aggregate
There are no connection limits: four AU4 West side and four AU4 East side can be utilized.When PPS is used, the same AU/TU is present on both West and East sides.Obviously streams employed for a connection type cannot be utilized in other not coherentselection (for example: add/drop and bidirectional pass–through of the same AU/TU).
• STM–16 Aggregate
Each STM16 West and East Aggregate is organized with 16 AU4.No limits are present for AU4 pass–through (max 16 AU4).
For other connections eight MAX AU4 can be utilized, as alternative.These AU4 can be subdivided among the different connection types and, besides notexceeding the max permitted number, must not be selected in a not coherent way on the sameAU4.
The connection possibilities and the relevant max number of AU4 that can be utilized are:
• TU pass–through: a max. of four AU4 East and four AU4 West
• TU/AU Aggregate Cross–Connection: a max of eight AU4 (West East)
• Add/Drop:
– AU4 without SNCP: max 8, East + West
– AU4 with SNCP: max 8 East or West, protected on other side
– AU4 containing TU12/TU3 with PPS: max 4, East or West, protected on other side (unlesswe use the Enhanced Connectivity application, see para 4.5.3.2 on page 138.
The TU both in add/drop protected (SNCP) and in pass–through utilize a pair of AU4 (with the samenumber).If, for example, add/drop protected TU’s are realized by using 1 AU4, the AU4 on the opposite side (withsame number) will also be utilized.So only 6 AU4 will be available for the previous type of connections.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
137
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.1.3 MS SPRING connection configuration advices
The following suggestions must be considered in the MS SPRING connection configuration:
• SNCP connections cannot be installed in a MS–SPRING network. This leads to an unprotectedconnections installation.
• Enhanced Connectivity AU4s is not allowed when MS SPRING protection is running. Only TUsunprotected connections must be considered.
• AU4s from #9 to #16 don’t have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameterof ”Connections configuration” provisioning. Only AU4s from #1 to #8 must be used andconfigured for paths installation.
• AU4 permutation ( change of AU4 allocation ) is not allowed in ”AU4 pass–through connections”( HVC connections ). The AU4 allocated to pass–through in HVC connections, must be thesame through the node, while AU4 permutation in TU pass–through (LVC connections) isallowed.
• AU4/TU cross–connection Aggregate side, that is paths received from Aggregate line andlooped–back to the ( same ) Aggregate line, are not allowed.
• Follow the indication of para 4.5.3.11 on page 151 in order to define, in the same step, the”Squelching Table HO” for East and for West aggregates describing, for each connectioninstalled, as Source Node, the Node Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4and as Destination Node, the Node Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
138
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.2 Enhanced Connectivity
The Figure 87. allows the user to define, only for 1661SM–C equipment, the configuration parametersconcerning the ” Enhanced Connectivity ” function on the aggregate AU4’s .
This function allows to select structured AU4s and connect them in Enhanced connectivity. Thanksto this facility it is possible to PPS protect up to 8 AU4s TUG structured streams. The structured AU4connected in Enhanced Connectivity can hosts TU 12 and TU3 structures. No mixed set and connectionmodes are allowed. These AU4 must be TU12 or TU3 structured, and the connection mode must be thesame for all the pertaining TUs . The protection works at ” server layer” level and therefor it switches whenAU AIS, AU LOP, EXBER (B3) arise. The switch for the AU4 declared in Enhanced connectivity doesn’toperate if the single contained TU is alarmed, but only for alarms relevant to the AU.
For the AU4s not wholly TU12 or TU3 managed or with different connection modes, the limit of AU4number that can be PPS protected is always up to 4.
Each of the 16 aggregate AU4’s (1st column) is settable by:
• 2nd column – the small box allows to enable / disable the ” Enhanced Connectivity ” functionon the AU4. Clicking on the box the symbol ”X” is displayed on the box; this symbol enables the”Enhanced Connectivity” function. Clicking it again the symbol ”X”is removed from the box andthe ”Enhanced Connectivity” function” is disabled.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string allows to configure the connection mode.By clicking on the circle the user can select from the list displayed on the right side of the screen.When the table is shown the default option (”None” ) is displayed near the circle.The user can select the mode of connection from the list:
– None
– Bridge (Insert to both)
– Drop from East protected (SNCP)
– Drop from West protected (SNCP)
– Drop/Insert West protected (SNCP)
– Drop/Insert East protected (SNCP)
– Drop and Continue D/C W INS WDrop protected West, Pass–through W to E, Insert West
– Drop and Continue D/C E to WDrop Protected East, Pass–Through W to E, insert West
– Drop and Continue D/C E INSDrop Protected East, Pass–Through to Insert East
– Drop and Continue D/C W INS EDrop Protected West, Pass–Through E to W, Insert East
• 4th column – a cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant AU a Revertive modePPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR ( 5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP)is performed in not Revertive mode.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
139
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 87. Connection configuration – Enhanced Connectivity
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
140
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.3 Aggregate Payload Structure
The data indicated in Figure 88. defines the payload structure for aggregate AU–4’s, West.The application allows to configure the frame composition for each Aggregate AU–4 by selecting theoptions.When selecting the ”structured” option the user can choose the composition of the 3 TUG–3 inside thepayload.
Each AU–4 is represented by:
• a small circle on the left that allows to select the frame composition. By clicking on the circlethe user can choose the following option from the list:
– Not structured– structured
• a group of three small circles that allow to select the composition of three ”structured” frameTUG–3’s. By clicking on each circle the user can select the value for the associated TUG–3from the list displayed at the bottom–left of the screen. The selected value is displayed next tothe associated circle.The possible value to select are:
– TUG2– TU3
The selections must comply with the ”Signal Label for Aggregate VC4 Table”.
As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for STM–16 Aggregate.
Figure 88. Connection Configuration – West Agg. Payload structure
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
141
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.4 Tributary Payload Structure
The data indicated in Figure 89. defines the payload structure for the eight Tributary cards.The application allows to configure the frame composition for each Tributary card by selecting the relevantoptions.When selecting the ”Structured” option the user can choose the composition of the 3 TUG–3 inside thepayload.
Each card is represented by:
• a small circle on the left that allows to select the frame composition. By clicking on the circle theuser can choose the following option from the list:
– Not structured
– structured
• a group of three small circles that allow to select the composition of three ”structured” frameTUG–3’s. By clicking on each circle the user can select the value for the associated TUG–3 fromthe list displayed at the bottom–left of the screen.The possible values to select are:
– TUG2
– TU3
If the Drop Shelf is used, the Line Shelf Trib # 5,6,7 Tributary Payload Structure , must be declared asTUG 2 structured.
The selections must comply with the ”Signal Label for Tributary card Table”.
Figure 89. Connection Configuration – Tributary payload structure
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
142
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.5 Signal Label for Aggregate VC4
The table shown in Figure 90. indicates information on the signal label ”to be compared” (Rx side) andthe signal label ”to be transmitted” (Tx side) of the Aggregate VC4.For each VC4 (1 to 16) of the West and East Aggregate the application allows to configure a couple ofsignal labels, and displays.
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be compared”
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be transmitted”.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select the proper signal label from the table on theright of the screen:
• Unequipped (the VC4 informative contents must not be taken into consideration, it si notcarrying a pay load).
• Equipped not specified ( the VC4 is managed whichever structured or not structured; all typeof pay load structures are accepted).
• TUG structure (if equipped with 2 Mbit/s, 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tribs. and 34/2 5x2Mbit/s Tribs.).
The cited selections must be realized only if the signals have been structured (through TUGselection). For all the other cases selections are not operative.
Figure 90. Connection Configuration – Signal label Agg. VC4
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
143
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.6 Signal Label for Tributary cards
The table shown in Figure 91. indicates information on the signal label ”to be compared” (Rx side) andthe signal label ”to be transmitted” (Tx side) of the tributary units.
For each Tributary units the application allows to configure a couple of signal labels, and displays:
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be compared”• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be transmitted”.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select the proper signal label from the table on theright of the screen.
For the Matrix tributaries indication the table defines the VC4 signal labels belonging to the STM1Tributaries (8 tributaries access, only for STM1 signals).
The possible signal labels are:
• Unequipped (the VC4 informative contents must not be taken into consideration, it si notcarrying a pay load).
• Equipped not specified ( the VC4 is managed whichever structured or not structured; all typeof pay load structures are accepted).
• TUG structure (if equipped with 2 Mbit/s, 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tribs. and 34/2 5x2Mbit/s Tribs.).
The cited selections must be realized only if the signals have been structured (through TUGselection). For all the other cases selections are not operative.
For the 140M Tributaries, 21X2 M Tributaries, 5X2M Tributaries 3 x 45M Tributaries and 3X34 Mbit/sTributaries units the possible VC4/VC12/VC3 signal labels are:
• Unequipped• Equipped not specified• Asynchronous
For the tributaries used the value to fix is Asynchronous.
Figure 91. Connection Configuration . Signal label for trib.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
144
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.7 Path trace VC4 for Aggregates and Tributaries
16 byte multiframe format is described in ITU–T Rec. G 707 table 4/G707.
Expected and transmitted fields are editable by the operator.The Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE.
The 15 charactes editable by operator are:“a” to “z”, “A” to “Z” and “0” to “9” or “SPACE”.If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 Bytes or no value has been entered in the field, the latter is filled in withsome zeros.
Figure 92. shows the table relative to the Aggregate unit toghether with the fields associated to the sixteenSTM–16 Aggregate AU4s; should the aquipment be provided with STM–4 Aggregate, the field to becompiled are the firts four (AU4#1 – AU4#4)
The tables relative to the 140 and STM–1 Mbit/s Tributaries units (Figure 93. and Figure 94. ) are likewisefilled in.In case of Aggregates and STM–1 Tributaries, the received path trace value can be read in the same way,i.e.:Through the AS&C application,open the window of the Full Matrix unit and, in HPT block, clic on the labelrelative to the Path Trace Mismatch alarm, the value can be read only if J1 is in the alarm state.To read the correct values, upload the VC4 Path Trace.In case of 140 Mbit/s tributaries, open the 140 Mbit/s tributary window and proceed as above mentioned.
Figure 92. Connection Configuration – Path trace VC4 for aggregate West
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
145
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 93. Connection Configuration – Path trace for tributaries 140 M
Figure 94. Connection Configuration – Path trace for tributaries STM 1
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
146
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.8 AU–4’s Drop/Insert Allocation
The data indicated in Figure 95. on page 147 allows the user:
• to configure the connections between the 140M/STM1 Electrical and STM1 Optical Tributaryunits and the Aggregate AU–4’s.
• to configure the connection types towards the Aggregate AU–4’s.
Each Tributary (1st. column) is represented by:
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU–4to which the Tributary card will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the usercan select from the Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type ofconnection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayedat the bottom–right of the screen.The user can select the following types of connections from the list:
– None– Insert To West ( East)– Bridge (Insert to both)– Drop from West ( East) not protected– Drop from West (East) protected (SNCP)– Drop from protected (SNCP)– Drop/Insert West (East) bidirectional not protected– Drop/Insert West (East) protected (SNCP)– Drop and Continue D/C W INS W
Drop protected West, Pass–through W to E, Insert West– Drop and Continue D/C E INS W
Drop Protected East, Pass–Through W to E, insert West– Drop and Continue D/C E INS W
Drop Protected East, Pass–Through to Insert East– Drop and Continue D/C W INS E
Drop Protected West, Pass–Through E to W, Insert East– MS SPRING Drop and Continue D/C IC W or E
Drop from W and Continue toward E, Insert W and pass through connection E to W– Drop and Continue D/C IC Pass–Through W or E. This facility can be used in SNCP,
MS–SPRING (or a mixed of these rings) interworking to protect the 8 main AU4.– Drop/Insert protected West (East)/Trib– Drop/Insert protected Trib/West (East)– Drop protected West (East)/Trib– Drop protected Trib/West (East)
• 4th column – a cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant AU a Revertible modePPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR ( 5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP)is performed in not Revertible mode.
Attention !
The selections on this screen are operative when the AU–4 payloads have been selected as NOTSTRUCTURED
AU4 5 to 16 can be used for the STM–16 Aggregates only.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
147
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 95. Connection Configuration AU4 drop/insert
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
148
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.9 AU4’S Concatenation
The AU4 contiguos transport provides the ability to transport a single 622 Mbit/s payload on a set of fourcontiguous AU4s according to the ITU–T G.707 recs.
The affected traffic ports need to be STM–4 or STM–16. In the latter case there are four fixed time slotsavailable to allocate AU4x4C:
AU4#1–AU4#4 AU4#5–AU4#8 AU4#9–AU4#12 AU4#13–AU4#16
The table shown in Figure 96. permits to configure STM–16 or STM–4 optical interface as AU4concatenation structure.
Clicking on the box the user can enable the concatenation at groups of four AU4.
Figure 96. Connection Configuration – AU4’s Concatenation
4.5.3.10 MS–SPRING Configuration
The table shown in Figure 97. permits to configure the equipment data for the MS–SPRING protection.
The parameter to set are:
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
149
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– MS SPRING Enabled : Enable the MS–SPRING messages among the NE’s, without reallyactivate the protection in case of alarm condition
– MS SPRING Activate : Activate the MS–SPRING protection.
– Node Identifier : Insert the number of the NE’s on which we are operating.
– Ring Map :(Clockwise Direction : W to E)
Insert the sequence of the NE of the ring, in clockwise direction.For each node insert the relevant number.Anyone can be the starting node.
– Wait Time to Restore : Permits to select the time to wait, before restore the previously con-dition, when the alarm that cause the switching operation disap-pears. The values are selectable at the bottom left of the screen (5sec, 5 min.,10 min.,15 min.).
N.B. MS SPRING and SNCP algorithm are not compatible in the same Ring. When MS SPRINGis enabled and active the eventual configuration of an SNCP protection will cause aremoval of the MS SPRING. Vice versa having done an SNCP connection we can’tactivate MS SPRING otherwise the SNCP protection wouldn’t act.In this release the SWP EACT provides suitable warnings.
Figure 97. Equipment Configuration . MS–SPRING
4.5.3.10.1 Operative sequence to configure the MS SPRING
The operative sequence are listed in the following.
Activation procedure:
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
150
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
a ) provision the ”Connection Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= ENABLE”, W.T.R, NodeIentifier and Ring Map previously set and the related Squelching Tables previously set to each nodeof the ring in the desired order. (see para. 4.5.3 on page119 ) . MS–SPRING must be NOT active
b ) provision the ”Connection Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= ACTIVE” ( MS–SPRING isalready enabled ), to each node of the ring in the desired order.
Consider that, in this step, ”Default K byte W or E” detection by ”A, S & C application” (underMS SPRING label ––> Protocol exception detected) , will occur on those Aggregates connectedto the nodes not provisioned yet, with the MS–SPRING protection ”Active”.
Verify, by ”A, S & C” at the end of provisioning update, that all the nodes of the ring are in ”Idle” state.
Deactivation procedure:
a ) provision the ”Connection Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= DEACTIVE”, to each node ofthe ring .
Consider that, in this step, ”Default K byte W or E” detection by ”A, S & C application” (underMS SPRING label ––> Protocol exception detected) , will occur on those Aggregates of theactivated nodes, connected to the nodes just provisioned.
b ) provision the ”Connection Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= DISABLE”, to each node of thering.
N.B. When the D/C IC connection is working on the NE for activate or deactivate the MS–SPRINGprotection is necessary before execute the above procedure to change the D/C IC connectionas following:
Modify D/C IC connection into Drop/Insert unprotected when the Main side is set from theTributary. If the Main side is Pass Through, modify into AU4 Pass Through.Send new configuration to the NE.Execute the activation/deactivation phase of MS–SPRING procedure.Restored the D/C IC connection.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
151
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.11 Squelching table for EAST and WEST HO container
The Figure 98. on page 152 shows how the user can configure the Squelching table for 8 High PriorityHO containers of the Aggregate East in TX and in RX direction ; a similar screen is available for the WestHO containers.
This table must be configured when a ring network made of 1661SM–C equipment is managed with a MSSPRING protection. The target of the Squelching Function is to avoid misconnections in case a Node onwhich we had Inserted and Dropped an High Priority stream, remains isolated as a consequence of adouble failure, one before and another after it . In fact in this case all streams directed to and dropped fromthis node, are definitively lost and it cannot be recovered.
Nevertheless, following the MS SPRING rules, the protection algorithm trays to recover the connectioninterrupted by the double failure. Both adjacent Nodes should route the interrupted stream into the relevantLow Priority AU4 stream changing the previously defined connection.
To avoid that misconnection the Squelching Function inserts the AIS criterion into the Low Priority AU4,relevant to that stream that should have been Inserted and Dropped in /from the isolated Node. In this waythe use of the Low priority AU4 to recover the connection becomes impossible.
All Nodes have been identified with a progressive number filling the relevant table in the EquipmentConfiguration Application (para. 4.5.3.10 on page 148) in order to describe the Node succession in theRing.
For the High Priority AU4 streams the user is request to set the Node (number) into which they areGENERATED ( SOURCE NODE ) and the Node from which they are TERMINATED ( DESTINATIONNODE).The High Priority AU4 stream is GENERATED in a node when either it is inserted (”AU4 Insert” or ”TU12/3Insert” Connection Mode) or when, in case of AU4 structured, a ”TU 12/3 Pass Through” connection modeis implemented in that node. Then in both cases the node involved must be indicated as SOURCE NODEin ” HO Squelching Table”.Notice that a AU4 not structured in ”AU4 Pass through” connection mode is never generated by thepassed through node. In this case the passed through node DOES NOT have to be indicated as SOURCENODE in ”HO Squelching Table”.
Similarly, the High Priority AU4 stream is TERMINATED in a node when either it is dropped (”AU4 Drop”or ”TU12/3 Drop” connection mode) or when, in case of AU4 structured a TU12/3 pass through connectionmode is implemented in that node. Then in both cases the node involved must be indicated asDESTINATION NODE in ”HO Squelching Table”.Notice that a AU4 not structured in ”AU4 Pass through” connection mode is never terminated by thepassed through node. In this case the passed through node DOES NOT have to be indicated asDESTINATION NODE in ”HO Squelching Table”.
To fill the table of Figure 98. on page 152 for each High Priority AU4 in TX and in RX direction the user:
• can select the identifier of the source node
• can select the identifier of the destination node
• can specify if the HO container is VC12/3 accessed. (Not operative in this release).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
152
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
In the Figure 98. each AU4 (1st. column) is represented as a Transmission and Receiving stream:
• 2nd column – Source Node –the small circle and an associated string allows to define theNode into which the relevant stream is Inserted. By clicking on the circle or on the string theuser can select the Node number from the list displayed on the right side of the screen.
• 3rd column – Destination Node – the small circle and an associated string allows to definethe Node form which the relevant stream is Dropped . By clicking on the circle or on the stringthe user can select the Node number from the list displayed on the right side of the screen.
• 4th column – VC Access (not operative in this release ).
Figure 98. Connection Configuration – Squelching table for HO container
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
153
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.12 AU–4’s Cross Connection for Aggregates
The data indicated in Figure 99. allows the user:
– among the AU–4’s of the Aggregate West– among the AU–4’s of the Aggregate East
• to configure the type of cross–connection
Each Aggregate West AU–4 and each Aggregate East AU–4 (1st column) is represented by:
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU–4of the same side to which the AU–4 port will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on thestring the user can select from the destination Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the bottomleft of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type ofcross–connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the listdisplayed at the bottom–right of the screenThe user can select the following types of connections from the list:
– None– Unidirectional– Bidirectional
Attention !
The AU–4 payload managed must have already been selected as NOT STRUCTURED.
As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for the STM16 Aggregate.
Figure 99. Connection Configuration – AU4 Cross–connection for Aggregates
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
154
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.13 AU–4’s Cross Connection for Tributaries
The date indicated in Figure 100. allows the user :
• to configure the Cross–Connection:
among the AU–4’s of the Tributary units
Each Tributary AU–4 (1st column) is represented by:
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the destinationtributary AU4 to which the AU–4 port will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the stringthe user can select from the destination tributary AU–4’s list displayed at the bottom left of thescreen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of cross–Connection (list of the bottom right).The user can select the same type of Cross–Connection as described for the aggregate AU–4.
Attention !
The AU–4 payload managed must have already been selected as NOT STRUCTURED.
Figure 100. Connection Configuration AU4 Cross–Connection for tributaries
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
155
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.14 AU–4’s Pass–Through Allocation
The data indicated in Figure 101. allows the user to configure the AU–4’s Pass–Through Connectionbetween the East Aggregate and West Aggregate. For each of the four AU–4 channels of the EastAggregate the user can select the West side AU–4 channels to connect.
Each East side AU–4 is represented by:
• 1st column – The number identifies the East side AU4 that is kept as reference for the AU–4channel connection .
• 2nd column – the small circle on the left and an associated string that allow to define what Westside AU–4 transmits towards the aggregate East AU4 channel of the 1st column (W → E).By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side AU–4 channels’list displayed on the right of the screen.
• 3rd column – as above to define the West side AU–4 to which the aggregate East AU4 channelof the 1st column will be sent (E → W).
In case of AU4C concatenation mode is sufficient to define the first of the groups of four AU4.
Attention !
The AU–4 payload managed must have already been selected as NOT STRUCTURED.As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for the STM–16 Aggregate.
Figure 101. Connection Configuration – AU4 Pass–through
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
156
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.15 TU’s Drop/Insert Allocation for Tributary
The following description concerns Tributary (1 to 8) configuration.
The data indicated in Figure 102. on page 157 allows the user:
• to configure the TU connections between the 21x2M or 3x34M or 3 x 45M or STM1 Tributary1 and the Aggregates.
• to configure the types of connection towards the Aggregates.
In order to configure the above connections, the application uses three different screens for each Tributary.Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the tributary payload. Each TUG3(1 up to 3) is correlated with the relevant physical 34Mbit/s reference port (1 up to 3). For the 21x2MTributaries only the first screen must be used.By clicking on the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys allow the user to move within the three TUG3’s.
For the 34Mbit/s tributaries and TU3 of STM1 Tributaries, only the first line (TU3/34M/45M Port) is used.
Each TU is represented by:
• 1st column – The number identifying the TU or the 2Mb/s port (or 34/45 Mb/s port)• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU–4
to which the Tributary TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the usercan select from the Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate TU towhich the Tributary channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the usercan select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12, or the second liston the right for the TU3.
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type ofconnection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayedat the bottom–right of the screenThe user can select the following types of connections from the list:
– None– Insert to West– Insert to East– Bridge– Drop from West not protected– Drop from East not protected– Drop from East protected– Drop from West protected– Drop/Insert West bidirectional not protected– Drop/Insert East bidirectional not protected– Drop/Insert West protected– Drop/Insert East protected– Drop and Continue W/E Insert W/E
• 5th column – a Cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant TU a revertible modePPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR (5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP)is performed in not revertible mode.
Attention !The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) canbe used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
157
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 102. Connection Configuration – TU drop/insert, tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
158
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.16 TU’s Cross–Connection for Aggregate East/West
Cross–connection configurations for AU4 1 of the Aggregate WEST are specified herein. The citedinformation permit to also configure the other AU4 of Aggregates WEST and EAST through the selectionof further 31 tables.
Tables referred to AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for STM–16 Aggregate.
The data indicated in Figure 103. on page 159 allows the user:
• to configure the cross–connections between the TU’s of the Aggregate West AU–4 #1 and theTU’s of the Aggregate AU–4’s on the same side,
• to configure the type of cross–connection
To configure the above cross–connections, the application uses three different screens.Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the aggregate AU–4 #1 payload.By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three TUG3’s.
Only the first line of the configuration (TU3) is used for the TU3.
Each TU of the Aggregate West AU–4 #1 is represented by:
• 1st column – the number identifying the TU
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU–4of the same side to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string theuser can select from the Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selectedAU–4 to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user canselect from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12, or the second list onthe right for the TU3.
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type ofconnection. By clicking on the circle or on the user can select from the list displayed at thebottom–right of the screen.The user can select the following types of connections from the list:
– None
– Unidirectional
– Bidirectional
Attention !
The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED.
The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can be used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
159
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 103. Connection Configuration – TU cross–connection. Aggregate
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
160
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.17 TU’s Cross–Connection for Tributary
Cross–connection configurations for Tributary 1 are specified herein. The cited information also permitsto configure the other Tributaries through a further selection of tables.
The data indicated in Figure 104. on page 161 allows the user:
• to configure the cross–connections between the TU’s of Tributary 1 and the TU’s of theTributaries
• to configure the type of cross–connection
To configure the above cross–connections, the application uses three different screens.Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the Tributary 1 payload.
By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three screen.
Only the first screen must be used for the 21 x 2 M Tributaries.
Only the first line of the Configuration (TU3/34M/45M) must be used for the 3 x 34Mbit/s or 3x45Mbit/s unitsor TU3 of STM1 Tributaries.
Each TU of Tributary 1 is represented by:
• 1st column – the number identifying the TU or the 2Mbit/s port (or 34/45 Mb/s port).
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Tributary to whichthe TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from theTributaries list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selectedtributary to which the TU of tributary 1 channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle oron the string the user can select from the Tributary TU’s list displayed at the center–right of thescreen for TU12, the list at the top–right for the TU3/34 M or 45M port.When the TU12/2 M Port refer to cross–connections with the 21x2M Tributaries, only the TU12’swith Port 1 to Port 21 indication have to be selected.
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type ofcross–connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the listdisplayed at the bottom–right of the screen The user can select the following types ofconnections from the list:
– None
– Unidirectional (Insert, Drop)
– Bidirectional
Attention !
The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
161
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 104. Connection Configuration – TU cross–connection Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
162
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.18 2 M Tributary Conditions
The table shown in Figure 105. allows to enable or disable each of the sixty–three 2 Mb tributary ports ofthe three possible 2Mb Trib. units.
Figure 105. Connection Configuration . 2 Mb/s tributary conditions
4.5.3.19 34M and 45M and DVB Tributary Conditions
The table shown in Figure 106. allows to enable or disable each of the three 34 Mbit/s, 45Mbit/s or DVBTributary ports of the eight possible units.
Figure 106. Connection Configuration . 34 Mb/s, 45 Mbit/s or DVB tributary conditions
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
163
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.20 2/34M Conditions of 34/2 and 5x2M Tributary.
The table shown in Figure 107. allows to enable or disable, for each of the three tributaries, the five 2 Mbit/sport and the four groups of four 2 Mbit/s ports making up the 34 Mbit/s stream.
Figure 107. Connection Configuration 34/2 and 5x2 Tran Mux Trib. conditions
4.5.3.21 140Mbit/s tributary port Configuration
The table shown in Figure 105. allows to enable or disable each of the eight possible 140Mbit/s port ofthe relevant Tributary units.
Figure 108. Connection Configuration . 140 Mbit/s tributary port Configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
164
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.22 2M Retiming configuration
This table must be compiled for each used port of the 2 Mbit/s retiming tributary in order to enable theretiming function for the selected port.The mixed configuration with and without Retiming is not allowed.
Figure 109. Connection Configuration – 2 Mbit/s retiming configurations
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
165
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.23 TU’s Pass–Through Allocation for Aggr. East AU–4
The data indicated in Figure 110. on page 165 allows the user to configure the TU’s Pass–ThroughConnections between the East Aggregate AU–4 #1 and West Aggregate AU–4’s.To configure the above pass–through connections, the application uses three different screens.Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the East Aggregate AU–4 #1 payload.By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three screens.Only the first line of the Configuration (East TU3) must be used if TU3 are in the pass–through condition.Each TU of the East Aggregate AU–4 #1 is represented by:
• 1st column – the number which identifies the East side (that is kept as reference for theconnection) TU channel
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define what West side AU–4transmits towards the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column (W → E). By clicking on the circleor on the string the user can select from the Aggregate Au–4’s list displayed at the top–right ofthe screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the what TU pertainingto the AU previously defined, transmits towards the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column (W→ E). By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side TU’s liston the right (third list for TU12, second list for TU3).
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define what West side AU–4receives the Aggregate channel coming from East (E → W).By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate AU–4’s listdisplayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 5th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selectedincoming AU4 West side that receives the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column. By clickingon the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side TU’s list.
Attention !
The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED.The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can be used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
Figure 110. Connection Configuration – TU pass–through Aggregate
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
166
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.24 Connection Configuration by AUX/EOW
The table shown in Figure 111. on page 168 allow the user to configure:
• the Pass–through connections and the Termination of the data channels, V11 and G.703.
• the voice channel connections
The user can choose the following:
• for each Termination channel (V11 #1, V11 #2, V11 #3, G.703 #1, G.703 #2, G.703 #3) theoptions are:
– noneAgg West/East Main / Active (available bytes: E1, E2, F1 and all free bytes of SOH.Besides the F2 byte for the structured AU4)Agg West/East AU4 # 1 – 16 (available bytes: F2, if the AU4 is structured)Agg West/East Spare /Standby (available bytes: E1, F1)STM1 Trib # 1–8 (available bytes: E1, E2, F1)140M Trib #1–8 (available bytes: F2, F3)
– select the OverHead byte devoted to the channel(Table: ”OH selection for Termination Channels”.)
It is also possible to select both the Aggregates Spare to convey to the terminationsthe E1 and F1 bytes.
• for each of the possible Pass–through channels choose between:
– noneAgg West/East Main / ActiveAgg West/East Spare/Standby
– select the OverHead byte assigned to the channel(OH’s table for the ”Pass–Through Channels”.)
• Eow Extension Enabled.
In the following we describe how to use this function since the AUX/EOW Unitsthat can be used are:
AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2AUX/EOW / 2
1 ) Using the AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2 unit.
– Select the ”Eow Extension Enabled” option.– The User must HW preset the unit for the extension on the third voice channel (see the
Technical Handbook, HW Presetting section).– Voice 3 channel must not SW set in this case because it is already used to realize the
extension. The Voice 3 channel can’t be used.
With this unit and under the previous conditions, the analogic bypass functionality, thatallows the party line connection between Voice 1,2 and the voice extension towards theexternal by means the access panel of the equipment, will be activate.The unit converts the speech signal passing through from East to West from digital toanalog and vice versa.
2 ) Using the AUX/EOW / 2 unit.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
167
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– Do not select the ”EOW Extension Enabled” when using the AUX/EOW / 2 unit for WIDENETWORK otherwise the analogic bypass would permanently activated.
– Voice 3 channel must not SW set.
With this Unit , no digital to analog conversion is operated on the speech signal passingthrough from East to West (digital bypass activated) and there is no limit on the numberof NE connected. When the AUX/EOW unit is for the WIDE NETWORK and Voice 3 isconfigured and connected to a Tributary the analogic bypass is automatically activated.
3 ) With both unit.
– Voice 3 channel can SW set using Tributary unit.– Do not select the ”EOW Extension Enabled”.– The User must HW preset the unit to enable the Voice 3 channel on Tributary.
Having engaged the voice 3 channel, the digital bypass will be disabled and the EOWpasses through the double conversion
• select the MSOH Pass–through option (all the Multiplex Section OverHead bytes areby–passed between the East–West Aggregates). Only RSOH bytes remain available for thePass through connection filling the ”Pass–Through Channels” selection of the Figure 111. onpage 168 .
• for the Voice channel
– Voice 1: select among:
AGG. West main; bytes E1, E2. AGG. West Spare; bytes E1.AGG. West AU4 #1–16; bytes F2.STM–1 Tribs ; byte E1 or E2.140 Mbit/s Trib.; byte F2.
– Voice 2: select among:
AGG. East main; byte E1, E2 AGG. East Spare; bytes E1.AGG. East AU4 #1–16; bytes F2.STM–1 Tribs ; byte E1 or E2.140 Mbit/s Trib.; byte F2.
– Voice 3: select among:
AGG. West/East main; byte E1, E2.AGG. West/East Spare; byte E1.AGG. West/East AU4 #1–16; bytes F2.STM–1 Tribs ; byte E1 or E2.140 Mbit/s Trib.; byte F2.
When in a ring connection, in one of the node only one Aggregate side must be used to avoid loopof the speech.Select the phone number ( 10 to 99 )
All the operative selections appear on the lists on the right.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
168
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 111. Connection Configuration – AUX/EOW Connection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
169
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.3.25 AUX/EOW cross connections
As cross connection we mean a connection between two tributaries or between an aggregate and atributary.
For each tributary /aggregate and for each AU4 # inside the STM N that has been cross connected in termof payload, it is possible to cross connect also the SOH /POH bytes of the OverHead section.
For each of the involved tributary/aggregates it is possible to select the byte to cross connect.– List of the cross connectable SOH bytes:
• E1, E2, F1, F2 for STM–N, using SOH for Aggregate and OH bus for Trib.• E1, E2, F1, F2 for STM–N. The spare Agg uses the E1 and F1 bytes.• Agg. West/East AU4#1–4 or #1–16; F2 byte.
– List of the cross connectable POH bytes:• F2/F3 for 140 Mb Trib, using OH bus• F2, for STM–N, using Matrix via OH bus
The cross connection is bidirectional.
Figure 112. AUX/AEOW cross connections
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
170
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.4 DROP SHELF Connection Configuration Application
For the DROP SHELF Connection Configuration the following is a list of the connection configurationextension available ( see Figure 113. ):
• STM 1 E MODULES CONNECTION
• TU’s D / I ALLOCATION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 9
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 9
• 2 M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION
• 2 M RETIMING TRIBUTARIES CONDITION
Each of the above Tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
It must be noted that, starting from this Release:The connections involving the Drop Shelf 2mBit/s streams and set using the Applicationscited above, are performed by the Line Shelf Matrix Unit.The links between Drop Shelf STM–1 E Modules and the Line Shelf STM1 streams arefixed. (STM–1 E Module #1,#2,#3 are connected respectively with the Switchable STM1units #5, #6, #7).The allocation of the Drop Shelf 2Mbit/s flows with the Drop Shelf STM–1 E Modules isfixed. The Drop Shelf 21x2 Mbit/s Units #1, #2 and #3 flows , are collected by the STM–1E Module #1 that grooms the Trib #1 flows into the TUG3 #1 of the proper STM1 #1......tillthe last possible allocation that is relevant to the Drop Shelf 21x2 Mbit/s Units #7, #8 and#9 flows that are collected by the STM–1 E Module #3 that grooms the Trib #9 flows intothe TUG3 #3 of the proper STM1 #3.Fixed allocation means also that we are not obliged to equip the Line Shelf Switchable Trib.starting from the 5th one. It is possible for example to equip only the LINE SHELF TRIB.# 7 with its relevant DROP SHELF 21x2 Mb Units #7, #8 and #9.
Figure 113. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – Tables
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
171
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.4.1 STM–1E module connection
The table shown in Figure 114. allows to configure the connection between the DROP SHELFSTM – 1 E Module and the LINE SHELF STM 1 TRIBUTARIES #5 to #7. these connections are fixed.
By clicking on the small circle the user can choose the following options from the list:
• Not connected
• LINE SHELF – STM 1 Trib. # n
Figure 114. DROP SHELF Connection config. – STM–1E module connection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
172
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.4.2 TU’s drop/insert allocation. DS Tributaries
The data indicated in Figure 115. on page 173 allows the user:
• to configure the TU connections between the 21x2M Tributary #1 to #9
• to configure the types of connection towards the Aggregates.
Each TU is represented by:
• 1st column – The number identifying the TU or the 2Mb/s port.
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU–4to which the Tributary TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the usercan select from the Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate TU towhich the Tributary channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the usercan select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12.
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type ofconnection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayedat the bottom–right of the screenThe user can select the following types of connections from the list:
– None– Insert to West– Insert to East– Bridge– Drop from West not protected– Drop from East not protected– Drop from East protected– Drop from West protected– Drop/Insert West bidirectional not protected– Drop/Insert East bidirectional not protected– Drop/Insert West protected– Drop/Insert East protected– Drop and Continue W/E Insert W/E– D/I Prot W(E)/Trib– D/I Prot Trib/W(E)– D Prot W(E)/Trib– D Prot Trib/W(E)
• 5th column – a Cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant TU a revertible modePPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR (5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP)is performed in not revertible mode.
Attention !The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) canbe used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
173
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 115. DROP SHELF Connection Config. – Drop/Insert allocation DS tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
174
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.4.3 TU’s cross connection. DS Tributaries
Cross–connection configurations for a Tributary are specified herein. The cited information also permitsto configure the other Tributaries through a further selection of tables.
The data indicated in Figure 116. on page 175 allows the user:
• to configure the cross–connections between the TU’s of Tributary #2 in the example and theTU’s of all the DROP SHELF and LINE SHELF Tributaries.
• to configure the type of cross–connection
Each TU of Tributary is represented by:
• 1st column – the number identifying the TU or the 2Mbit/s port.
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Tributary to whichthe TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from theTributaries list displayed at the top–right of the screen (8 LINE SHELF Tribs and 9 DROPSHELF Tribs).
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selectedtributary to which the TU of tributary #2 in the example will be connected. By clicking on thecircle or on the string the user can select from the Tributary TU’s list displayed at the center–rightof the screen for TU12.
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type ofcross–connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the listdisplayed at the bottom–right of the screen The user can select the following types ofconnections from the list:
– None
– Unidirectional (Insert, Drop)
– Bidirectional
Attention !
The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
175
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 116. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – TU’s cross connection. DS tributaries
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
176
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.4.4 2 Mbit/s Tributary condition. DS Trib.
The Tributaries are selected through the table indicated in Figure 117.
Figure 117. DROP SHELF Connection Config.– 2 Mbit/s trib. condition DS trib.(choice of element)
Figure 118. allows to enable or disable each of the twenty one 2 Mb tributary ports of the 2Mb Trib. units.
Figure 118. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – 2 Mbit/s tributary condition. DS trib.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
177
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.4.5 2 Mbit/s Retiming Tributary condition. DS Trib.
The Tributaries are selected through the table indicated in Figure 119. Mixed configuration of 2M Tribwith and without Retiming function are not allowed.
Figure 119. 2 Mbit/s Retiming Tributary condition. DS Trib.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
178
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5 Local Configuration Application
This application is used to manage the local configuration data of the NE. Before starting any dialog thecited data must be loaded onto the NE. Through this data the OS or the MNE ( Master NE that performsthe R–ECT functions) can locate the NE. The NE can configure the protocol stacks.
The following local configuration tables are available for the user ( see Figure 120. ):
• Local Configuration
• OS Configuration
• Server NTP Configuration
• MS LAPD Configuration
• RS LAPD Configuration
• MF Configuration table
• ETHERNET Address Configuration
• R – ECT Configuration – Entry
The above are now defined as follows:
Figure 120. Local Configuration – Tables
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
179
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5.1 Local Configuration Table
This table, shown in Figure 121. allows the user to configure the LOCAL NE in order to be recognizedby the OS or by the Remote Craft Terminal
The LOCAL address consists of the following data fields:
– Area address
– System ID
– 7.1 address
– Intermediate system
Figure 121. Local Configuration
In details the Local Address is represented by :
The Area addresses (up to 3) and system ID constitute the NSAP address (Network Service AccessPoint) of the NE.
It is mandatory to set the first area address field. Area address 2 or 3 can be used as alias to obtain differentmanual area addresses within one single TMN Routing subdomain.The operators compiling it must be familiar with ISO – 10589 IS–IS Routing Recs.Area address 2 or 3 can be changed by the operator without prompting equipment restart and can havedifferent lengths.On the contrary, changes in mandatory Area Address, System ID and Intermediate System automaticallyrestart the equipment.
The NSAP address refers to level 3 (Network layer) of stack OSI and its structure complies with GOSIPV2, ISO_DCC or LOCAL format.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
180
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The AREA address is composed by the following fields:
• AFI : Authority and Format Identifier; (2 digit)
• IDI : Initial Domain Identifier (identifies the Nation); (4 digit)
• VER : indicates the format of the following fields; (2 digit)
• AUTH : identifies the department; (6 digit)
• RES : reserved field; (4 digit)
• DOMAIN & AREA : free fields for defining the network levels; (4 digit each one)
Another field, named SELECTOR (not presented to the operator) automatically inserts 2 digit.
For the GOSIP V2 format
– the AFI field is 47
– other fields : depend on network management structure
An example of GOSIP V2 format hypothetical address and System Id is:
AFI IDI
47 0005
VER
80
AUTH
010203
RES *
0000
DOMAIN
0405
AREA
0607
SYSTEM ID
00206000001
* = value automatically inserted
* = value automatically inserted
For the ISO_DCC format
– the AFI field is 39
– other fields : depend on network management structure
For these formats the SYSTEM ID filed must be 6 bytes long.
For the LOCAL format
– the AFI field is 49
– other fields : depend on network management structure
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
181
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The value of the SYSTEM ID field (12–digit long) might be:
• the equipment MAC Ethernet address supplied by ALCATEL–TELECOM (level 2)
• selected by the operator
However it must be unique in the network.
The NSAP address (Area addresses and System ID) length can range from 8 � byte � 20.
N.B. When using a NSAP length < 20 the not used fields must be filled with starcharacters : *
N.B. When using the LOCAL format, the equipment’s SW download from OS is supported only if theOS is using the ISO DCC format (AFI 39) or the GOSIP V2 format (AFI 47)
The value of the 7.1 ADDRESS identifying the NE must be greater than 4 and must be different for eachNE.
INTERMEDIATE SYSTEM: the operator can select whether the 1651 SM will work as an L1 or as an L2Intermediate System by clicking on the L1 or L2 circle.
All the NEs belonging to an Area Address connected to other Area Address must be configured asL2 Intermediate Systems (I.S.).The NEs connected together inside the same Area Address must beconfigured as L1. For example, a NE Gateway connected to the OS and having different AreaAddress must be configured as L2 I.S.
All the ADMs in the ring including the gateway NE should have the same ”mandatory area address”.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
182
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5.2 OS configuration
The screen of Figure 122. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address:
• The OS NSAP address is composed by:
– Area address
– System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS:
• enable / disable the Automatic Switch – Over
• enable / disable Automatic Switch – Back
WARNING
Be carefull, in order to avoid loss of dialogue with the OS , the operator must insert correctlythe Area Address code of OS main.If the OS can’t dialogue with the N.E because of the wrong address, the only way to restore theconnection is to connect physically the P.C to the N.E and fill again correctly the ”OSconfiguration” table.
Figure 122. Local Configuration – OS configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
183
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5.3 Server NTP Configuration Table
The NTP (Network Time synchronization Protocol) has been introduced to improve the precision of thepresent QB3* mechanism for time distribution in the network; the server can be configured following theindications given in the Figure 123. .
The NSAP address ( Area address and System ID ) must be given .Two NTP servers can be present , the Main and the Spare. A further selection permits to enable the NTPserver.If the NTP server is coincident with the OS ( same hardware ) , the same NSAP address of the OS mustbe assigned. Refer to Technical Handbook for details.
Figure 123. Local Configuration – Server NTP Configuration Table
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
184
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5.4 MS (RS) LAPD Configuration table
These tables permit to configure the LAPD use and ROLE for Aggregate and Tributary units in the DCCM(MS) and DCCR (RS) channel connections. The table shown in Figure 124. is referred to the MS LAPD.
For each card the table defines the following:
• LAPD interface
– NO: card not concerned with DCC connections
– YES: card concerned with DCC connections
• LAPD role which is selected when the LAPD interface is used (YES).
– USER
– NETWORK
This selection is a must to establish connection between two NEs and one network role with one user roleinterfaced.
Figure 124. Local Configuration – MS LAPD configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
185
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5.5 Mediation Function Configuration table
This table (see Figure 125. ) allows the user to enable the Mediation Function, when interfacing non SDHequipment with Q2 management.
The table permits to:
– insert the 7.1 address of the Q2 interface
– enable the Mediation Function
The application possible on the Mediation Function are presented at para 4.11 on page 324 .
The Network Configuration with Mediation Function is presented at para 4.12 on page 332 .
Figure 125. Mediation Function Configuration table
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
186
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5.6 ETHERNET Address Configuration table
This table ( see Figure 126. ) allows the user to configure the following information associated to theEthernet address to be used when the NE is connected to the Ethernet interface:
• Ethernet interface, click YES if the Q3 interface is present.
• LOCAL Address; the MAC Ethernet Address must be inserted ( level 2 ).
The value can be copied by means of the RECEIVE function of the FILE option. Hence the value, if present,is automatically received from the Futurebus Termination subunit of the Network Element. In this case,even if the value is manually modified, it will not be operative.The operator can also manually insert the MAC Ethernet Address value received from ALCATEL.
• L2 only parameter ( see Figure 127. on page 187 )
• False: if on the same interface, the L2 GNE also links NE pertaining to the same Area (e.g. NE – B).
• True : if on the same interface, the L2 GNE links only GNE pertaining to the other Areas (e.g. NE – A).
However the operator must refer to the ISO 10589 IS–IS Routing Recs.
Figure 126. Local Configuration – Ethernet address
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
187
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
OS
NEL2
NEB
NEA
AREA 1
AREA 2
AREA 3L2 only = FALSE L2only = TRUE
Figure 127. Local Configuration – L2 only parameter
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
188
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.5.7 R–ECT configuration
The NEs are selected through the table indicated in Figure 128.
Figure 128. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration (choice of element)
The table of Figure 129. allows the user to configure the remote NE that must be managed by a MNE( Master Network Element ). The table contains 31 entries, each of them describing one remote NE. Foreach entry the user can configure the following information:
– enabling of the Entry when the NE must be controlled by the Master NE of the Network or not.– NSAP address of the Remote NE:
• Area Address• System identifier
– 7.1 address of Remote NE
In order to configure such information the application uses 31 different screens, one for each possible NEof the network. The keys ” NEXT ” and ” PREVIOUS ” allow the user to move among the 31 screens.
Figure 129. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
189
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.6 Routing Table Configuration Application
This application is activated from the OPTIONS bar of ”Alarm Synthesis” window, by clicking onApplication_Choice and then on Routing Table Configuration, after selection of a given equipment ofthe list.
Messages are needed to be continuously exchanged between any NE or between OS and the NE’s of theSDH network. In a large and complex network it is necessary to build some tables to route the messagesand data transfers.
For this equipment the TMN management routing is automatically carried out by means of ”IS–IS Routing”function.Only for elements not supporting the IS–IS function it is necessary to fill the Routing tables.
The operator must intervene only in the following conditions:
• Reachable Address Prefix Element (RAP) when the NE interfaces other routing domains notsupporting the IS–IS function (e.g., OS with a different area address).
• Manual ES Adjacencies Element (MESA) when the NE interfaces the same domain, withNEs not acknowledging the IS–IS Routing (also for OS when it has the same Area Address).
The user can work on the following tables ( see Figure 130. ):
• Reachable Address Prefixes Element (RAP)
• Manual ES Adjacencies Element (MESA)
The above are defined in the description that follows.
Figure 130. Routing Table Configuration – Tables
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
190
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.6.1 Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP) Element table
The Elements are selected through the table indicated in Figure 131. A max. of 32 RAPs per NE can be configured.The Reachable Address Prefixes Element table must be compiled only with those elements configuredas L2 Intermediate System in the LOCAL configuration.These tables will be later used when the NEs are connected to other routing subdomains.When selecting an element the operator will set the information given in Figure 132.
• Physical Interface to be selected from a list shown on the right of the screen (LAN or Aggregatesor Tribs).DCCR channels and DCCM channels are used for both Aggregate and Tributary units.
• RAP: Area Address by inserting the value of the Area Address of the routing subdomain whichis connected through the previously indicated physical interface.
• MAC Address (level 2) of the connected element. It must de inserted only when the physicalinterface operates as a LAN.
Figure 131. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of Element (RAP)
Figure 132. Routing Table Configuration – Reachable address prefixes element
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
191
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.5.6.2 Manual ES adjacencies (MESA) Element table
The table shown in Figure 133. is utilized to select the elements.
A max. of 32 MESAs per NE can be configured.
The MESA is used to define the ”reachability” of an ”adjacent NE” not supporting neither the IS–IS protocolnor the ES–IS protocol.
The Operator will have to define the characteristics of this NE (MAC address and System ID) to enablethe IS–IS to acknowledge it.
The MESA must be inserted to define how to reach a NE not supporting the IS–IS protocol but belongingto the same ”Routing domain” (and having the same ”Area Address”).
The MESA is supported by the LAN interface and can be applied to the L1 and L2 Intermediate Systems,e.g., it can be applied to an OS if it belongs to the same subdomain (same Area Address).
As can be seen from Figure 134. the operator must insert the ”System ID” of the NE not supporting theIS–IS protocol along with its ETHERNET MAC Address.
These values are usually different. If the ”System ID” is assigned with the ”default” value FFFF... then thetwo values are identical (the MAC address is automatically copied in the ”System ID” field).
Figure 133. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of element (MESA)
Figure 134. Routing Table Configuration – Manual ES adjacencies element
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
192
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6 Alarm, status & control application
The A.S. & C. application:
• displays the failure condition and the status changes that have occurred on the NE,
• allows to move easily and quickly among the different screen levels(option view – see Figure 146. on page 208 and Figure 147. on page 208)
• displays/prints the alarms and the statuses history,
• provides remote control access to force functionalities on the NE (see para 4.6.3 on page 254for details ).
The data to display is arranged on different screen levels.
The alarm general information of the NE is displayed at the top of each AS & C screen.
Each synthesis is represented by a label which is green in normal condition.
If one of the alarms arises on the NE, the label changes colors.
The color of the alarm labels in alarm condition is indicated in Table 9. on page 193.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
193
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 9. AS–C Colors of the Alarms Synthesis
AT Alarm receiving attention Magenta
UG Urgent Alarm Red
NG Not Urgent Alarm Yellow
IN Indicative Alarm Magenta
AC Abnormal Condition Magenta
AEAccess enable for remote – control operation:Local Craft Terminal access enabled by the management operativesystem.
Light blue
(not enabled)
HI Environmental indication (Housekeeping alarm) NB1
UT Unavailable Time. 10 consecutive severely errored seconds. Magenta
ET Ethernet Fail NB1
LFLINE SHELF Battery : Fuse–broken alarm (Fuses housed in the TopRack Unit). OR alarm due to station power supply failure due to anycauses. The alarm criterion sent to the EC is :ORALIMI
Yellow
LBLINE SHELF – Battery control Failure / Missing – (Service Batt.missing/ AND OR failure or missing). The alarm criterion sent to theEC is : PWANDOR
Yellow
OS OS Isolation: link failed between Management Equipment OperationSystem and NE
Yellow
MF Mediation function OS isolation (Link failed between MF and OS) Red
LINE SHELFConverters SynthesisConverters Fail
Yellow
DF DROP SHELFBattery Fuse–broken alarm
Yellow
DBDROP SHELF Battery control Failure / Missing – (Service Batt. missing/ AND ORfailure or missing)
Yellow
DROP SHELFConverters SynthesisConverters Fail
Yellow
NB1 : The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping Alarms received: red for Urgent, yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most severe alarm is present when more than one alarm is detected.
To reset the ”UT” labels, send the relevant AS & C Remote Control.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
194
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1 LINE SHELF AS&C description
The Figure 135. on page 195 represents the first screen level showing the first alarm synthesis for theLine and Drop Shelf, FOX Equipment eventually connected and the OA alarm collection.
At the top of the main screen the label :New Practice
if present indicates that the composition of the Equipment is made with a shelf and subunits of a newmechanical structure.
For both Line and Drop Shelf the first level screen shows two boxes representing the Logical view ofcards and a Physical structure with the indication of the numbered card slot.
In these boxes are shown the following synthesis of alarm:
– LOGIC VIEW (logic representation of the NE)Reports the units and some function of the equipment in form of blocksTwo boxes shown the following synthesis of alarm:
• Logical Alarm Synthesis (color depending on the alarm severity)• Abnormal Condition (magenta)
– PHYSIC VIEW (physical structure of the NE )Reports the position of the units inside the equipment
• Card Fail (red)• Internal Failure (red or yellow)
On the first level screen is also depicted the following function:
– PPS:
• The first two small labels indicate the Forced Switch West or East of Path Protection Switchingrelevant to Tributary TU protection and to the Aggregate AU set in Enhanced Connectivity andPPS protected.The third small label is relevant to the Force Switch Trib in case of TTA connection.
They are the ”OR” indications for all PPS forced in the ”Remote Control” option.They can be: – green if there are not forced PPS
– magenta if there are forced PPS
– SW VERSION:
• shows the SW versions of all the Shelf Units
– OS :
• Shows the OS status :Active or Stand by (Line Shelf Only )
– MS SPRING:
• Node and Command Status (1661SM–C Line Shelf only )To show the NODE behavior when the first fault occurs in the ring network MS SPRINGprotected.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
195
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 135. Alarm,Status and Control – Main screen, Line and Drop Shelf
From the first level layout is obtained the second level layout that depicts the whole NE 1651 SM (seeFigure 136. for Line Shelf Logical view and Figure 137. for the relevant Line Shelf Physical Structure. Theanalogous screens for the Drop Shelf are depicted in the Figure 138. on page 197 and in theFigure 139. on page 197.The equipment release is also indicated.
The slot No. indicated on the screen corresponds to the unit position inside the subrack, and is insequential order inside it from left to right and from top to bottom.
The Figures show the configuration of the cards contained in the equipment. The cards that are notconfigured are not displayed.
Each card type can be inserted only in specific slots of the NE. Table 10. on page 198 and Table 11. onpage 199 list the slots contained in the Line and Drop Shelf and the associated card type.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
196
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 136. Alarm Status and Control (AS & C) – Line Shelf, Logical View
Figure 137. AS & C – Line Shelf, physical view
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
197
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 138. AS & C – Main screen – Drop Shelf , Logical View
Figure 139. AS & C – Main screen, Drop Shelf, physical view
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
198
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 10. Card/slot relationship – LINE SHELF
Slot � Card
1 Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module (34 – 45 or 140 Mb/s settings) – NB1
234
21x2 Mbit/s Trib., 21x2 Mbit/s Retiming Trib.,140/STM1 Switch Trib., S –1.1 LVCTrib., L–1.1 LVC Trib. or 3x34 Mbit/s Trib., L–1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., S–1.1HVC STM1 Trib., 34/2–5x2M Trib, 3 x 45M Trib, DVB.
6Tributary Spare 1 – 140/STM1 Switch Trib, 21x2 Mb/s Trib,21x2 Mbit/s Retiming-Trib., 3x34 Mb/s Trib., L–1.1/S–1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., 34/2–5x2M Trib. , 3 x 45MTrib, DVB.
7 16x16 Matrix
8 16x16 Matrix Spare
59101112
140/STM–1 Switch Tributary, S–1.1 LVC Trib. , L–1.1 LVC Trib. , 3x34 Mbit/sTrib., L–1.1/S–1.1 HVC STM1 Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib, DVB.
13 Tributary Spare 2 – 140/STM1 switch Trib or 3x34 Mb/s Trib., L–1.1/S–1.1 HVCSTM1 Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib, DVB.
14 Switch Unit /Alarm Interface Access Module (34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s) – NB1
15 Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module (34 – 45 or 140 Mb/s settings)– NB1
17 AUX / EOW
18 STM–4 Aggregate West 1 (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2)
19 STM–4 Aggregate East 2 spare (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2) or STM–16 AggregateEast (S–16.1, L–16.1 or L–16.2) – NB2.
20 CRU Spare
21 CRU Main
22 STM–4 Aggregate East 1 (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2)
23 STM–4 Aggregate West 2 spare (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2) or STM16 AggregateWest (S–16.1, L–16.1 or L–16.2) NB1.
NB.1 : With Rel. New Practice equipment physical structure,the SWITCH UNITS are notpresent. The switching function is realized directly by means the interconnec-tions within the units.
This slot is nevertheless SW settable in order to activate N+1 EPS in both Oldand New Practice Equipment. In this last Structure is also necessary to make theHW presetting on the Alarm Interface Access Module as indicated in the Techni-cal Handbook – Hardware Setting Section.
NB.2 : Two slots & (18+19 and 22+23) are assigned to each STM–16 Aggregate
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
199
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 11. Card/slot relationship – DROP SHELF
Slot � Card
1 not used slot
234567
21x2 Mbit/s Trib., 21x2 Mbit/s RetimingTrib.
89
ADM600 Interface Unit – Main and Spare
10 not used slot
11 21x2 Mbit/s Trib, 21x2 Mbit/s RetimingTrib. – Spare
121314
21x2 Mbit/s Trib, 21x2 Mbit/s RetimingTrib.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
200
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Clicking inside the logic box the LOGIC VIEW appears (see Figure 136. on page 196 for the Line Shelfor Figure 138. on page 197 for the Drop Shelf). Each label depicted in it represents a card.The blocks representing the alarm condition of the units, are present only if the unit has been configuredaccording to the configuration tables downloaded on the NE, anyway a label indicating the slot numberis always present.Each label ( card ) is represented by:
• two rectangles
• two small labels (one for the AUX/EOW, three for the Switch Units).
• a label with the slot number
The first rectangle shows the card status. The card can assume the IN SERVICE or OUT–OF–SERVICEstatus.
The second rectangle can show the ACTIVE or STAND–BY status.
If the card is out–of–service, then:
• the first rectangle is colored bright red showing a highlighted OUT string
• the second rectangle is colored bright red.
If the card is in service, then:
• the first rectangle is colored green showing a highlighted IN screen.
• the second rectangle
– is colored green showing a highlighted ”IS–ACT”, if the card is in the ACTIVE state
– is coloured bright red if the card is in the ”IS–STAND–BY” state.
The label on the right displays the ”OR” indication, it stands for abnormal conditions detected on the card,and is not present for the AUX/EOW unit . The label is displayed even if the associated cards are notconfigured. The label has a colored background.
1 ) it is colored green if there are no abnormal conditions
2 ) it is colored bright red if there is an abnormal condition. If a monochromatic display is used theterm colors black.
The label on the left displays the ”OR’ing of the logic alarms defined on the card.The label background is colored:
3 ) green if there are no logic alarms
4 ) red if an URGENT alarm is active
5 ) yellow if a NOT URGENT alarm is active and there are no URGENT alarms present
6 ) bright red if an INDICATIVE alarm is active and there are no URGENT nor NOT URGENTalarms present
When the alarm is present a letter ”A” appears.
For the Switch Unit labels are present only in the ”Physical view”
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
201
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Clicking inside the physical box the PHYSICAL VIEW appears (see Figure 137. on page 196 orFigure 139. on page 197 ). Each card is represented by a numbered rectangle. The number inside itidentifies the slot into which the card is inserted.The cards that are not configured are not displayed.
Each rectangle, associated to a logic structure, contains two small labels .
The top label, INTERNAL FAILURE, represents the OR’ing of the following physical alarms:
• Card mismatch• Software mismatch• Card not responding• Card missing• other indications of the single card
The lower label represents the CARD FAIL and it is the OR’ing of the following physical alarms:
• Card Fail• EEPROM fail• Gate Array fail• Card power fail• other alarms of the single card
For the ”Switch Unit” three labels are present indicating:
• Card fail• Card missing• Card mismatch
More detailed screens are not provided for these units.
In the STM–1 E Modules label that are represented in the upper part of the Drop Shelf physical structurethere is only one label indicating:
• Card Fail or Card Missing
More detailed subscreens can be accessed for each card and function both with regard to the physicaland logic view and for each function.These subscreens detail the information displayed on the first and second screen.
To access these subscreens position the mouse on the card involved, and when the cursor is depictedas a magnifying glass (see Figure 13. on page 62 ) click the left mouse–button.The displayed information differs for each card/functions, and are presented in the next paragraphs.
For more details on the meaning of the unit’s alarms and the maintenance actions refer to ”Maintenance”section .
A subscreen can be also accessed from the ”HI” label that is found in the equipment alarm synthesis atthe top of the AS&C screen, by clicking on the cursor when it becomes a ”magnifier”.
It the housekeeping indications (1 to 8 inputs and 1 to 7 outputs) received/transmitted by the equipmentdisplays on the relevant tagblock (see Figure 140. on page 203)Clicking on the boxes the Housekeeping denomination are obtained.The first three Housekeeping can be modified by means of the Equipment Configuration application
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
202
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
For the Line Shelf / Drop Shelf Power Supplies are shown in Figure 141. on page 203 and in Figure 142. onpage 203 respectively, the labels indicating the Secondary Power Supply Fail.
The indication common to the detailed levels is green in normal condition, while those of the activecondition are listed in the following Table 12.
Table 12. Common CARD STATUS indications ( active ).
ALARM/STATUS Mnemonic andcolor
Meaning
IS–ACT PBA in–service and active.N.B
ACTIVE magenta Unit inserted and operating
IS–STBY PBA in–service andstand–by. N.B
STAND BYmagenta
Unit inserted and spare
Card missing CRD MIS red Slot configured but unit not inserted
Card mismatch MSMTCH red Unit inserted into a slot configured foranother type of unit
Software mismatch MSMTCH red Unit with not updated software version
Card not responding NO RESP yellow No dialogue between Card and EquipmentController
Card fail C. FAIL red Unit internal failure (hardware)
MS or RS LAPD fail MS/RS LAPDyellow
Dialogue of Equipment Controller bymeans of DCCM/R interrupted
Commanded switch COMM SW,
magenta
Switching Remote command from theAS&C
Protection Switch event SWITCH,magenta
East – West Protection switching activated(PPS)
Line loopback LINE L magenta Loopback Remote command from theAS&C
Internal loopback INT. L magenta Loopback Remote command from theAS&C
N.B. PBA=Printed Board Assembly=”unit”
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
203
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 140. AS & C – Housekeeping
Figure 141. Line Shelf Power Supplies Label
Figure 142. Drop Shelf Power Supplies Labels
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
204
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.1 LINE SHELF AS&C description
4.6.1.2 AUX–EOW screen
Figure 143. shows the detailed screen of the AUX–EOW.
The AUX/EOW consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms:
• OH ACCESS (Overhead Access)
– Loss of Signal on G.703 Interface #1– Loss of Signal on G.703 Interface #2– Loss of Signal on G.703 Interface #3
• OH CONNECTIONS (Overhead Connections)
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in–service and active(PBA=Printed Board Assembly is synonymous with ”unit”)
– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail
The change of colour, symbol or text in each label indicates the presence of a specific card alarm.
Figure 143. AS & C – AUX/EOW
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
205
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.3 21x2 Mbit/s and 21x2Mbit/s Retiming tributary Screen
Two screens are utilized for the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.
The first screen (second level) shows a detailed view of the Tributary card (see Figure 144. on page 207).
The second screen shows a detailed view (Third Level Layout) of each of the 21 ports making up the2Mbit/s Tributary card (see Figure 145. on page 207)
The following functional blocks and relevant alarms are displayed on the first screen:
• 21 Tributary Ports each provided with four labels:
– the label at the bottom–right displays the Protection Switch event (SNCP)– the label at the bottom–center displays the ”OR” of the abnormal conditions– the label at the bottom–left displays the ”OR” of the alarms defined in the port– the label at the top indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source.
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in–service and active– IS–ACT PBA in–service and stand–by.– Manual Command– Lockout Command– Card not responding– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch– Card fail
• Reference Clock:
– Loss of 2Mbit/s frame
Additional labels are present only on the 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. unit used as spare indicating the protected unit:
• Protected card 1
• Protected card 2
• Protected card 3
The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary name and number are displayed at the top–left of the first screen.
From the first detailed screen the user can access a further detailed screen:
• by either selecting the option ”View” (see Figure 146. on page 208), or
• by clicking on one of the labels representing the tributary port when a small magnifying glassglyph is displayed as a cursor.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
206
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The selected screen (see Figure 145. on page 207) shows the following components with the relativealarms:
LPT Lower order Path termination
• Mismatch of VC12 signal label
• Mismatch of VC12 path trace
• VC12 Far End Receive Failure
• Unavailable TU Path (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed)
• 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
• Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
PI Physical Interface
• Loss of incoming Tributary signal
• Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Port selected for the reference clock• Protection Switch Event (SNCP)• Unequipped signal label (payload is empty)• Internal Loopback• Line loopback• Enabled Retiming
The name of the tributary port is displayed on the left side of the second screen.
To access the higher level screen, the VIEW option must be selected (see Figure 147. on page 208), hencePrevious Esc; if ”First” is selected, the Main Screen of Figure 135. on page 195 is displayed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
207
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 144. AS & C – 21 x 2Mbit/s Tributary
Figure 145. AS & C – Port 1, Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
208
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 146. AS & C – View option 1
Figure 147. AS & C – View option 2
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
209
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.4 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary Screen
The 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary screen (see Figure 148. on page 210 ) displays:
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active
– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by.
– Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation).
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Software mismatch
– Card not responding
– Card fail
– Manual Command
– Lockout Command
• The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary:
LPT (Lower order Path termination)
– Unavailable TU Path
– Mismatch of VC3 signal label
– Mismatch of VC3 path trace
– VC3 FERF
– 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
– Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
PI (Physical Interface)
– Loss of incoming Tributary signal
– Line AIS (AIS received)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
210
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Protection Switch event (SNCP)
• Internal Loopback
• Line Loopback
• Unequipped signal label
The 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary name and numbers are displayed on the screen.
Additional labels are present only for the spare unit indicating the protected unit:
• Protected card #1 to card #4
Figure 148. AS & C – 3 x 34 Mbit/s Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
211
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.5 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary Screen
The 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary screen (see Figure 149. on page 212 ) displays:
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active
– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by.
– Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation).
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Software mismatch
– Card not responding
– Card fail
– Manual Command
– Lockout Command
• The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary:
LPT (Lower order Path termination)
– Unavailable TU Path
– Mismatch of VC3 signal label
– Mismatch of VC3 path trace
– VC3 FERF
– 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
– Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
PI (Physical Interface)
– Loss of incoming Tributary signal
– Line AIS (AIS received)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
212
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Protection Switch event (SNCP)
• Internal Loopback
• Line Loopback
• Unequipped signal label
The 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary name and numbers are displayed on the screen.
Additional labels are present only for the spare unit indicating the protected unit:
• Protected card # 1 to # 4.
Figure 149. AS & C – 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
213
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.6 DVB Tributary screen
The DVB Tributary screen (see Figure 150. on page 214) displays:
– CARD STATUS
• IS–ACT PBA in–service and active• IS–STBY PBA in–service and stand–by• Manual command• Card missing• Card mismatch• Card not responding• Card fail• Software mismatch
– The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the DVB Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the DVB Tributary:
LPT Lower order Path Termination
– Mismatch of VC3 signal label
– VC13 FERF
– Unavailable TU path
– Near 15 M TCA Threshold cross alarm
– Far 15 M TCA Threshold cross alarm
– Near DAY TCA Threshold cross alarm
– Far DAY TCA Threshold cross alarm
– Mismatch of VC3 path trace J1 ( not operative in this release)
LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
PI Physical Interface
– Tributary signal loss
– AIS ( AIS received )
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
– Enabled/Disabled Internal Loopback ( activated in remote control ; abnormal condition )
– Enabled/Disabled Line Loopback ( activated in remote control ; abnormal condition )
– Switched port (with reference to SNCP)
– VC3 unequipped signal label
The DVB tributary names are displayed on the top–left corner. No spare card are prewied
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
214
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 150. AS & C – DVB tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
215
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.7 34/2 – 5x2 Mbit/s Transmultiplexer Tributary screen
Two screens are utilized to display the Transmultiplexer’s Tributary unit.
The first screen (second level) is an overall view of the Tributary unit showing five 2 Mbit/s ports and the34 Mbit/s port (see Figure 151. on page 217) and associated four 8 Mbit/s streams.The second screen (third level) is a detailed view of the functions carried out together with the relevantalarms occurring on each basic stream.Refer to Figure 152. on page 218 (for the 2 Mbit/s stream), and to Figure 153. on page 218 (for the 34Mbit/s stream).
The first screen showns the following functional blocks and relevant alarms:
• Five 2 Mbit/s ports each having four labels, i.e.:
– the label at the top–right indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source– the label at the bottom–right shows the Protection Switch Event (SNCP)– the label in the middle at the bottom shows the OR–ing of the ”Abnormal Conditions”– the label at the bottom–left shows the OR–ing of the alarms defined in each port
• The 34 Mbit/s port with the four 8 Mbit/s streams each provided with three labels, i.e.:
– OR–ing of the alarms defined for each function– Abnormal conditions– Protection Switch Event
While for the whole unit it displays:
• CARD STATUS– IS–ACT PBA in–service and active– IS–ACT PBA in–service and stand–by– Card missing– Card mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail– Software mismatch– Manual Command– Lockout Command
• CLOCK REFERENCE
– Loss of 2 Mbit/s frame
An additional label is provided for the 34 Mbit/s port indicating alarms:
– Loss of Tributary signal– FERF: Far–end Receive Failure– AIS received– Loss of 34 Mbit/s frame– Line Loopback on 34M port
For the Spare Unit only there is a label indicating which Trib the Spare Unit is protecting.
The name of the 34/2–5x2M Transmux is indicated on the part at the top–left side of the first screen.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
216
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Through the first screen the user can access a more detailed one:
• either by selecting the ”view” option (see Figure 147. on page 208 ),
• or by clicking on one of the 2/8 Mbit/s Tributary port labels when the magnifying glass replacesthe cursor.
The selected screens display the following functional blocks and relevant alarms(Second Screen – Third level):
• 2 Mbit/s ports (see Figure 152. on page 218):
LPC (Low order Path Connection)
LPT (Low order Path Termination)
– Mismatch of VC12 Signal Label– Mismatch of VC12 path trace– FERF– Unavailable TU Path. (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed)– 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)– Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Low order Path Adaptation)
PI (Physical Interface)
– TU alarm indication signal
– Loss of incoming tributary signal
Additional labels are provided to indicate the following alarms:
– Port selected for the Reference Clock– Internal loopback– Protection Switch Event (SNCP)– Unequipped signal label
The name of the Tributary port is shown at the top–left corner of the screen
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
217
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• The 34 Mbit/s port can be further exploded into 8 and 2 Mbit/s (see Figure 153. on page 218);moreover, two additional labels for each of the four 2 Mbit/s streams is shown from right to leftindicating:
– Internal loopback– Protection Switch Event– Unequipped signal label
For each 2 Mbit/s stream conveying into the 8 Mbit/s stream:
LPC (Low order Path Connection)
LPT (Low order Path Termination)
– Mismatch of VC12 Signal Label– Mismatch of VC12 path trace– FERF– Unavailable TU Path.– 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)– Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA (Low order Path Adaptation)
The following labels are provided for the 8 Mbit/s stream:
– Loss of 8 Mbit/s frame– Alarm Indication Signal received– FERF
To access the higher level screens, select the VIEW option (see Figure 147. on page 208, then thePREVIOUS ESC option.By selecting option ”First”, the initial screen of Figure 136. on page 196 is accessed again.
Figure 151. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
218
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 152. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 5 x 2Mbit/s ports
Figure 153. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 34 Mbit/s ports
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
219
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.8 140 Switchable Tributary Screen
The following presents the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit configured as 140 Mbit/s.The screen is shown in Figure 154. on page 220. The Tributary name is displayed on the left of the picture.
The 140 Switchable Tributary consists of the following functional blocks and of the associated alarms andstatuses:
• PPI (Plesiochronous Physical Interface)
– Receive Loss of Signal
– Line Alarm Indication Signal
• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
• HPT (Higher order Path Termination)
– Unavailable AU Path
– Mismatch of VC4 signal label
– Mismatch of VC4 path trace
– HO path FERF
– 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
– Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
• HPC/PPS (Higher order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching)
– Excessive BER B3 West
– Excessive BER B3 East
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information:
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active
– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by.
– Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation).
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Software mismatch
– Card not responding
– Card fail
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
220
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Protection switch event (SNCP)
• Unequipped signal label
• Internal loopback
• Line loopback
• Manual command
• Lockout Command
For the spare unit only
– The low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection, not operative in this release)
– The protected card number (for N+1 protection)
Option ”140 M/EC STM–1 trib.” is used to Subrack Configure the Spare unit protecting a mixedcomposition of trib. 140 M and Elect HVCSTM–1.The option corresponds to a screen summarizing the information contained in Figure 154. on page 220Figure 155. on page 222.
Figure 154. AS & C – 140 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
221
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.9 Electrical STM1 Switchable Tributary Screen
The following represents the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit configured as STM1 (electrical).
The screen is shown in Figure 155. on page 222. The Tributary name is displayed on the left of the picture.(ELECTR HVC STM1)
The STM1 Switchable Tributary consists of the following functional blocks and of the associated alarmsand statuses:
• SPI (SDH Physical Interface)
– Receive Loss of Signal
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)
– Loss of Frame
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)
– Multiplexer Section AIS– Excessive BER – B2– Signal Degrade– FERF: Far End Receive Failure
• SA (Section Adaptation)
– Unavailable AU Path– Loss of AU4 pointer– Alarm Indication Signal Received
• HPT/HPOM
– 15 Minute TCA sourceThreshold cross Alarm
– 15 Minute TCA Synk– Day TCA Source– Day TCA Synk
• HPC/PPS (Higher order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching)
– B3 Excessive BER, West– B3 Excessive BER, East
Detected in the signal received from Matrix. Used for PPS when Connection Card ispresent.
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information:
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by.– Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation).– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
222
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– Card not responding– Card fail– (MS–RS) LAPD fail (dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC
management)
• Remote Control
– Forced, Manual, Lockout (Remote/Local)
• Protection switch event (SNCP)• Line loopback• Internal loopback• K1 – K2 Mismatch• K2 Mismatch
For the spare unit only
– Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection not operative in this release)
– The protected card number (for N+1 protection)
Option ”140 M/EC STM–1 trib.” is used to Subrack Configure the Spare unit protecting a mixedcomposition of trib. 140 M and Elect HVCSTM–1.The option corresponds to a screen summarizing the information contained in Figure 154. on page 220Figure 155.
Figure 155. AS & C – STM1 Electrical Switchable Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
223
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.10 Optical LVC STM–1 Tributary Screen
Figure 156. on page 224 shows the detailed screen of the STM–1 tributary Optical unit (Long or shorthaul).
The name of the unit involved is shown at the top–left of the screen (OPTICAL LVC STM1)Moreover the screen shows all the components with the relevant alarms:
• SPI (SDH Physical Interface)
– Laser Fail– Laser Degraded– Receive Loss of Signal– Bad Media Depending Mismatch
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)
– Loss of Frame alignment
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)
– Multiplexer section AIS– Excessive BER (high BER–B2)– Signal Degrade (low BER–B2)– Far End Receive Failure
• SA (Section Adaptation)
– Unavailable AU Path– Loss of AU pointer– RX AU path AIS
• HPT/HPOM
– 15 Minute TCA sourceThreshold cross Alarm
– 15 Minute TCA Synk– Day TCA Source– Day TCA Synk
Additional labels are provides on the screen to indicate the following information:
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS–active protection for fault conditions)– Forced laser on (set in Equipment Configuration)– Forced laser off (set in Equipment Configuration)– Laser abnormal condition (present with FORCED ON/OFF and restore attempts after
ALS)– NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
224
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by– Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation)
Not operative for this unit in this release.– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail– (MS–RS) LAPD fail (dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC
Management)
• Remote Control
– Forced, Manual, Lockout (Remote/Local)
• Protection Switch Event
• Line loopback
• Internal loopback
• K1 – K2 Mismatch
• K2 Mismatch
• Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection). Not operative in this release.
– 1:1 protections are not operative in this release.
Figure 156. AS & C – Optical LVC STM1 Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
225
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.11 Optical HVC STM–1 Tributary Screen (Opt. 600 Trib.)
Figure 156. on page 224 shows the detailed screen of the STM–1 tributary Optical unit (Long or shorthaul).
The name of the unit involved is shown at the top–left of the screen (OPTICAL HVC STM1)Moreover the screen shows all the components with the relevant alarms:
• SPI (SDH Physical Interface)
– Laser Fail– Laser Degraded– Receive Loss of Signal– Bad Media Depending Mismatch
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)
– Loss of Frame alignment
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)
– Multiplexer section AIS– Excessive BER (high BER–B2)– Signal Degrade (low BER–B2)– Far End Receive Failure
• SA (Section Adaptation)
– Unavailable AU Path– Loss of AU pointer– RX AU path AIS
• HPC/PPS (High order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching)
– Excessive BER (high BER–B3), EAST and WEST. Detected in the signal received fromMatrix and used for PPS when Connection Card is present.
Additional labels are provides on the screen to indicate the following information:
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS–active protection for fault conditions)
– Forced laser on (set in Equipment Configuration)
– Forced laser off (set in Equipment Configuration)
– Laser abnormal condition (present with FORCED ON/OFF and restore attempts afterALS)
– NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
226
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by– Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation)
Not operative for this unit in this release.– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail
– (MS–RS) LAPD fail (dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCCManagement)
• Remote Control– Forced, Manual, Lockout (Remote/Local)
• Protection Switch Event
• Line loopback
• Internal loopback
• Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection). Not operative in this release.
– 1:1 protections are not operative in this release.
Figure 157. AS & C – Optical HVC STM1 Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
227
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.12 Full Matrix screen
The Matrix screen ( see Figure 158. on page 229 ) consists of the following functional blocks andassociated alarms and statuses:
• SA (Section Adaptation)
• HPT (Higher order Path Termination)
This functional block contains the following synthesis label:
– Loss of Multiframe alarm;The screen displays the 40 instances of the alarm (see Figure 159. on page 229).
– FERF alarm.the synthesis of the 40 instances of the FERF alarm (third level screen).
– Unavailable AU4 path.This screen displays 16 alarm instances. It is operative only for 1661SM–C and for AU4in enhanced connectivity.
– Signal Label Mismatch alarm.the synthesis of the 40 instances of Signal Label Mismatch alarm (third level screen).
– Path Trace Mismatch alarm.
– Excessive BER – B3 alarm.This screen displays the 40 instances of the alarm.
To display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on one of this label.
The screen displays the 40 instances of the relevant alarm (see for example Figure 159. onpage 229, referred to the ” Loss of Multiframe ” alarm).
• HPA (Higher order Path Adaptation)
This functional block contains the following synthesis label:
– The synthesis of the ” Loss of TU pointer ” :to display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label.The new screen (see Figure 160. on page 229) displays 40 labels, each of theserepresents the synthesis of the 63 instances of the ”Loss of TU12 Pointer” or the synthesisof the 3 istances of the ”Loss of TU3 Pointer” (the 11 of each TUG3).To display the 63 instances screen the user clicks on one of the cited labels (seeFigure 161. on page 230 )
– The synthesis of the ” TU AIS ” :to display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label.The new screen displays 40 labels, each of these represents the synthesis of the 63instances of the ”TU12 path AIS” or the synthesis of the 3 istances of the ”TU3 path AIS”(the 11 of each TUG3).To display the 63 instances screen the user clicks on one of the cited labels.
– The synthesis of the ” Unavailable TU Path ”of the eight Tributaries:
To display the more detailed level the user clicks on this label. It will appear a screen thatshows the eight tributary labels, each containing a small box that allows to reach anotherlevel screen.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
228
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Each screens displays:
• The synthesis of the 63 instances of the ”unavailable TU Path alarms ” if the TUG 3consists of TU12 channels.
• If the TUG3 consists of TUG3 channel the screen shows a synthesis of the 3instances of the ”unavailable TU Path alarms” (the 11 of each TUG3)
• LPC (Lower order Path Connection)
This functional block contains the synthesis label of the TU Protection Switching EventTo display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label.This screen contains 8 labels, referred to the signal of the 8 tributaries (see Figure 162. on page230). Each label represents:
– the synthesis of the 63 instances of the ”TU12 Protection Switching Event” if the TUG3’sconsist of TU12 channels
– the synthesis of the 3 istances of the ”TU3 Protection Switch Event” if the TUG3’s consistof TU3 channel (the 11 of each TUG3)
To display these detailed level screens the user clicks on the cited label (see Figure 163. on page 231)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information:
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by– Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation)– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail
• One functional block ( UNEQ SL ) that represents the synthesis of the 40 instances of theUnequipped Signal Label (byte C2) indication. To display the third level screen the user clickson the cited label. The screen displays the 40 indications instances (see Figure 164. on page231)
• A functional block ( AU4 PSE ) represents the Synthesis of the 16 AU4 Protection switch eventrelevant to the AU4 in Enhanced connectivity and PPS protected.
• The Low Priority Traffic information is for the spare unit only (1:1 protection, not operative in thisrelease)
The screen also indicates the assignment of the Matrix blocks to the units:
• E1 to E16 for the East Aggregate• W1 to W16 for the West Aggregate• T1 to T8 for the TRIBUTARIES
WARNING
When STM–4 Aggregate is used, only E1 to E4 and W1 to W4 BLOCKS ARE USED.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
229
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 158. AS & C – Matrix
Figure 159. AS & C – Matrix, LOM of HPT
Figure 160. AS & C – Matrix, LOP of HPA
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
230
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 161. AS & C – Matrix, LOP of HPA, TUG3
Figure 162. AS & C – Matrix, PSE of LPC
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
231
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 163. AS & C – Matrix, PSE of LPC, Trib 1
Figure 164. AS & C – Matrix, Unequipped Signal Label – C2
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
232
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.13 STM–4 Aggregate Screen
Figure 165. on page 233 shows the detailed screen of the STM–4 Aggregate East and West.The name of the card involved is shown on the left of the screen.Moreover the screen consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses:
• SPI (SDH Physical Interface)
– Laser fail– High Laser Temperature– Laser degrade– Receive Loss of Signal– Bad Media Depending Mismatch
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)
– Loss of Frame
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)
– Multiplexer section AIS– Excessive BER – B2– Signal Degrade – B2– FERF: Far End Receive Failure
• SA (Section Adaptation)
– Loss of AU pointer (1–4)– Rx AU path AIS (1–4)
• HPC (Higher order Path Connection)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information:
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS – active protection for fault condition)– Forced laser ON (set in equipment configuration)– Forced laser OFF (set in equipment configuration)– Laser abnormal condition (present with ON and OFF FORCED and restore attempts after
ALS).– NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by– Commanded switch (activated in Remote Control operation)– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail– (MS–RS) LAPD fail – dialog interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC
management
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
233
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Internal loopback
• Line loopback
• The ”Low Priority Traffic” information is useful only for the spare unit(1:1 protection, not operative in this release).
• Remote Control
– Manual Local/Remote
– Forced Local/Remote
– Lockout Local/Remote
Figure 165. AS & C – STM4 Aggregate
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
234
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.14 STM–16 Aggregate Screen
Figure 166. on page 236 shows the detailed screen of the STM–16 Aggregate East and West.
The name of the card involved is shown on the left of the screen.Moreover the screen consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses:
• SPI (SDH Physical Interface)
– Laser fail– High Laser Temperature– Laser degrade– Receive Loss of Signal– Bad Media Depending Mismatch
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)
– Loss of Frame
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)
– K1 – K2 Error– Multiplexer section AIS– Excessive BER – B2– Signal Degrade – B2– FERF: Far End Receive Failure
• SA (Section Adaptation)
– Loss of AU pointer (1–16)– Rx AU path AIS (1–16)
• HPC (Higher order Path Connection)
– Au4 Protection Switch Event, as a synthesis of 16 AU4 PSE reachable by clicking insidethe label (see Figure 167. on page 236). They are used only for MS SPRING – DC / ICprotection where the AU4 are supplied from TRIB and in case of protection they aresupplied by the Line. When this appends the relevant colour label changes from Green toMagenta.
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information:
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS – active protection for fault condition)– Forced laser ON (set in equipment configuration)– Forced laser OFF (set in equipment configuration)– Laser abnormal condition (present with ON and OFF FORCED and restore attempts after
ALS).– NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
235
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• SWITCH STATUS
The switching status condition relevant to MS SPRING protection :
– Bridge E/W
Bridge.It is only active during the temporary phase of the carrying out of the protection protocol.It will light off in steady state.
Bridge and Switch , active during the switch between the High Priority AU4 and LowPriority AU4 on the Node involved in the Protection, that means the Node adjacent to theLine failure.
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active– Card missing– Card mismatch– Software mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail– (MS–RS) LAPD fail – dialog interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC
management
• Line loopback
• Pass Through Fail.It is active when the external coaxial connections on the AGG STM16 UNIT are not done orwhen the TX to RX ( and vice versa) connections are not correctly executed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
236
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 166. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate
Figure 167. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate, AU4 PSE of HPC
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
237
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.15 CRU Screen
The CRU card is shown on two detail screens:
• the first screen shows the CRU card in detail (see Figure 168. on page 240)
• the second screen shows each of the 6 External/Internal references of the detailed CRU(see Figure 169. on page 240 as External references example).
The screen shown in Figure 168. on page 240 displays the CRU A and CRU B cards.
The CRU name is displayed on the left of the screen. The CRU consists of the following functional blocksand associated alarms and statuses:
• SELECT B (INTERNAL REFERENCE).To select the internal T0 reference.
– Contains six blocks each representing the 6 Internal References.The 6 Internal References are selected by the operator in the Equipment ConfigurationApplication, following a priority list, to synchronize the equipment (T0).
– Each block contains the following boxes and labels:
� INT #n (where n=1..6) – the top label indicates the reference number.
� CRU REFERENCE – (top right box) highlights when the timing reference is assigned.
� CRU ALARMS – (left box) is the OR–ing of the LOS and DRIFT alarm detected onthe corresponding timing reference.
� SSM VALUE – (middle box) highlights when the SSM value differs from G.811.The SSM values are reported on the second screen.
� CRU COMMAND – (right box) highlights when the timing reference is in lockout,or force/manual selection (through the Remote Control of the AS&C Application).
� LOCKED MODE – the label at the bottom highlights when the timing reference islocked. (This reference is used to synchronize the equipment – T0).
– OSCILLATORIt indicates the operative mode which differs from Locked, when no valid InternalReference clock is available .� Holdover (oscillator locked to the last valid stored reference clock).
� Free–running (free oscillator)
• SELECT A (EXTERNAL REFERENCE). To select the external T4 reference.
– It contains six blocks each representing six External References.The six External References are selected by the operator in the Equipment Configurationapplication, following a Priority List, to supply a clock towards the external equipment (T4).Each box is as that of the INTERNAL REFERENCE.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
238
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
– SQUELCH
The box highlights when the outgoing External/Internal Reference is inhibited.
� SQUELCH on EXT (T1 → T4)
It is used to either enable/disable the transmission of the selected T1 clock towards theT4 external clock.
� SQUELCH T0 → T4Might not be used. If used, it enables/disabled the transmission of the selected T0clock towards the T4 external clock.
The activation of the squelch is based on the ”Synchronism Quality Thresholds”determined by the operator during Equipment Configuration.
– SELECT C
� T0/T4
� T1/T4
To select on T4 (clock supplied to the EXTERNAL source) the following must be present:
� the operative EXTERNAL CLOCK (T1) from the six available ones, or
� the clock that is operative on T0 (the same clock supplied internally to the equipment).
Selection is made by the operator in the Equipment Configuration application.
• CARD STATUS
– PBA in–service and active– PBA in–service and Stand–by– Forced CRU (the user has selected the forced EPS command)– Card missing– Card mismatch– Card not responding– Card fail– Software mismatch
The second screen is available for each of the internal and external references to obtain the detailedinformation from the screen of Figure 169. on page 240.
• SYNCH SOURCE (one label is active when a reference is assigned) from:
– 2 MHz A– 2 MHz B– Aggregate STM 4 W1– Aggregate STM 4 W2 / STM 16 W– Aggregate STM 4 E 1– Aggregate STM 4 E 2 / STM 16 E– Tributary 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
239
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• ALARMS
– LOS– DRIFT
• SSM Value (When a reference is assigned ) : quality information received in S1 of STM1)
– G.811– G.812T– G.812L– G.81S– Q Unknown– Don’t use
– Unattended (SSMB received with a code not corresponding to those listed in the Rec.)
• EXTERNAL COMMANDS (forced by the operator to Remote Control of AS & C Application)
– Lockout (Inhibits switching)– Force (switches reference clock )– Manual (switches only if permitted by the alarm condition of the reference)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
240
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 168. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit
Figure 169. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit (Synch. Reference)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
241
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.16 PPS Forced Switch
Beside the first level screen indications, other three screens are used for this function.
The second level screen ( see Figure 170. ) shows:• the Forced PPS (W/E) of each Tributary• Aggregates (W/E) Forced PPS with TTA connection• Forced switch of AU4 in Enhanced Connectivity PPS protected.
The third level screen (see Figure 171. on page 242. ) indicates the forced PPS (W/E) for the TUG3 andVC4 of the selected unit. The label VC4 puts in evidence the forced switch about Tribs carrying bulk VCs
The fourth level screen (see Figure 172. on page 242 ) indicates the forced PPS for ports or TU.After a forced PPS switch the relevant green label color becomes bright red and the Abnormal alarm islighted up.
Figure 170. AS & C – PPS, units
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
242
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 171. AS & C – PPS, TUG3 and VC4
Figure 172. AS & C – PPS, ports/TU
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
243
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.17 Software Version Screen
The second level screen ( see Figure 173. ) shows all the unit of the equipment in which is possible tocheck the actual SOFTWARE VERSION.
The third level screen ( see Figure 174. ) shows the software version for the selected unit .
Absent units have all ”0” indication.
Figure 173. AS & C – Software version, units
Figure 174. AS & C – Software version, detail.(Data are an example)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
244
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.18 MS SPRING status
The second level screen (see Figure 175. ) shows the present NE as a Node involved in the 2 Fiber MSSPRING protection function.The MS SPRING protection is detailed in the Technical Handbook of the NE.
The protection algorithm foreseen the possibility to force the protection by means the CT commands, withdifferent priority levels, sent using the Remote Control function of the AS&C application.
The indications given about the LOCAL CONDITION are:
• Wait time to restore phase , before deactivation of the automatic protection due to the failure.
The following are Remote Commands activated by the operator:
• Lockout Working Channel, West and East side.The Lockout Working Command doesn’t allow the MS SPRING protection, both for alarmdetected from the side involved in the command and for external command involving the sameside. It permits the MS SPRING protection for switching causes detected / involving the otherside of the same node or detected / involving the other nodes of the ring.
• Lockout Protection Channel, West and East side.The Lockout Protection Command doesn’t allow the use of the protection channels whicheverswitching cause has required it, alarm or external command, on the span not involved in thecommand. It permits the MS SPRING protection only for switching cause occurring in the spaninvolved in the command.
• Force Switch, West and East sideForce Command always activates the protection and it has greater priority than the ManualCommand when this latter has been activated by other sources.
• Manual Switch, West and East side.Manual Switch Command activates the protection, with lower priority than the Force Command.
The indications given about the SWITCH STATUS are:
• Bridge/Switch, West and East.The protection is activated and the Node is directly involved in it (failure/command in theadjacent span).
PROTOCOL EXCEPTION DETECTED ON :
These labels light on (magenta) on the left for the West side, on the right for the East side, when:
• Improper APS Code W or EK1, K2 detected are not consistent with the APS protocol.
• Node ID Mismatch W or EK1, K2 sourced by not adjacent node.
• Default K byte W or EAPS default code is detected (MS SPRING) is enabled but not activated.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
245
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
APS INTERNAL STATUS:
• APS Internal IDLEThere is no need to activate the protection.
• APS Internal Pass ThroughThe protection is activated in the Network but the node is not directly involved because it is notadjacent to the failed span. Low priority AU4s are put in Pass–Through.The K1, K2 bytes are also put in Pass–Through to allow the dialogue between the two Nodesthat are adjacent to the failed span.
• APS Internal RequestThe protection is activated and the Node is directly involved in it.
RECEIVED APS REQUEST from W or E:
It represent the monitoring of protection request (bridge request), contained in the K1 byte received.
• APS Lockout Protection Channel W/E• APS Forced Switch W/E• Signal Fail W/E• Manual Switch W/E• Reverse Request W/E• APS Signal Degrade W/E• APS Wait Time to Restore W/E• APS no Request W/E
N.B. When the MS SPRING algorithm is ENABLED and ACTIVE in a ring, NO SNCP can beconfigured because this would remove of MS SPRING protection.
N.B. When the SNCP is configured, NO MS SPRING can be activated, because this would causethe removal of SNCP protection.
All the labels are green in normal conditions, magenta when the indicated status is active.
Figure 175. AS & C – MS SPRING status
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
246
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.1.19 Operating System screen
The second level screen of Figure 176. shows the status for the two Operating Systems , indicatingwhether is active the ” Main” or the ” Spare” one.
A label indicates if the NTP (Network Time Synchronization Protocol) server is enabled.
Figure 176. AS & C – OS status
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
247
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.2 DROP SHELF AS&C description
In the Drop Shelf main screen (see Figure 138. on page 197 ) the card and function logic representationpertaining to the Drop Shelf are presented.
The shown unit are the ADM 600 I/F, the 21X2Mbit/s (this latter is the same unit used in the Line Shelf)and the STM–1 E BISEPA Module.
The functions represented are related to the PPS management and the SW version label that have thesame meaning as in the Line Shelf.
On the right side of the figure each card is represented by a numbered rectangle corresponding to the slotinto which the unit and modules are inserted.
The alarm representation in each label follows the same criterion seen in the Line Shelf Main screen inpara 4.6 on page 192.
4.6.2.1 ADM 600 Interface screen, Drop Shelf
The Figure 177. on page 248 shows the detailed screen of the ADM 600 I/F Unit.The name of the Unit involved is shown at the top–left of the screen ( ADM 600 A or B ).The screen shows all the logical components with the relevant alarms:
• SPI (SDH Physical Interface)
– Transmitter fail
– Receive Loss Signal
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)
– Loss of Frame alignment
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)
– Multiplexer section AIS ( MS AIS )
– Excessive BER – B2
– FERF: Far End Receive Failure
• SA (Section Adaptation)
– Alarm indication Signal Received ( AU4 Path AIS )
• HPT (Higher order Path Termination )
– Loss of multiframe
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
248
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in service and active
– IS–ACT PBA in service and standby
– Software mismatch
– Card fail
– Card mismatch
– Card missing
– Card not responding
– Commanded Switch (Manual, Lockout)
In both main and spare Unit is put in evidence which is the ” STM – 1 E Module ” that is selected to supplythe Clock Reference .
Figure 177. AS & C – ADM 600 Interface, Drop Shelf
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
249
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.2.2 STM – 1 E Module
The STM – 1 E Module # 1 to # 3 are represented in the Drop Shelf AS&C Main screen in Figure 138. onpage 197 by the relevant three labels, each of them carrying the following alarm:
Card Fail or Card Missing
4.6.2.3 21 x 2Mbit/s trib. screen, Drop Shelf
Two screens are utilized for the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.
The first screen (second level) shows a detailed view of the Tributary card (see Figure 178. on page251).
The second screen shows a detailed view (Third Level Layout) of each of the 21 ports making up the2Mbit/s Tributary card (see Figure 179. on page251 )
The following functional blocks and relevant alarms are displayed on the first screen:
• 21 Tributary Ports each provided with four labels:
– the label at the bottom–right displays the Protection Switch event (SNCP)
– the label at the bottom–center displays the ”OR” of the abnormal conditions
– the label at the bottom–left displays the ”OR” of the alarms defined in the port
– the label at the top indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source.
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in–service and active
– IS–ACT PBA in–service and stand–by.
– Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation).
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Software mismatch
– Card not responding
– Card fail
• Reference Clock:
– Loss of 2Mbit/s frame
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
250
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Additional labels are present only on the 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. unit used as spare indicating the protected unit:
• Protected card 1
• Protected card 2
• Protected card 3
The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary name and number are displayed at the top–left of the first screen.
From the first detailed screen the user can access a further detailed screen:
• by either selecting the option ”View” or
• by clicking on one of the labels representing the tributary port when a small magnifying glassglyph is displayed as a cursor.
The selected screen (see Figure 179. on page251 ) shows the following components with the relativealarms:
LPT Lower order Path termination
� Mismatch of VC12 signal label
� Mismatch of VC12 path trace
� VC12 Far End Receive Failure
� Unavailable TU Path (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed)
� 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
� Day Threshold Cross Alarm (Near, Far)
LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
PI Physical Interface
� Loss of incoming Tributary signal
� Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Retiming Unabled• Protection Switch Event (SNCP)• Port selected for the reference clock• Internal Loopback• Line loopback• Unequipped signal label
The name of the tributary port is displayed on the left side of the second screen.
To access the higher level screen, the VIEW option must be selected, hence Previous Esc; if ”First” isselected, the Main Screen is displayed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
251
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 178. AS & C – 21x2M trib, Drop Shelf
Figure 179. AS & C – 21x2M port, Drop Shelf
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
252
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.2.4 DROP SHELF PPS Forced Switch
Beside the first level screen indications, other three screens are used for this function.
The second level screen (see Figure 180. ) shows the Forced PPS (W/E and Trib) of each units, decidedwith ”Remote Control” commands.
The third level screen (see Figure 181. ) indicates the forced PPS for ports or TU.After a forced PPS switch the relevant green label colour becomes bright red and the Abnormal alarmis lighted up.
Figure 180. AS&C – PPS, units, Drop Shelf
Figure 181. AS&C – PPS, ports, Drop Shelf
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
253
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.2.5 DROP SHELF Software version screen
The second level screen ( see Figure 182. ) shows all the unit of the equipment in which is possible checkthe actual SOFTWARE VERSION.
The third level screen ( see Figure 183. ) shows, for the selected unit, the software version.
Absent unit have all ”0” indication.
Figure 182. Drop Shelf – Units Software version
Figure 183. Drop Shelf – Software version, detail.(Data are an example)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
254
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.3 Options of the AS&C application
In the Alarm Status & Controls window the following options are present: VIEW; HISTORY; REMOTECONTROL; UP LOAD.A small triangle is present on the same line where the cited options can be selected.General information on the application is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
4.6.3.1 VIEW
this option (see Figure 184. ) permits to move among the different screen levels.This option permits to select the subscreen of a particular card.This option permits to select the Physical or Logical rapresentation or one of thefunctions. From the Physical or the Logical rapresentation it permits to select thesubscreen of a particular card.
When the option is selected in a lower level screen, the screen of higher level,or that of first level, can be accessed again.
Each selection is made by clicking left mouse–button once on the desired option.
Figure 184. AS & C – View option
4.6.3.2 UP LOAD
This function is utilized to update the SW Version of the equipped Units, for example, after havingsubstituted some Units with the relevant Spares.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
255
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.3.3 HISTORY
the ”History” option permits to display or print information from a file(see Figure 185. ).
This file will always contain the last 3000 alarms/events occurred on the NE.
The operator will select the data to display or print through the options ofFigure 186. on page 256 :
Display Time permits to select a particular set of alarms/events referredto one of the present units or a particular equipmentfunction.If select ALL, all the alarm/events are selected.
Mnemonic permits to select a specific alarm/event of the previouslyselected TITLE.
Classification permits to select the alarms/events compliant with theclassification decided .
Data Filter if enabled (X) permits to decide a Begin / End Date andTime of the previously selected alarm / event.
After having selected the desired option, a video window of 10 rows appears con-taining the last 10 alarms/events (corresponding to the selection characteristicsintroduced), see Figure 187. on page 256. This window can be scrolled to displayall the selection characteristic alarms. If the printing option has been selected, allthe messages relative to the introduced characteristics are directly sent to theprinter. Clicking on the cross at the upper right corner of the screen we can clearit.
During the display phase, the alarm window can be moved to more functionalsections of the video (usually at the bottom of the video).
The information of each alarm/status row is:• Event date• Event hour• Name of the alarmed entity• Alarm acronym• Alarm classification• Alarm start/clearing
Figure 185. AS & C – History
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
256
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 186. AS & C – History choice
Figure 187. AS & C – History display
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
257
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.6.3.4 REMOTE CONTROLS
This option allows the user to transmit the required remote control.
When this option is selected, the user can choose (see Figure 188. on page 260):
• whether to list all the remote controls, or
• whether to list the remote controls of the displayed unit
The Remote controls list is accessed and the user can choose and execute the command. For example,the selections required to transmit the ”Restart Equipment” remote control are shown in Figure 189. onpage 260.
Figure 192. on page 261 displays the meaning of the loopback command.
Figure 190. on page 261 appears requesting confirmation.
When the remote control reaches the NE, the operator receives an acknowledging message (seeFigure 191. on page 261).
N.B. Before changing the Main side of a protected connection we must CLEAR the FORCE SWITCHeventually activated, otherwise the CT report will remain as FORCED SWITCH even if that isno more true.
The following are the lists of the remote controls enabled on each card:
• Equipment Controller
– Restart Equipment (general equipment reset)– Alarm receiving attention (AC indication ON, stores the URG–NURG alarm,
now free or other alarm indications)– Reset UAT alarms (Unavailable Time, Performance Monitoring indication in
AS&C and Maintenance Memory)– Reset TCA
– Force West / East or Clear Tributary Path Protection Switching (PPS) on singleVCs
– Force / Manual switch West or East MS SPRING.– Lockout Working/Protection channel W/E MS SPRING.– Clear WTR MS SPRING.– Rel Force/Manual W/E MS SPRING.– Rel Lockout Working/Prot channel W/E MS SPRING.
• STM4 and STM16 Aggregate units
– Clear switch command– Commanded switch (only simplified APS)
forcing into service the Spare with respect to the Main Aggregate– Enable/Disable Internal (only for STM4 Aggregate Unit)/Line loopback
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
258
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• CRU units
– Commanded switch; forcing into service. Main to Spare– Clear switch command– Force INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Switch Main to Spare)– Lockout INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Disable switch possibility)– Manual INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Switch commanded only if possible)– Clear INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6
• 21X2 Mb/s tributaries
– Clear switch Command– Manual switch
• for the spare unit:– Lockout Spare– Clear 2M Trib
• for each port:– Enable/Disable Internal/Line Loopback
• Matrix unit
– Clear Full Matrix– Lockout Spare Full Matrix– Manual Switch Full Matrix
• STM1 tributaries
– Lockout Spare STM1 Tributary– Manual switch STM1 Tributary– Clear STM1 Tributary– Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback
• 140 Mb/s and Electrical STM1 Tributaries
– Lockout Spare 140 Tributary– Manual switch 140 Tributary– Clear 140 Tributary– Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback
• 3X34 Mb/s tributaries
– Lockout Spare 3x34 M Tributary– Manual switch 3x34M Tributary– Clear command– Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback #1 to #3
• 34/2 Tran Mux
– Lockout Spare 34/2 Tran Mux– Clear 34/2 Tran Mux– Manual switch– Enable/Disable Line loopback 34/2 Tran Mux
• 5X2M Tributary
– Enable/Disable Internal loop 2M #1 – 4 34/2 2M Tributary
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
259
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• 34/2 – 2MBit/s Tran Mux– Enable/Disable Internal loop 5x2 M Trib.
• 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributaries
– Lockout Spare 3x45 M Tributary– Manual switch 3x45M Tributary– Clear command– Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback #1 to #3
• ADM 600 IF unit
– Lockout Spare ADM 600 IF Unit– Manual Switch ADM 600 IF Unit– Clear command ADM 600 IF Unit
• VC4 and TU PPS Commands
– Force Switch W/E PPS VC4 Trib.– Force Switch Trib PPS VC4 Trib.– Clear Force PPS VC4 Trib.– Force Switch W/E PPS TU Trib.– Force Switch Trib PPS TU Trib. (TTA connection)– Clear Force PPS TU Trib.
• AU4 PPS Commands
– Force Switch E/W PPS AU4 Enhanced– Clear Force PPS AU4 Enhanced– Force Switch Trib PPS AU4 AGG W/E– Clear Force PPS AU4 AGG W/E
N.B. When forcing internal / line loopback the signal is also transmitted in the normal direction.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
260
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 188. AS & C – Remote Control
Figure 189. AS & C – Remote Control Selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
261
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 190. AS & C – Remote Control, Confirmation
Figure 191. AS & C – Remote Control results
TRIBUTARY AGGREGATE
Line Internal
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Line
Figure 192. Meaning of the loopback command
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
262
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.7 Maintenance Memory Application
4.7.1 Description
The Maintenance Memory function allows to access information on the occurrence or clearing of EVENTSon the NE.
The events that have occurred are stored in the Maintenance Memory by the NE.
The maintenance memory is structured into blocks. Each block is associated to an entity defined insidethe NE, and each entity is associated to a set of events that will be stored in the entity block.
The entity can be grouped in the Group entity. The following Group Entity and associated entity aredefined in the NE.
Specifically:
• Line External alarms 1 and 2 log
The maintenance memory associated to these entities contains the occurrences or clearing ofthe external alarms of the units equipped in the Line Shelf.The external alarms are grouped according to card slot number inside the Line equipment:1=slots 2 to 13; 2=slots 17 to 23.
• Drop External alarms 1 and 2 log
The maintenance memory associated to these entities contains the occurrences or clearing ofthe external alarms of the units equipped in the Drop Shelf.The external alarms are grouped according to card slot number inside the Shelf equipment:1=slots 1 to 9; 2=slots 11 to 14.
• Line Internal alarms log
The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of theinternal alarms of the units equipped in the Line Shelf.The internal alarms are grouped according to card type.Moreover the internal alarms log comprises:
– Line Equipment alarms
• Drop Internal alarms log
The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of theinternal alarms of the units equipped in the Drop Shelf.The internal alarms are grouped according to card type.Moreover the internal alarms log comprises:
– Drop Equipment alarms
• Internal alarms log
The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of thefollowing alarms:
– housekeeping indications– Equipment synthesis alarms
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
263
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Line Performance Monitoring log
In this block the Line Shelf stores the following type of events:
– Threshold Cross and Unavailable Time(TCA Threshold to set in Equipment Configuration).
Drop Performance Monitoring log
In this block the Drop Shelf stores the following type of events:
– Threshold Cross and Unavailable Time(TCA Threshold to set in Equipment Configuration and Terminal Points to activate inPerformance Monitoring application).
• Software Faults
In the block associated to this entity the NE stores the following type of event:
– defective functions supplied by the software platform. The faults are detected by theEquipment Controller’s firmware.
• User Command
In the block associated to this entity the NE stores the following type of event:
– manual commands requests issued by the user
– Software downloading commands and information
– Security operations (login, logout, change password).
• Upload Log
In the block associated to this entity, the NE stores the Following type of events:
– events during the upload of Local or Routing Table configuration.This can happen only during Equipment Controller substitution with a spare, when OS(TMN) is connected.The relevant unit setting must be executed (see Maintenance Section).
• OFA log
The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of thealarms pertaining to the external OFA connected to the NE (OFA Booster internal / externalalarm ; OFA Preamplifier internal / external alarm)
• APS log
In the block associated to this entity, the NE stores the automatic switching.
As for the Entity and the Group Entity also the Events are associated in Group Event.Since the association between Group Event and Group Entity is not automatic, the operator mustassociate them in appropriate way, otherwise the obtained information could be incoherent.Information on the proper selections are presented in next paragraphs.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
264
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The Maintenance Memory application can be activated by executing the following selections:
• the option ”Application Choice” from the main menu. This selection displays the list ofapplications available.
• the option ”Maintenance Memory” from the list of applications available.
Upon selecting the Maintenance Memory option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 193. ):
• File
• Receive
• Clear
• Help
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described maintenance menu.General information on the Maintenance Memory product is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
The ”Receive”, ”File” and ”Clear” options are detailed in the paragraphs that follow.The ”Help” option displays the description of each Maintenance command.
Figure 193. Maintenance Memory
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
265
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.7.2 Receive Option
The receive option reads the Maintenance Memory data stored inside the N.E.When the Receive command is selected the following choice is displayed ( see Figure 194. ):
• display – It permits to select and display data
• save as – It permits to create the files containing the displayed data
Figure 194. Maintenance Memory – Receive Option
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
266
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.7.2.1 Display
Upon selecting this option a new Dialogue Box is displayed (see Figure 195. on page 267).By means of the Dialog Box a selection criteria is entered on the Maintenance data to be displayed.
The user can choose the Maintenance data by entering the following selections:
• the Group Entity; by clicking on the associated box the user selects the Group Entity from alist containing the following items:
– All in this case all the Group Entities are selected;
– Drop External Alarms 1;
– Drop External Alarms 2;
– Drop Internal Alarms;
– Drop PM Log
– Internal Alarms;
– Line External Alarms 1;
– Line External Alarms 2;
– Line Internal Alarms;
– OFA log
– Line PM Log
– Software Faults;
– Upload Log;
– User Command;
• the entity; by clicking on the associated box, the user selects the Entity from a list containingthe following item:
– All; in this case all the entities of the chosen Group Entity are selected;
– the entities of the chosen Group Entity.
The Group Entity consisting of several entities are:
� Line external alarm 1, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 2 to 13
� Line external alarm 2, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 17 to 23.
� Drop external alarm 1, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 1 to 9
� Drop external alarm 2, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 11 to 14.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
267
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• the Group event; by clicking on the associated box the user selects the Group events from alist containing the item of Table 13. on page 272. The cited table lists the Group Entities to whichthey are related.Since the association between Group Event and Group Entity is not automatic, the operatormust associate them in appropriate way.
• the Event; by clicking on the associated box, the user selects the Event from a list containingthe following item:
– All; in this case all the events of the chosen Group Event are selected;
– the events of the chosen Group Event
The most significant Group Events are indicated in Table 14. on page 275.
the choice to display the data stored from the first to the last
or grouped in entity
• the Beginning date and time and the End date and time; all the events chosen between thesetwo dates are displayed.
Figure 195. Maintenance Memory – Display selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
268
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Example
After having chosen the Line Ext Alarms 1 Group Entity (see Figure 196. ) one of the displayed entities(see Figure 197. on page 269) can be selected.
After having chosen the 140M Switch Trib Int Alarms Group Event (see Figure 198. on page 269), one ofthe displayed events (see Figure 199. on page 270) can be selected.
Figure 200. on page 270 displays the selected events received from the NE after that the user hasexecuted the Display of Receive Command. To do this, he must click on the OK rectangle.
For each selected event the application displays:
• Group Event name
• Group Entity name
• Entity name
• occurrence (Begin) ”>” symbol on the left of the event row / clearing (End) ”<” of the event
• event date
• event name
Figure 196. Maintenance Memory – Group entity selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
269
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 197. Maintenance Memory – Entity selection
Figure 198. Maintenance Memory – Group event selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
270
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 199. Maintenance Memory – Event selection
Figure 200. Maintenance Memory – Display
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
271
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.7.2.2 Save as
Through this choice is created a file containing the Maintenance Memory data displayed.The files are created with the ”EVT” extension ( see Figure 201. ).In order to clear the screen click the box in the upper right corner ef the window.
Figure 201. Maintenance Memory – Save File
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
272
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 13. Group Event List and relevant Group Entity
GROUP EVENT RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY
140M Switch. Trib Ext al. Line External
140M Switch. Trib Int al. Line Internal
2Mb Trib Ext alarms External
2Mb Trib Int alarms Internal
34/2 and 5 x 2M T. Ext al Line External
34/2 and 5 x 2M T. Int al Line Internal
34Mb / 45Mb Trib Ext alarms Line External
34Mb / 45Mb Trib Int alarms Line Internal
ADM 600 IF Ext alarms Drop External
ADM 600 IF Int alarms Drop Internal
ALL All
AUX/EOW Ext alarms Line External
AUX/EOW Int alarms Line Internal
CRU Ext alarms Line External
CRU Int alarms Line Internal
Drop – UAT Drop PM Log
Drop – 15M TCA Drop PM Log
Drop – DAY TCA Drop PM Log
Drop – Equipment alarms Drop Internal
EI. (electrical) HVC Trib. Ext al Line External
EI. (electrical) HVC Trib. Int al Line Internal
Fault Log Software fault
MATRIX Ext alarms Line External
MATRIX Int alarms Line Internal
MATRIX AU4 PSE Line External
Housekeeping Ind Internal (NB.1)
Line – 15M TCA Line PM Log
Line – DAY TCA Line PM Log
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
273
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
GROUP EVENT RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY
Line – UAT Line PM Log
Line – Equipment alarms Line Internal
MATRIX : LOP TU12 / TU3 Line External
MATRIX : Prot Switch Event Line External
MATRIX : RX TU12 / TU3 AIS Line External
MATRIX : Unavailable Path TU12/TU3 Line External
OFA Booster Ext/Int alarms Line External
OFA Preamble Ext/Int alarms Line External
OH Interface Unit Ext. alarms Drop External (not operative)
OH Interface Unit Int. alarms Drop Internal (not operative)
Op (optical) LVC STM1 Trib. Ext al Line External
Op (optical) LVC STM1 Trib. Int al Line Internal
Opt HVC Trib. Ext al Line External
Opt HVC Trib. Int al Line Internal
Security User command (NB.2)
Serializer OFA Int alarms Line Internal
STM16 Agg. Ext alarms Line External
STM16 Agg. Int alarms Line Internal
STM16 Agg. AU4 PSE Line External
STM1–E Module Drop Internal
STM4 Agg. Ext al. Line External
STM4 Agg. Int al. Line Internal
SW DL User Command (NB.3)
Switch Unit Int alarms Line Internal
Synthesis alarms Internal (NB.4)
Upload Upload (NB.5)
User Log User Command (NB.6)
NB.1 – Housekeeping indications memory due to typical station alarms (Environment 1 to 8)
NB.2 – Login, logout, change password on Administrative Application.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
274
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
GROUP EVENT RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY
NB.3 – Messages indicating failure, ended operations ect. in software downloading operations (for Factory use.)
NB.4 – Equipment synthesis indications memory, always present at the top of the screens.
NB.5 – Start/End/Aborted upload events, during Equipment Controller substitution with a spare, if OS(TMN) is connected. Referred only to Local and Routing Table configuration.
NB.6 – Commands in Remote Control operation (Restart, EPS/APS command, etc.)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
275
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 14. Events details
����� ��� 2Mb Trib. Int. alarms
��� �
���� ����
���� �������� Typical unit alarm indications ( e.g. 21 x 2Mb/s
���� ������ Trib. unit).
���� �� �������
������� ��������
����� ��� MATRIX: Prot Switch Event����� ���
���
MATRIX: Prot Switch Event
� ���� ��&'�( � ����� �� ���� ����������� �
��� ���� � � �!��" ��
���� ��&'�( � ����� �� ���� ���������������� �� ���������� ���� � � �!��" ��
����#
�
#
��� ���� � � �!��" �� ���#
������� " � �!��"������#������#
��� ���� � � � !����#��� ���� � � � !����#
��� ���� � � � !����#��� ���� � � � !����#
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
��� ���� " $ " !����#��� ���� " $ " !����#
��� ���� � % " !����#��� ���� � % " !����#
��� ���� � % " !����#��� ���� � % " !����#
��� ���� " % " !����#
����� ��� Drop Equipment alarms
��� �
��� � ���� �)����� ������ ����� �� �� *�+,-��.��,�� �� /.0� �1� 2
��� � ����
2�� 3��4 �����
5����6 ������ ���� & ������
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
276
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
����� ��� Line Equipment alarms
��� �
��� � ����
��� � ����
��� " ���� �)����� ������ ����� �� �� *�+,-��.��,�� �� +,� �1� 2
���� ����
5����6 ���-3��4
Threshold Cross
�������3� ���
���� ������ ���
.-��� *�� ������ �� �� ����� ������ 7,����4&��38���47 9���� � �� ����� '+�: �� �� ������6�����
*,� ������ ������; � �� ,�; �� �� ����� ���� � ����*���� ,� !��; � �� ����; � �� �����'+�: �� �� ����� �6����� �� ����� 7,�8���47#
0� *�� +������� 0� �������
0� ���� +�������
������ 0�� �9����
������ 5��4 �9����
������ 0�� �9����
������ 5��4 �9����
����� ��� Security
��� �
��� 0< 0������ �����
��� 2��� 0������ �����
����� 0< ������������ ���������� ��������
���� �������� 0< ������������ ���������� ��������
���� �������� 2��� ������������ ���������� ��������
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
277
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
����� ��� Synthesis alarms
��� �
1���4��� +�
���� ������ +�������� ����� �� �� �=,�1��+� �����
,�� ���� ������ �� ����6� �� �� ��� �� �� ���
����� .����� ���
�3����� ��������
����� ��3�
+������� ������
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
278
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.7.3 File option
Upon selecting the ”File” option ( see Figure 202. ) the following choices are displayed:
• Open• Delete• Print
Figure 202. Maintenance Memory – File option
Open
This choice permits to access the Maintenance Memory files list and select the file required from it( see Figure 203. ).By pressing OK the stored data of that file is displayed
Figure 203. Maintenance Memory – Open File
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
279
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Delete
This choice permits to delete the current files specified in the list shown in Figure 204. By pressing OK a request is made to acknowledge the operation ( see Figure 205. ).
Figure 204. Maintenance Memory – Delete File
Figure 205. Maintenance Memory – Acknowledge Delete
This selection permits to Print the Maintenance Memory data. NOT operative.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
280
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.7.4 Clear option
The Clear command cancels all the Maintenance Memory. When selecting this option the screen ofFigure 206. is displayed. The ”global” option permits to clear the whole memory. The ”selective optionsallows to clear one of the selected ”entities”. When selecting the global option the screen of Figure 207. onpage 281 is displayed. By clicking key YES clearing is executed and the screen of Figure 208. on page281 will appear.
If the ”selective” command is selected, the screen of Figure 209. on page 281 is displayed allowing todelete a specific ”entity” from an ”entity group” . After having selected the memory area to delete click andselect one of the entity groups and entity fields. Click on the OK key to execute the clearing.
Figure 206. Maintenance Memory – Clear Option
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
281
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 207. Maintenance Memory – Clear acknowledge
Figure 208. Maintenance Memory – Clear OK
Figure 209. Maintenance Memory – Selective clear selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
282
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.8 G784 Performance Monitoring Application
4.8.1 Description
The Performance Monitoring application (P.M.) is used to check the quality of the links on sections andPath (tributary and aggregate ).This is mainly useful to help for in service operation and routing maintenance.
According to the G.826 rec., a Block is defined as a set of consecutive bits associated with a path.The number of bits within each block depends on the bit rate of the path.
An Errored Block (EB) is defined as a block in which one or more bits are in error.
A Severely Errored Second (SES) is defined as a one second period which contains � 30% erroredblocks or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP).
An SDP is a short time period lasting at least 1 ms or four contiguous blocks , whatever is large, duringwhich the path is not usable.For example , a path would be considered unusable if a loss of signal occurs or if all the contiguous blocksare affected by high bit error ratio (BER) e.g > 10–2 . It is not required to verify this BER by an actualin–service or out–service measurement.
Table 15. and Table 16. show the thresholds values for SES for the VC paths and for the Section types.
Those values are fixed. If the number of errored blocks exceeds the thresholds given, i.e. the given BERis reached and overcomed ( � ) then the BE counter stops and the SES counter starts.
Table 15. Thresholds for SES for path types
SDH Path type Monitored byte Thresholds for SES( � 30 %)
BER
VC4 B3 2400 1.59x10–5
VC3 B3 2400 4.9x10–5
VC12 BIP–2 600 2.67x10–4
Table 16. Thresholds for SES for sections types
SDH Section type Monitored byte Thresholds for SES( � 30 %)
BER
STM–16 RS B1 2400 0.96x10–6
STM–16 MS B2 38400 1.54x10–5
STM–4 RS B1 2400 3.85x10–6
STM–4 MS B2 9600 1.54x10–5
STM–1 RS B1 2400 1.54x10–5
STM–1 MS B2 2400 1.54x10–5
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
283
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The Performance Monitoring (P.M.) function allows to:
• enable/disable performance monitoring counters for one network element (NE) supporting theG.784 and the following:
– G.821 (not operative)
– G.826
• Each NE supports N–th terminal points (TP) classified as:
– For the G.821
• Synchronous multiplex section (SMS),
– For the G.826
• TTP (Trial Termination Points)
– Synchronous path sink (SPS),
– Synchronous path bidirectional (SPB)
– Synchronous multiplex section (SMS),
– Synchronous element regeneration section (SERS)
• CTP (Connection Termination Points)
– Synchronous multiplex section adaptation (MSA)
– Synchronous path sink (SPS), drop side,
Each TP has also a hierarchical level:
– STM–16– STM–4– STM–1– VC4– VC3– VC12
• display PM information. Two cumulative test periods are suggested for each TP: 15min and 1day. In the first case, synchronization is carried out at a 00, 15, 30 and 45 min. interval; in thesecond case at 12 pm.
• store PM information into a file
• print PM information
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
284
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The PM function can be activated by selecting the following options:
• ”Application Choice” from the main menu.This selection displays the list of applications that are available.
• ”G.784 Performance Monitoring” from the list of applications that are available
After these selections a menu is displayed ( Figure 210. ) indicating the following options:
– File– View– Mode– Configure– Help
These selections are described in the next paragraph.
A small triangle appears on the same line of the above menu, click on it to display overall user productdata.
ATTENTION
When no Terminal Point (TP) has been enabled to the P.M. functions, the screens of the cells areblack.To obtain the normal screen you should have done the Equipment and the Connectionconfigurations as described in para. 4.5 on page 71 and enabled the terminal points T.P. asdescribed in following .
N.B. In case of upgrading from 1651SM to 1661SM–C the ”TP Sink” related to thePassthroughs will be removed from the TP selection list. It is necessary a restart of theEquipment Controller.
Figure 210. G.784 Performance Monitoring
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
285
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
In order to enable the T.P. operations must be executed according to the options detailed below and inthe following order:
• Through option MODE choose the TPs to be enabled or not by means of the START/STOPselections.
• Through option MODE choose whether to display in periods of days or quarters of an hour
• Through the CONFIGURATION option select the thresholds of the single TPs’ counters.Displayed data (color or symbols) depends on these counters and thresholds.
• Through option VIEW choose to display only the faulty TPs or all the TPs among those that havebeen enabled.
• Through option MODE proceed to automatically or manually verify:
– in automatic mode the results are displayed on the screen;
– in manual mode the results are obtained by entering command READ. They can bedeleted through command CLEAR.
• If necessary, store in a file or print through option FILE.
ATTENTION : if the G.784 P.M. application is already active, when enable a new TP, created by achange in Equipment and Connection Configuration, it is previously necessary to activate it, entering the READ command
The structure of the main P.M. screen is explained in the following (see Figure 211. on page 286):
• The top row shows the date (on the left) and the cumulative periods expressed either in days(D0 to D31) or in quarters of an hour (99 max.). D0 stands for the current day.
• On the first column, at the left, are indicated the names of the 5 TPs to display. Only 5 TPs canbe displayed at the same time, and to see the one above or below move the cursor up and downaccordingly.
• The TP counters are synthesized within a fixed period in cells 27 to 66. For example, cell 66synthesizes TP ”VC4 TTP sink Trib–2” counter values on D7. It is called ”synthesis of countervalues” because each TP is provided with different counters which have their own value. Thelatter is associated to a monitor.
By clicking on one of the TPs (cells on the left) the screen of Figure 212. on page 287 can bedisplayed (second level). The latter details the relevant counters.
Click on ”time” to display the value of the counters (Figure 213. on page 287, third level).
After having displayed Figure 212. on page 287 and Figure 213. on page 287
click on and on ”close” to return to the previous figure.
Note that each cell shows the worst synthesis of the counters involved.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
286
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• Cells 1 to 5 show the worst–case synthesis time (latest) of the first cell displayed on the left.Each cell refers to the relevant TP (same row).
• Cells 6 to 10 show the worst–case synthesis of the ”least current” times of the last cell displayedon the right.Each cell refers to the relevant TP (same row).
• Cells 11 to 18 show the worst–case synthesis of all the TP’s above the 5 displayed in the sametime interval (same column).
• Cells 19 to 26 show the worst–case synthesis of all the TP’s under the 5 displayed in the sametime interval (same column).
Alarm SyntesisView Bell Application_Choice..... History Help
1651 SM EF DF AT UG NG HI IN AC TC AE DC LC
G.784 Performance Monitoring 1651SM – Manual
File View Mode Configure Help14/03/95
Above : 9
msTTPsink
vc4TTPsink 4 AGGE
Under : 2
D – 0 D – 1 D – 2 D – 3 D – 5D – 4 D – 6 D – 7
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
27 28 – – – – – 34
35 – – – – 40 – 42
43 – – – – – – 50
51 – – – – – – 58
59 – – – – – – 66
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
TRSTm1–2
vc4TTPsink 2 AGGW
vc4TTPsink 4 AGGW
vc4TTPsink TRIB–2
Figure 211. G784 Performance Monitoring. Screen interpretation
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
287
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 212. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s synthesis
Figure 213. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s value
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
288
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
After having activated the Performance Monitoring screens, each screen assumes a color (or backgroundmotif if the screen is monochromatic) in relation to the measurement result.
Table 17. lists the possible results; an example of the result is shown in Figure 214.
No colour or symbol can be displayed unless an operative command has been entered (Read in Manualmode or Automatic mode).
Table 17. Relationship between colours (motifs) and measurement result.
No measurement
No error
Loss of data
Under the low level
Between low and high level
Above the high level
Light blue
Green
White
Magenta
Yellow
Red
Measurement results Square
Color Motif
ÍÍÍÍÀÀÀÀÁÁÁÁ
Figure 214. G784 Performance Monitoring Example of result (Quarter)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
289
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.8.2 File option
This option ( see Figure 215. ) allows the user to:
• save error counters in a file• print error counter values
Figure 215. G784 Performance Monitoring. File option
Save
This choice ( see Figure 216. ) allows to save counter values, of currently started TP’s, in a file.A dialog box asks to enter a filename to save data. The files are created with the .CNT extension.
Figure 216. G784 Performance Monitoring. Save File
This choice allows to print error counter values. A dialog box allows to stop printing when in progress.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
290
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.8.3 View option
This option ( see Figure 217. ) allows the user to:
• display all selected TP’s (ALL option)
• display only error affected selected TP’s (error option).
Figure 217. G784 Performance Monitoring. View option
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
291
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.8.4 Mode option
This option allows to display the following list of commands ( Figure 218. on page 292):
• Auto• Manual
• Day• Quarter
• Start• Clear
• Stop• Read
AUTO
Through this command the counter AUTOMATIC read mode is selected. Data is immediately displayedand updated on the screen every 15 minutes.The commands CLEAR and READ are not enabled.
MANUAL
Through the manual mode all the commands must be activated by an operator. The READ command ismanually entered to display and read–out the relative counters’ data.The command READ will be described in the following. The values will be updated only after that the READcommand has been entered again. Previously stored data is also displayed.
DAY
This command allows to select the data displayed and gathered in a one day period.The date appears at the top left of the screen (as in Figure 210. on page 284 ).Data detected over a 31 (30 days plus the current one) days period max. ( in automatic mode) is displayed,when the Craft Terminal is connected; on the contrary without the CT, only two days before the current oneare recorded on the Equipment Controller and displayed when the CT will be reconnected again to theNE.
AUTOMATIC Column D0 displays data inherent to the current day with automaticupdating every 15 days (the data is updated at 12 p.m.). Columns D1 to D31 display dataaccumulated, inherent to the previous 30 days plus the current one. At midnight, D0 will containdata of the new day up to the last quarter of an hour, while what present before midnight is storedin D1. This is also applicable for data in D1 to D30.
MANUAL Column D0 displays data prior to 12 p.m. up to the execution of theMANUAL option through command READ. Data stored two days before is also received fromthe NE and displayed in columns D1 and D2.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
292
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
QUARTER
This command allows to select data displayed and gathered over a one quarter of an hour period (asin Figure 214. on page 288). These 15mins. periods are displayed at the top of the screen. A max. of 97quarters of an hour (24 hours = 96 quarters of an hour plus the current one) , in automatic mode, can bedisplayed when a CT is connected to the NE. Otherwise with the CT not connected, we will have only 16periods of 15 mins recorded (four hours) plus the current one.
AUTOMATIC The data of the last full 15 mins. is displayed (in the cell on the leftassociated with the first quarter of an hour). Data is updated every 15 minutes and the valueof the previously stored quarter of an hour moves to the right. If it takes longer to verify, several”15mins. periods” values will be present.
MANUAL The first quarter of an hour on the left refers to the value present whileexecuting the MANUAL option through command READ. The cells on the right contain the dataof the previously stored 16 quarters (15mins. periods) also received from the NE
With regard DAY and QUARTER, click on to move to the first and last time periods .
By clicking on you move one day or one quarter of an hour ahead. In this manner data
detected at different periods of the day (s) or quarter (s) is displayed.In the AUTOMATIC mode data is updated even if accessing the MANUAL mode. It can be interruptedby signing off the application only.
Figure 218. G784 Performance Monitoring. Mode option
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
293
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Start
This command displays a dialog box with a list of currently stopped (disabled) TP’s, to allow the user toselect the termination points to start–on (enabled). See Figure 219. Following ”Start” execution thecurrently started TP’s are displayed on the list (left side of the main screen).P.M. data on the TP’s is obtained only if activated by the N.E. (e.g., must be equipped, connected, etc.).
Stop
This command displays a dialog box with a list of currently started (enabled) TP’s, to allow the user to selectthe termination points to be stopped (disabled). The screen is similar as that of Figure 219. Following”Stop” execution the currently started TP’s are displayed on the list (left side of the main screen).
Read
This command is available in manual mode only. It allows to read counters on selected TP’s.The new values of the counters are displayed after executing the Read command.
Clear
This command allows to clear selected TP counters inside the NE (MANUAL MODE ONLY) After ”Clear”selection the currently started TP’s are displayed. The counters of the selected TP’s are cleared.
Figure 219. G784 Performance Monitoring. TP selection (start, stop)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
294
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.8.5 Configure option
It allows the configuration of performance data display, collected by the different kinds of foreseen TPson the basis of programmable thresholds.The following can be selected ( Figure 220. on page 297 ):
• Plesio Path (not operative)
• Plesio Line (not operative)
• Wdm fec sink (not operative)
• G.821 (not operative : the shown windows contain not faithfully data).
• G.826
Selecting G.826 another window will be opened showing the possible types of monitoring (seeFigure 221. on page298 )
Each NE supports N–th terminal points (TP) classified as:
• TTP (Trial Terminal Points)
– Synchronous path sink (SPS)
– Synchronous path bidirectional (SPB)
– Synchronous multiplex section (SMS)
– Synchronous element regeneration section (SERS)
• CTP (connection termination points)
– Synchronous multiplexer section adaptation (MSA)
The dialog box for each option allows the user to configure TPs by entering new criteria threshold valuesassociated to each counter.
Two threshold values are provided:
• LOW
• HIGH
Colours stated in Table 17. on page 288 concern this selection.
Synch path sink
This command allows to change the two counters’ thresholds for synchronous path sink (seeFigure 223. on page 298 ).
Calculation is made on BIP8 of VC4 (B3) or VC3 (B3) or BIP2 of VC12 (V5)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
295
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The counters provided are:
• BBE – Background block error Calculation is made on BIP8 of VC4 (B3)
• ES – Errored second
• SES – Severely errored secondsCalculation is made on AU AIS, AU LOP, BER over the SES threshold and Signal Labelmismatch only when the path is terminated
• C SES – Not Operative
• UAS – Unavailability seconds
Synch path bid
This command allows to change the two counter’s thresholds for synchronous path bidirectional.Calculation is made on the same BIP of the SPS, this time on both side of the path.
The counters provided are:
BBE – Background Block Error Calculation is made on BIP8 of VC4 (B3)
ES – Errored Second
SES – Severely Errored SecondCalculation is made on AU AIS, AU LOP, BER over the SES threshold and Signal Labelmismatch only when the path is terminated
BBE FE – Background Block Error on FAR END equipmentCalculation is made on AU REI
ES FE – Errored Second on FAR END equipment
SES FE – Severely Errored Second on FAR END equipmentCalculation is made on AU RDI and BER over the SES threshold
UAS BIDI – Sum of Unavailability Second on both the direction of the path (NEAR and FAR ENDequipment)
Synch mux sect (for g.826)
To set the thresholds of the Synch. Mux. Sect according to the G.826 recommendation, the menu G.821> Synch. Mux. Sect must be opened. The meanings of the counters are intended according to G.826.
This command allows to change the two counters’ thresholds for synchronous multiplex section.Calculation is made on BIP24 (STM1), 4x24 (STM4) and 16 x 24 (STM16) of byte B2 on both side of thesection.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
296
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The counters are provided are:
• ER – is intended as Background Block ErrorCalculation is made on BIP24 (STM1) and 16 x 24 (STM16) of byte B2 of the section.
• ES – Errored second
• SES – Severely errored secondsCalculation is made on MS AIS and BER over the SES threshold
• CSES–Not operative
• UAS – Unavailability seconds
• BBE FE – Background Block Error on FAR END equipmentCalculation is made on MS REI
• ES FE – Errored Second an FAR END equipment
• SES FE – Severely Errored Second on FAR END equipmentCalculation is made on MS RDI and BER over the SES threshold
• CSES PE – Not Operative
• UAS FE – Unavailability Second on FAR END equipment
Synch Elem Reg Sect
This command allows to change the two counter’s thresholds for Synchronous Element RegenerationSection.Calculation (first five counters) is made only on BIP8 of the STM4 and STM16 (byte B1 of the aggregates).OOFS is counted on all STM1 / STM4 / STM16.
The counters provided are:
• BBE – Background block error
• ES – Errored second
• SES – Severely errored secondsCalculation is made on LOS, LOF and BER over the SES threshold
• C SES – Not Operative
• UAS – Unavailability seconds
• OOFS – Out Of Frame Seconds – Counted on A1–A2 bytes
Synch Mult Sect Adapt
This command allows to change all the two counter’s thresholds for Synchronous Multiplex SectionAdaptation.Calculation is made on AUOH justification.
The counter provided is:
• PJ – Pointer justification (positive and negative)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
297
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
VALUES TO ASSIGNE ON THE LOW AND HIGH THRESHOLDS:
– An example of correct values to assigne,for STM1 level and QUARTER period is:
LOW HIGH
• BBE 58 (�10–9 ) 5790 (�10–7 )
• ES 50 150
• SES 15 60
• UAS 15 60
• PJ 1000 20000
For STM4, BBE values must be multiplexed by 4.
For STM16, BBE values must be multiplexed by 16.
For DAY period multiplex by 4 and by 24.
Figure 220. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Configure option
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
298
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 221. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options
Figure 222. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options–Synch. Mux. Sect
Figure 223. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Changing error criteria, SPS.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
299
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.8.6 Termination point description
The TP’s for each type of unit, as regards to type and hierarchical level are described in the followingtables. The ”type” and ”hierarchical level” indications are displayed at the top of the day and quarters ofan hour indications ( see Figure 212. on page 287 ).
The SPS fe and SPB TPs are enabled only in case of bidirectional path.
In case of bidirectional paths :
– for SPB TPs only the DAY counters are enabled . A bidirectional path is declared in UAT if either oneor both directions are in UAT , i.e there is only one counter for both directions.
– for SPS fe TPs, 15 M and DAY counters are enabled. The state of UAT is evaluated separately forne TP and fe TP, i.e. two counters are present.
Table 18. STM16 Aggregate
TP’s NAME TP’s TYPE Hierarchical level
ms TTP bid AGG E/W Synch mux sect (SMS) STM16 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink AGG E/W Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM16 ( RSOH )
vc4 TTP sink n AGG E/W NB1, NB2.
Synch path sect (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
au4 CTP n AGG E/W NB1, NB3
Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM16 ( AUOH )
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals.
NB2: For pass–through connections, VC4 ”n” is the number selected in Equip. Configuration;for other connections (drop/insert,cross–connection,drop) there are ”n” VC4 for ”n” signals(max 8).
NB3: ”n” is the number of the AU4 selected in the Equipment configuration application.
Table 19. STM4 Aggregate
TP’s NAME TP’s TYPE Hierarchical level
ms TTP bid AGGE/W A/B Synch mux sect (SMS) STM4 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink AGGE/W A/B Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM4 ( RSOH )
vc4 TTP sink n AGGE/W A/BNB1, NB2
Synch path sect (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
au4 CTP n AGGE/W A/BNB1, NB3
Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM4 ( AUOH )
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals. Not active for Spare Aggregate.
NB2: there are ”n” VC4 for ”n” connections (max 4).
NB3: ”n” is the number of the au4 selected in the Equipment configuration application.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
300
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 20. Optical HVC STM–1 Tributary and Electrical STM–1 Switch Tributary
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level
ms TTP bid TRIB n Synch mux sect (SMS) STM1 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink TRIB n Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM1 ( RSOH ).Only OOFS is operative
vc4 TTP sink TRIB n NB1 Synch path sink (SPS)Insert side
VC4 ( POH )
vc4 CTP sour TRIB n NB1 Synch path sink (SPS)Drop side
VC4 ( POH )
au4 CTP TRIB n – NB1 Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals and with configuration different from Cross Connection
Note : n is the tributary number 1 to 8.
Table 21. Optical LVC STM–1 Tributary
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level
ms TTP sink TRIB n Synch mux sect (SMS) STM1 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink TRIB n Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM1 ( RSOH ).Only OOFS is operative
vc4 TTP sink TRIB n NB1 Synch path sink (SPS)Insert side
VC4 ( POH )
au4 CTP TRIB n NB1 Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals and with configuration different from Cross Connection
Note : n is the tributary number 1 to 8.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
301
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 22. APS 1+1 Spare. All STM1 Tributaries (NB1)
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level
ms TTP sink TRIB n Synch mux sect (SMS) STM1 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink TRIB n Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM1 ( RSOH ).Only OOFS is operative
NB1; for EPS spare TP’s are not enabled.
Note : n is the tributary number 1 to 8.
Table 23. Tributary 140Mb/s
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level
vc4 TTP bid TRIB n – NB1 Synch path synch (SPB) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink fe TRIB n – NB1 Synch path synch (SPB) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink ne TRIB n – NB1 Synch path sink (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
NB1: active when configurated as Drop or Unidirectional Cross Connection.
Note : n is the tributary number 1 to 8.
Table 24. Tributary 3x34 Mb/s and 3x45 Mb/s– DVB
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level
vc3 TTP bid m TRIB n – NB1 Synch path bidir (SPB) VC3 ( POH )
vc3 TTP sinc ne m TRIB n– NB2 Synch path sink (SPS) VC3 ( POH )
vc3 TTP sinc fe m TRIB n Synch path sink (SPS) VC3 (POH)
Note : m is the port number ; n is the tributary number.
NB1: active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Bidirectional Cross Connection
NB2: active when configurated as Drop or Unidirectional Cross Connection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
302
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 25. Tributary 21x 2 Mb/s, 34/2 & 5Mb/s
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level
vc12 TTP bid m TRIB n – NB1 Synch path bidir (SPB) VC12 ( POH )
vc12 TTP sink ne m TRIB n– NB2 Synch path sink (SPS) VC12 ( POH )
vc12 TTP sink fe m TRIB n – NB2 Synch path sink (SPS) VC12 (POH)
Note : m is the port number; n is the tributary number.
NB1: active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Bidirectional Cross Connection
NB2: active when configurated as Drop or Unidirectional Cross Connection
Table 26. Matrix (NB1)
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level
vc4 TTP bid n AGG E/W NB2 Synch path bidir (SPB) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink ne n AGG E/W NB3 Synch path bidir (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink fe n AGG E/W NB3 Synch path bidir (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP source n AGG E/WNB3
Synch path sect (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP bid TRIB n NB2 Synch path bidir (SPB) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink ne TRIB n NB4 Synch path sink (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink fe TRIB n NB4 Synch path sink (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
au4 CTP n AGGE/W Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM4/16 ( AUOH )
au4 CTP TRIB n Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1: TP’s active only for STRUCTURED signals
NB2: active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Bidirectional Cross Connection
NB3: active when configurated as Drop
NB4: active when configurated as Insert
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
303
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9 Software Download Application
This application permits to update the equipment SW (ESCT and Card Controllers) from the CraftTerminal. Download is executed during regular equipment operation (in–service) and consists of thefollowing phases:
• SW download
• SW download activation
The Software Download procedure is activated by clicking on the ”Software Download” label in the”Application choice” ( see Figure 224. ).
Figure 225. on page 304 shows the first screen of the software download menu; by clicking on itFigure 226. on page 304 will appear. The latter represents a window with the following alternatives:
• SW downloading: Configuration and execution of the Software Downloading
• Software: Information on the SW loaded in the NE. Activate the downloaded SW on the NEshould if not already selected.
• Server Identification: This allows to select the equipment Craft Terminal as ”Server”.
The chosen window and the screen selected from it are shown in the flow–chart of Figure 227. on page305. The figure shows how to reach some ”informative” screens from different start options.This information can also be useful in the description that follows.
Figure 224. Software Download selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
304
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 225. Software Download main screen
Figure 226. Software Download Menu
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
305
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MENU
SWDOWNLOADING SOFTWARE
SERVERIDENTIFICATION
DOWNLOADPROGRESS
DOWNLOAD SWINFORMATION
SWMANAGEMENT
SWFUNCTIONALITIES
SWDOWNLOADING
SWMANAGEMENT
SWFUNCTIONALITIES
IDENTIFICATION ACTIVATION
ACTIVATECOMMITTED
UNCOMMITTEDD.L.
EXECUTE
DOWNLOADPROGRESS
SWINFORMATION
DESCRIPTORFILE
PROGRAM EXECUTION
CHOICE OPTIONS
SCREENS
SERVER SW
Figure 227. Download flow chart
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
306
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9.1 SW downloading
Figure 228. on page 307 is obtained by clicking on the ”SW Download” label on Figure 226. on page 304,and shows two alternatives:
• Download: to execute and check the DL activity
• Download progress: to follow the continuation of DL already running
Figure 229. on page 307 will appear by clicking on the ”Download” label indicated in Figure 228. on page307, and show the following fields:
• NE identification
• Download attributes
• SW package selection
• NE type
The identification field name and type are automatically received by the NE from the equipment.
By clicking next to the relative label on the ”Download Attribute” field, the following commands must beinserted:
• Code present: it must be always set.
• Implicit activation: if set, the NE will automatically activate the new SW after successfuldownload. If not set, the NE will store the new SW (uncommitted) without activating it (theequipment works with the previous SW).
• The activation of the new SW can be made in a second time, (”Software” and ”SWManagement” option) as described further on.
• Forced Download: it causes current equipment SW download on all the units including the unitsthat have been previously updated.If not activated, only the units of a previous release will be downloaded.
The NE type field displays (default) the name of the equipment with its Release number (e.g.: ”1651SM25”) . This one must be replaced with the ” 1651SM ” indication. The following field will appear:
SW package selection indicating all equipment SW packages available, i.e., those that have been installedon the Craft Terminal.
N.B. To prevent possible errors all DOWNLOAD and ACTIVATION operations of new SWversion, must be performed when the MAIN card of all EPS and all the MAIN side of SNCPconfigurations are ACTIVES.
N.B. The Backward Download or Backward Activation of SW versions, must be done only withUNIT congruent with those SW Versions, otherwise the Equipment and ConnectionConfigurations will be erased and therefor they have to be sent again.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
307
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 228. SW Downloading choice
Figure 229. SW Downloading
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
308
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
By clicking on the requested software package, the ”Download” command will be available at the bottomleft of the screen.Press the Download button to delete the confirmation window, and display the ”Download Progress”window ( see Figure 230. ).
The number and percentage of files loaded are indicated along with the download operation in progress.A message will indicate that download is terminated.To interrupt the dowloading procedure select ”Abort”. Confirmation screens will be presented to theoperator. By selecting the ”Close” key, Figure 225. on page 304 will be displayed again.
The ”Download Progress” screen can also be accessed by clicking on the ”Download Progress” option(Figure 228. on page 307) if download is running.
The operator can access to the ”SW Package Information” (see para. ”Software information” on page 309)and the ”Server Identification functions” (see para. ”Server Identification” on page 315 ) as specified inFigure 229. on page 307The ”SW Package Information” can also be accessed from ”Download progress” (Figure 230. on page308).
Figure 230. Download in Progress
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
309
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9.1.1 Software information
Figure 231. can be accessed through different screens. The following fields are displayed:
• NE identification• Committed/Uncommitted SW Package• Detailed SW information
The ”NE identification” field states the NE’s name and type received from the equipment.The ”Committed SW Package” and ”Uncommitted SW Package” fields are the two memory banks. Onebank contains the active equipment software while the other may contain eventual previous SW version.(e.g. enabled but not active).
The SW status is specified by the following parameters:
• Enabled: a cross (X) indicates that the SW package has been loaded and can be activated• Active: a cross (X) indicates that the SW package is active and that the equipment is operating
with the software indicated• Under download indicates that the relevant SW package is being downloaded (transitory
status).
The ”Detailed SW information” field gives the following information:
• Committed package, if selected, permits to display the ”Descriptor File” of the active equipmentmemory bank.
• Uncommitted package if selected,permits to display the ”Descriptor File” of the memory bankavailable for another SW version.
The lower side of the ”Detailed SW Information” field can be displayed by entering the ”Descriptor File”key ( see para. ”Descriptor file” on page 310 ).
By selecting the ”Cancel” key the initial screens are re–presented ( Figure 231. )
Figure 231. SW Information
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
310
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9.1.2 Descriptor file
This function is used to obtain information on the SW package that has been loaded on the NetworkElement and the SW units contained in Figure 232. shows both the Committed and Uncommitted softwarepackages. Table 27. explains the meaning of symbols and acronyms.
Figure 232. Description File
Table 27. Descriptor file
DESCRIPTOR FILESW PACKAGE : 1651 SM REL.2.4.8
– Software package name
– Software package release version: V.2.4.8
– Alcatel Identifier: ALCATEL ID
– Network equipment type: 1651 SM
– Software unit decimal number: 1 ––> 208 The following definition list is given for each SW unit:
– BSUD # : ASCII string where # may mean 1 ––> 208
– Software unit name: AUX C01 EXE (ex.)
– Software unit release version: V.2.8.1 (ex.)
– Alcatel Identifier: ALCA AUX (ex.)
– Software unit type: S (specific format value)
– Binary format name: IEFE 695 (Std)
– File length: 66656 (ex.)
– List of type of compatible cards: ”*” character
– Processor unit identifier: PU AUX (ex.)
– ESUD# string: ASCII string where # may mean 1 ––> 208
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
311
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9.2 Software
Figure 233. indicates the chosen window related to this function:
• SW Information (Figure 231. on page 309 is displayed)
• SW Management (see para. ”SW Management” on page 312 )
• SW functionalities (see para ”SW functionalities” on page 314 )
Figure 233. Software menù
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
312
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9.2.1 SW Management
This function is accessed by the ”SW management” option of the ”Software download” menu(Figure 233. on page 311). It is used to activate the software packages (loaded on the NE) through thewindow of Figure 234. on page 313 showing the following fields:
– NE identification (NE name and type received from the equipment), .
– ”Committed SW package” along with its status (Enabled, Active, Under down load). Indicates the SWcontained in the main memory bank.
– ”Uncommitted SW package” along with their status (Enabled, Active, Under download). Indicates theSW contained in the main memory bank. In this case it cannot be ”active”.
The SW contained can be:
• A new downloaded SW, but without ”implicit activation”.• The previous SW after a new Software Download.
– In the ”ACTIONS” field only the ”ACTIVATE” command can be accessed. This command permitsto display the screen of Figure 235. on page 313.
The ”Commit” and ”Revert Back” commands are not enabled; command ”CANCELL” permits to return tothe selection labels on the main menu (Figure 225. on page 304).
By clicking on the ”SW package information” label at the bottom of this screen ”SW information” (para.”Software information” on page 309) is also displayed on it.
The SW package indicated in the ”SW Package selection” field (which may be ”Committed orUncommitted package”) is activated through the window shown in Figure 235. on page 313.
On the Uncommitted Package bank is stored a spare SW. With this screen is possible to activate it. In thiscase the previously ”Committed” (enabled) becomes ”Uncommitted”. passing on the spare bank.
It will be possible activate it again (always by means the SW activation screen) without repeat the completeSW Download Procedure.
The ”Activation Attribute” field is not enabled.Click on the ”Cancell” key to display Figure 234. on page 313 again. Click on ”Activate” an intermediatescreen appears informing that the connection between NE and OS is likely to be interrupted.By clicking on the ”OK” key a further message is displayed indicating ”Activation in progress” i.e., themessage indicates that activation has been successfully completed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
313
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 234. SW Management
Figure 235. SW Activation
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
314
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9.2.2 SW functionalities
The SW functions that can be used in the current SW DL version are those distinguished by a cross (X)in the list of Figure 236. , i.e.:
• Forced download: selection of complete download or just units to update
• SW package descriptor: list of the SW package contents supplied to the operator
• Code present: always to be selected
• Implicit activation: automatic activation at the end of download or new SW storing only, toactivate in future operations (SW Management).
• 2 memory banks: management of both memory banks
Figure 236. SW functionalities
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
315
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.9.2.3 Server Identification
This function is used to select the type of NE Server (see Figure 237. )
The operator must always select: ECT.
The Network address field can be selected if ” Server on OS for QB3* NEs” or ” Server on OS for TCP/IPNE’s” is implemented in the local management.
Figure 237. Server identification
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
316
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.10 Remote Inventory Application
This paragraph is mainly subdivided in two parts:
– the first part sequencely lists the operating procedure to access to the Remote Inventory applicationdata (see para. 4.10.1 on page 316 )
– the second part presents the detailed description of the Craft Terminal windows available in thisapplication (see para. 4.10.2 on page 317 )
4.10.1 Remote Inventory operating sequences
This procedure describes how to access to the Remote Inventory application data.
This application is entered after the following operations:
– Start–up the craft terminal management software activating the NECTAS icon of the ALCATELgroup in Program Manager of WINDOW (for detail see para. 4 on page 361)
– Access the craft terminal with the displayed ”login” window (for detail see chapter 4.2 on page 50)
– From the OPTIONS bar, in the ”Alarm Synthesis” window which appears, after selection of therequired equipment, click on Application_Choice and then on Remote Inventory application.
To access the inventory data proceed as follows:
1 ) In the Remote Inventory window select the RECEIVE option and click the left mouse–button.
2 ) The Receive menu will appear. Select the DISPLAY option and click the left mouse–button.
3 ) The DISPLAY SELECTION window will appear. At this point the operator can select the accessto the required data as indicated at para. 4.10.2.1 on page 319.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
317
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.10.2 Remote Inventory detailed description
Through this application it is displayed the data inserted in the unit’s Remote Inventory.In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification, construction data ect.Data is displayed in specific fields:
• CompanyIt indicates the Company’s (Alcatel’s branch) which design the unit.Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation’s meaning (four characters).
• Unit TypeIt indicates the units’ acronym
• Unit Part NumberIt indicates Alcatel or Factory product’s Part No.. The number indicated is that printed on thelabels or on the units’ front coverplates.
• Serial NumberIt indicates the product’s serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm.
• Software Part NumberIt indicates the id. of the unit’s resident software
• CLEI CodeIt indicates the CLEI (Common Language Equipment Identification) code according toBellecore specs. TR–ISD–325
• Manufacturing plantIt indicates the Company’s manufacturing plant id. within the company, producing the unit.Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation’s meaning (four characters).
• Date identifierIt indicates the meaning of the date that follow.It is a two–digit code supplying the following information:
00 date of construction at the time of final testing01 production order data02 construction date of the unit lot03 date product has been forwarded to customer04 customer order date
• Date (YYMMDD)The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. When onlythe year is displayed, the format must be ”YY– – – – ”
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
318
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The Remote Inventory Application can be activated by selecting:
• the option ”Application choice” from the main menu. This selection displays the list of theapplication available.
• the option ”Remote Inventory” from the list of the application available
When selecting the Remote Inventory option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 238. ):
• file
• receive
• help
A small triangle ( ∇ ) is displayed on the same line of the Remote Inventory menu and , if clicked, general information is displayed on the Remote Inventory product.
The ”Receive” and ”File” options are detailed in the paragraphs that follow.The ”Help” option details each Remote Inventory command.
Figure 238. Remote inventory
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
319
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.10.2.1 Receive Option
The Receive option reads the Remote Inventory data stored in the unit. When the Receive command isselected the following choice is displayed (see Figure 239. )
• display – to select and display data
• save as – to create the files containing the displayed data
Figure 239. Remote inventory – Receive option
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
320
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.10.2.1.1 Display
When selecting this option, a new Dialogue box is displayed (see Figure 240. ).Use is made of the dialogue box to enter a selection criteria on the remote inventory data to be displayed.The user can choose the Remote Inventory data by entering the following selection:
First block – Last block
To display a range of units remote inventory, first select them through the above fields in which the singleunit #, is named block #.Each unit has its own id. number representing the slot assigned to it inside the mechanical structure ofthe LINE SHELF (from ”0” up to ”25”) for the DROP SHELF (from ”26” up to ”47”).Note that the slot number starts with ”0” while in the AS&C application the slot number starts with ”1”.
If the same number is entered in both blocks, only one unit will be selected. By entering different numbersan operative field will be selected comprising several units.The default values: 0 and 47 select all the unit.
Selection by Number or by Name
The operator can select the unit inventory or by block # or by unit name (i.e. TRIB. 1 relative to the block# 1, DS ADM600 A relative to the block # 33 ).
Further Selection
Within the ”first block–last block” it is possible, through the remaining fields (see definition stated inprevious chpt.), to display only the unit (s) whose data are specified in the fields by the operator (data mustbe already known).This operation is useful if an operating field comprising several units has already been selected.
Figure 240. Remote inventory – Display selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
321
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Once the selection has been completed, if press key ”Cancel” return to the previous screen (seeFigure 239. on page 319 ) thereby cancelling all the selection made.Press key OK to display the screen of Figure 241. This screen reports the data stored on the Remote Inventory of the selected units.The first part of this screen (Display Filtering) concerns the selections made, the rest, besides the blocknumber id. of each unit, reports the following data:
ELEMENT IDENTIFICATION
• Company
• Unit type
• Unit Part Number
• Software Part Number
• CLEI code
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
• Manufacturing plant
• Serial number
• Date
Figure 241. Remote inventory – Display
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
322
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.10.2.1.2 Save as
Files are created through the application with the .rur extension (see Figure 242. )They contain the Remote Inventory data displayed.
Figure 242. Remote inventory – Save file
4.10.2.2 File Option
When selecting the file option (see Figure 243. ) the following choices are displayed:
• open• delete• print
Figure 243. Remote inventory – File option
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
323
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Open
This choice provides access to the Remote Inventory list and allows to select the file required from it(see Figure 244. ) Press OK to display the stored data of the selected file.
Figure 244. Remote Inventory–Open File
Delete
This choice allows to delete the current file specified on the list shown in Figure 245. Press OK to request operation acknowledgement (see Figure 246. )
Figure 245. Remote Inventory–Delete File
Figure 246. Remote Inventory–Delete Acknowledge
PrintThis Option is not available
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
324
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.11 Mediation Function applications
The Mediation Function is present when it is necessary to manage non–SDH equipment by means of Q2interface.
In this paragraph are described both the operating procedure and the detailed description.
To activate the mediation function it is necessary to compile the MF configuration table of the ”Localconfiguration” application as described in para. 4.11.2 on page 327.
The network with Q2 Mediation Function must be created following the description at para 4.12 on page332.
Start–up the craft terminal management software activating the NECTAS icon of the ALCATEL group inProgram Manager of WINDOW (for detail see para. 4 on page 361)
Double click on the second line appearing on the screen an representing the mediation function : it ispossible to access the applications with the login of Figure 247. on page 324, indicating the need for theoperator identifier and password.Then the ”Application Choice ” list of Figure 249. on page 325 appears.
The available applications for the Q2 interface of the SDH equipment, described in the next paragraphsare those reported in Figure 249. on page 325.
For each non–SDH equipment it is available a proper string in the Alarm Synthesis window.Clicking on the equipment name on the string it is possible to access to the relevant Applications.For the Applications description refer to the relevant handbook.
Figure 247. Operator identifier and password
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
325
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 248. Mediation Function selection
Figure 249. Alarm synthesis – Application choice for Mediation Function
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
326
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.11.1 Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application
The Figure 250. represent the alarms, status and control application screen
The screen shows the status of the two Operative Systems (if any) , indicating which one ( the ”OS Main”or the ”OS Spare” ) is managing the Mediation Function of the NE.
At the top of the AS&C screen a label string indicates general alarms information referred to the MediationFunction of the NE. Only the AE and the OS isolation alarms are active .The OS severity is fixed to NG,therefore the AT, UG and IND alarms are meaningless.The alarm meaning is indicated in Table 9. on page 193.
Figure 250. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
327
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.11.2 Mediation Function: local configuration application
This application is used to configure the data necessary to manage the NE with Q2 interface.
The Figure 251. shows the list of the local configuration table.
• OS configuration table
• Local Q2 interface definition
• Slave NE address configuration table
Each of the above table will be detailed in the paragraphs that follows.
Figure 251. Mediation Function: local configuration application list
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
328
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.11.2.1 OS configuration table
The screen of Figure 252. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address.
The OS configuration of the mediation function is independent from the one of the transport equipment,so the addresses of the two OS of the Mediation Function can be different from those of the transport part.Up to 4 OS in total can be present.
• The OS NSAP address is composed by:
– Area address– System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS:
• enable / disable the Automatic Switch – Over
• enable / disable Automatic Switch – Back
The ”switch over” option set at Yes enables the spare OS connection when the main OS is no more active.
If the main OS returns to the active status and the switch back parameter is set to Yes , the dialogue switchto the main OS.
The ”switch over” parameter to no, prevents the spare OS connection in case of OS main connectionfailure.
The ”switch back” option set to no prevents the switch between spare and main OS from being revertive.
It is suggested to insert a different Area Address for the OS if the GOSIP V2 format is used.
Figure 252. Mediation Function: OS configuration table
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
329
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.11.2.2 Local Q2 interface definition
The screen of Figure 253. permits to set the following data for the Mediation Function interface:
• Line Speed: select the value from the list on the right.– For Q2 synchronous intermediate system the the line speed is fixed at 19200 bit/s .– For RQ2 asynchronous intermediate system the line speed is selectable
• Intermediate System: select between Q2 (synchronous ) or RQ2 ( asynchronous ) protocolsdepending on the type of connected Q2 NE.
Figure 253. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
330
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.11.2.3 Slave NE address configuration table
The non–SDH equipment with Q2 interface of the network are selected with the screen of Figure 254.
Figure 254. Mediation Function: NE selection
The total capacity of a single NE ( i.e. maximum number of Q2 elements that a Q2 interface can manage)is :
• physical load : max 32 physical addresses
• logical load : max 128 logical addresses ( 7.1 )
So , to a physical address , can correspond more than one logical address. depending on the type of Q2NE.
Restriction : the memory required to store the alarm retrieved from each Q2 NE is 25 kbyte in total.Therefore , due to the different weight of the various type of Q2 NE, the max number of Q2 NE managedcan be less than 128.
For each non–SDH equipment it is available a proper string in the Alarm Synthesis window.Clicking on the equipment name on the string it is possible to access to the relevant Applications.
N.B. To be able to open a remote session on a Q2 NE , the Craft Terminal SWP of the Q2 NE mustbe installed on the same directory in which NECTAS has been installed.
The table of Figure 255. allows the user to configure the slave NE. The table contains 32 entries, eachof them describing one slave NE. For each entry the user can configure the following information:
• 7.1 Address. The same value of the ”Secondary Address” of the Network configuration (para.4.12 on page 332) must be inserted.
• NE enable.
• Address Q2( physical address ). It is the physical address of the Q2 link (values from 1 to 254)A max of 32 different Q2 addresses can be had
• Mode. Select between ”Standard” or ”Enhanced” protocol.
The sum of the non SDH equipment handled by an ADM (Q2/RQ2 NE connected to the ADM plusQ2/RQ2) can not exceed 128. ( see Restriction above )
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
331
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 255. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table
4.11.3 Mediation Function: administrative application
The Administrative application is used for the station operators management.
It is the same application described at para. 4.4 on page 63 for the NE.
The contents of the Administrative application is shared between the Mediation Function and the NE sothat changes operated in this point modify also the content of the application at para 4.4.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
332
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12 Network Configuration For Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 MediationFunction
This procedure is suitable to create a new network representation if dealing with a Remote Craft Terminal.
The existing networks, if any , created by the operator using previous 1641SM and NECTAS softwarerelease , are compatible with the current equipment and NECTAS releases.
To graphically activate an existing Network :
• NECTAS must be correctly loaded ( see para. 3.2 on page 355. )
• specify the name of the existing local network as NECTAS parameter ( see 4.12.4 on page 343)
4.12.1 Configuration Procedure for Adm Networks Handled By Remote Craft Terminal
By means of the R–ECT/R–EACT software packages it is possible to handle an ADM network of 32 NEsincluding the one considered as master, i.e. the one on which the R–ECT sw is mounted.
The other NEs must support the R–ECT sw but it is not necessary to install this package on them if theNE is not configured as master: it is enough the ECT or EACT sw package .
The following procedure permits to :
• create a graphical representation of the network involved
• configure each NE through the Local Configuration application
Before creating the network representation:
– close NECTAS and NETWORK CONFIGURATION tools if opened.
– in the WIN. ini file section PEX , verify the presence of the string
– NETCFG_RECT=YES
This string should be present if NECTAS ≥3.77 has been properly installed , i.e if the R–ECT functionhas been enabled when installing the management software.
It is mandatory to install NECTAS rel. ≥3.77 with the 1651SM rel. 2.5If the string present is NETCFG_RECT=NO , modify it.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
333
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12.2 How to create the network
One of the following procedures must be performed in order to enable R–ECT function activation:
• creation of a graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels –Figure 256. )
• Creation of a network with NEs names defined but without graphical support (Figure 257. onpage 334 )
• Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and without equipment’s label(Figure 258. on page 334 )
The following figures are examples of the three ways of working .
Figure 256. Graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels )
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
334
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 257. Network with NEs names defined (first column)
Figure 258. Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and equipment’s label
In the first column of Figure 258. the NEs are recalled with their ME address and Secondary address.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
335
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12.3 Basic concepts about mediation function
Before starting the network creation , it is necessary to point out some subjects.
Each NE implementing the mediation function is considered by NECTAS and by the OS as splitted in twoparts :
– a so called ”Transport” that represents the physical equipment .This is the only part of the NE presentwhen there is no mediation function.
– a so called ”Mediation” that represents the equipment part performing the mediation function
The two equipment have the same physical address (i.e. NSAP address) but a different logical address(ie. 7.1 address).
For practical reasons, it should be better to assign to the Mediation equipment the 7.1 address immediatelyfollowing the one assigned to the Transport equipment in increasing numeric order. That is becauseopening the NECTAS tool and choosing the alphanumerical view, adjacent addresses are represented inadjacent lines and so it is easier to distinguish an equipment with both its transport and mediation parts.
The non SDH Alcatel equipment (Q2 devices) eventually interfacing the NE must be declared whilecreating the network.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
336
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12.3.1 Creation of a graphical representation
Before creating the graphical representations , close NECTAS and NETWORK CONFIGURATIONtools if opened.
Two graphical representations are to be created :
• LOCAL
• GLOBAL
4.12.3.1.1 Local Network creation for Mediation NE
The local network is the one that comprises the NE the operator is physically connected to , divided into”transport” and ”mediation” and all the non SDH equipment interfacing the ”mediation” part.
In order to configure the local network perform the following steps :
1 ) with a drawing tool ( for ex. Paintbrush) create a representation of a map or open an existingone ( for ex. a geographical map )
2 ) select (use scissor for selecting in Paintbrush tool) and copy (Edit > Copy menu) itBe careful that , if using Paintbrush , the Option > Omit picture format must be disabled becauseif selected it prevents the map from being exported on the Network Configuration tool.
3 ) save the map if changed and minimize the drawing tool
4 ) open the Network Configurator tool . A pop–up (see Figure 259. ) appears asking if the userintend to use a network with several Mediation Device (ME) . It refers to the possibility of defininga ME number and a Secondary address for the equipment to be located. Answer Yes to thequestion. Select the Network > Create option (see Figure 260. on page 337). The samepop–up appears : answer again Yes and give a name to the network ( see Figure 261. on page337)
Figure 259. Pop–up
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
337
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 260. Network Configuration – Network creation
Figure 261. Network Configuration –Network name
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
338
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
5 ) select the Map > Paste option to place the previous copied map (see Figure 262. )
Figure 262. Network Configuration – map open
6 ) save the map and leave the GENERAL name as specified by default (mandatory for the firstmap, see Figure 263. )
Figure 263. Network Configuration – Save map GENERAL
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
339
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
7 ) The three steps 8 ), 9 ) and 10 ) must be performed in case of NE with active mediation function(i.e. with Q2 NEs connected). If no mediation function is active , perform step 8 ) and thenskip to step 12 ).
8 ) open the Equipment > Create menu and fill it ( see Figure 264. ) for the ”transport” equipment.Note that the secondary address and the ME address must be 0 (mandatory) while the MEaddress must be the 7.1 address of the equipment. The ”title” will appear near the alarmsynthesis row of the NECTAS application. In ”Reference” insert a generic label ( e.x. ADMTXfor transport part or ADMMF for mediation part.) . Click on the create push button to completethe operation.If the local NE does not perform mediation function, i.e if no Q2 equipment are connected to it,it is enough to declare the equipment as a whole with Secondary address 0 and ME numberequal to the 7.1 equipment address.
Figure 264. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Transport
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
340
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
9 ) Open the Equipment > Create menu and fill it for the ”Mediation” equipment ( see Figure 265. ). The Secondary addres must be 0 (mandatory) , while the ME address must be the 7.1mediation equipment logical address .Click on the create push button to complete the operation.
Figure 265. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Mediation
10 ) Define the non SDH equipment interfacing the mediation part. For each Equipment to bedeclared:
Open the Equipment > Create menu again and fill it. (see Figure 266. ) .The ME numbermust be the one given to the ”Mediation” part while the secondary address is the 7.1address (logical address) of the non SDH equipment ( from 1 to 254)
Figure 266. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Q2 devices
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
341
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
11 ) Repeat steps 8 ) , 9 ), 10 ) for each NE to be configured . This is intended for NEs with mediationfunction and Q2 NE managed. If a NE does not have the Mediation function, only step 8 ) hasto be performed.
12 ) For each equipment to be located :move the cursor in the point where to locate the equipment , click on the left mouse keyand select the Locate Equipment option ( see Figure 267. ).Select the localize option (Figure 268. ) A label with the NE name and NE status appears(Figure 269. on page 342) .To delete the label , in case of need, click on the left mouse key and perform the DELETEoption.
Figure 267. Network Configuration – Locate Equipment
Figure 268. Network Configuration – Equipment Location
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
342
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 269. Network Configuration –Label
13 ) Close the Network Configuration tool : the network is automatically saved (see Figure 270. )
Figure 270. Network configuration – save and close
If the local NE does not perform mediation function, i.e if no Q2 equipment are connected to it, it is enoughto declare the equipment as a whole with Secondary address 0 and ME number 0.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
343
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12.3.1.2 Global network creation
1 ) In order to create a global Network (the one that can be seen when the R–ECT is active) followsthe steps from 1 ) to 13 ) described in para. 4.12.3.1.1 on page 336. Note that a new networkwith a new name has to be created.The following equipment must be located by the operator as previously described :– the local equipment (transport , mediation) and its non SDH equipment defined in the
LOCAL network except that the transport equipment must have Secondary address 0 andME number equal to the 7.1 NE address instead of 0 as in the LOCAL network.
– all the equipment building the network and the related non SDH equipment connected.
For each equipment with non SDH equipment connected , the ”transport” , the ”mediation” andall the Q2 devices are to be declared.
2 ) Add the following string in the ”PEX” Section of the ”Win.ini” file:
NETWORK_RF = <name_of_global__network>
4.12.4 NECTAS activation
Only in case of graphical representation of the network :
– Select the NECTAS icon of the ALCATEL group and choose the File > Property option from theProgram Manager and add to the command line the name of the local network (see Figure 271. onpage 343).
Figure 271. Nectas activation on local network
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
344
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12.4.1 Definition of the NEs names without graphical representation of the network
The operator may not be interested on a graphical representation of the network with a background mapand located equipment but may be interested on giving to the NEs a title to be shown in the synthesisline.
In order to do that open the NETWORK CONFIGURATION tool, define a network and create theEquipment as described in points 1 ), 4 ) , 8 ), 9 ),10 ) at para. 4.12.3.1.1 on page 4.12.3.1.1336.for thethe local network.
Perform the same steps for the global network creation . The equipment to be declared are those specifiedat para.4.12.3.1.2 point 1 ) .
Add the following string in the ”PEX” Section of the ”Win.ini” file:
NETWORK_RF = <name_of_global__network>
4.12.4.2 Remote craft terminal option without a graphical support and without equipment’slabel
The operator may be interested on having neither a graphical representation of the network nor namelabels for the Equipment. In this case it is enough to :
• open the Network configurator tool• assign a name to a fictitious network• close the Network configurator• Add the following string in the ”PEX” Section of the ”Win.ini” file:
NETWORK_RF = <name_of_global__network>
This is the shortest procedure to enable R–ECT function .
N.B. To make effective the operations made on para. 4.12.3.1 and on para. 4.12.4.2 it is necessaryto close the Nectas session eventually open and start again.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
345
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12.5 Configuration of the Network Elements
When a network is configured for the first time, it is necessary to connect the CT to each NE of the network,open the NECTAS tool and perform :
– a LOCAL configuration (LOCAL choice of the Local configuration application)
– a LAPD or ETHERNET configuration as specified at para. 4.5.5 on page 178.
– a MF configuration ( if the Equipment performs mediation functions)
– a R–ECT configuration ( If the Equipment acts as MASTER) .
The MF and R–ECT configurations can be performed locally or by the OS. The LAPD and the LOCALconfiguration must be performed locally for the first time .
By means of the ”Local Configuration application” each NE of the network is configured.The ” 7.1 address ” must be the same that has been used in the graphical representation ( if present) .
By means of LAPD (or ETHERNET ) configuration configure the connection among the NEs that will beused for data exchange.
For each equipment acting as Mediation device, the mediation configuration (MF configuration) has tobe performed in order to activate the Mediation function. The 7.1 address must be compliant with the onedefined while building up the graphical network. Suggestion given at para. 4.12.3 on page 335 is stronglyrecommanded.
When the MF has been enabled, a second line appears on the NECTAS main screen if working inalphanumeric way ( or a second label if working in graphical way) representing the Mediation part.
By clicking twice on the new line, perform a zoom session on the Mediation part and digit the login andpassword.
Perform a local configuration on the MEDIATION FUNCTION menu by selecting :
– a local Q2 interface definition
– a slave NE address
The local Q2 interface configuration table is used to define the Q2 type and speed.
The slave NE table is used to define the linked Q2 elements. The slave NE number must be compliantto the Secondary address defined while building the network and is the logical address ( 7.1) of the nonSDH device. The Q2 address is the non SDH device physical address.
Both addresses can range from 1 to 254.
Refer to para 4.5 on page 71 and para. 4.11 on page 324 for details on local configurations and on MFapplication.
In the R–ECT configuration the operator has to declare all the accessible remote NE in order to collectthe synthesis information and to perform a zoom from R–ECT.
For each remote NE insert the NSAP and the ” 7.1 address ”. Move with the ”next” button to completeaddressing.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
346
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
If the remote equipment performs mediation functions, two R–ECT configuration entries has to becompiled : one for the Transport part and one for the Mediation part. In this case the 7.1 address of thetwo parts must be different and given accordingly to the values stated both in the local configuration ofthe remote NE and while building up the graphical network.The other fields are identical for both parts.
After having completed the configurations , to activate the remote function select the View > Networkmenu of the Nectas application. To deactivate use the View > Subnetwork Equipment option.The graphical representation appears ( if present ) by default when NECTAS is activated. Use the viewmenu to switch to the alpha mode. This last is the default one if the operator has not a graphical description.
Double click on the name of a remote NE (both in alpha and graphical mode) to directly open a zoomsession on the chosen equipment (either ADM or non SDH).
The alpha mode may also be used if a graphical representation of the network is present. In this case theNEs labels appears near the alarm synthesis row . Switching between the two modes is enabled by meansof the View option.
The local ECT operator is not aware of the fact that some R–ECT operator is connected to theNE and cannot inhibit the access from remote.
The R–ECT function does not support the software download of the remote elements.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
347
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.12.6 Time Management
The time setting for the CTs is carried out by the Control Panel application ”International” (Figure 272. onpage 348) and ” Data Time” of Windows ( Figure 273. on page 348). Be careful that the setting format forDATE is:
• MM/DD/YY
and for TIME is
• HH:MM:SS
The Time manager distributes the time to all the NEs and to the CT eventually connected.
In OS presence , the OS acts as time manager .
In absence of OS ,the R–ECT function acts as a time manager through the MASTER element.
In case of more than one R–ECT active , the time manager will be the one connected to the Master withlowest 7.1 address.
To have a correct time management , connect the PC to each NE and do the following :
1 ) In the AUTOEXEC.BAT specify the time zone in which the P.C is by inserting the line :
SET TZ= METxwhere ”x” is
0 for Greenwich
from –1 to –12 for east
from +1 to +12 for west
The” –” and ”+” signs are mandatory.
The line must be inserted before the win command ( i.e. before opening windows)
2 ) In the WIN.INI file insert the following line in the [PEX] section :
CT_TIME=CLIENT
If the line CT_TIME=MANAGER is already present, substitute it.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
348
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 272. Windows – International
Figure 273. Windows – Date and Time
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
349
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
COMMISSIONING
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
350
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
351
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1 INTRODUCTION
The commissioning procedures consist of the following steps:
• Start–up of the PC and check on the Window system.
• Installation of the SWP Craft Terminal applicative software
• Start–up of the SWP Craft Terminal applicative software
The ” SWP Craft Terminal ” denomination is referred to all type of management software(ECT / EACT / R–ECT /R–EACT).
The installation and start–up referred to download applicatives are described in the GENERALPROCEDURES section.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
352
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
353
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2 START–UP OF THE PC
2.1 Scope of the procedure
The scope of this procedure is to illustrate the start–up phases of the Personal Computer and the checksmade on the Windows System.
2.2 Start–up
The PC is started up through the relative switch. At this point the operator views the DOS system’s prompt.If dealing with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 the operator views the DOS system’s prompt or the applicativeWINDOWS if the WIN command is included in the Windows startup–files.
If dealing with WINDOWS 95 or 98 at the PC start–up the operator views directly the applicative software.
2.3 Check on the windows system
2.3.1 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11
The operator must carry out the following operations in the given sequence in order to check that theWINDOWS system has been installed properly.
1 ) Type WIN command and press ENTER key
2 ) The WINDOWS mask with relevant release version will appear. If it is 3.1 or greater the systemis ready to be installed.
3 ) Close the WINDOWS system by clicking the left mouse–button on the FILE option and byselecting the EXIT WINDOWS option from the displayed menu.
4 ) If the WINDOWS system is lower than 3.1 the operator must install WINDOWS MICROSOFTof a version equal to or greater than 3.1. following the constructors instructions.
2.3.2 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 95 or 98
The WINDOWS 95 or 98 application starts automatically when switching on the PC if the software hasbeen correctly loaded.
N.B. It is suggested not to have installed the two applicative software WINDOWS 3.1 ( or 3.11) andWINDOWS 95 (or 98) on the same PC.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
354
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
355
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3 INSTALLATION OF THE ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL” APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE
3.1 Purpose of the procedure
The procedure describes how to install the applicative software during initial turn–on.
The diskette also contains all the general applications utilized to execute all the checking operations (Bytetransmission, alarm synthesis) on the equipment.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Installation with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11
This installation set is composed of the following diskettes:
• the first group of 3 diskettes contains the NECTAS (Rel. 3.77) applicative (CIT ALCATELcopyright)
• second group of 2 diskettes (number 4 and 5) contains the ECT or R–ECT managementapplicative of the equipment. For the EACT or R–EACT management applicative the relevantSW Package is distributed on 5 diskettes (numbered 4 to 8).
If NECTAS Rel. 3.77 (or higher) has already been installed in the same directory where the operatorintends to install the SWP KIT, skip to step 10 ) on page 356
To install the software in a correct mode, execute the following operations:
1 ) Insert diskette 1 into the disk unit (example A).
2 ) Open the File Manager.
3 ) Click on ”A” (example) on File Manager to access the disk unit containing the diskette.
4 ) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file.
5 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipmentmanagement software will be loaded.The default directory is C : \ ALCATEL. The following two select keys are available:
• ”CONTINUE”: permits to continue the installation procedure.
• ”CANCEL”: permits to cancel the selection made.
Click the left mouse–button on the CONTINUE key.
6 ) A windows is displayed where is possible select the language of the installation and the port(COM1 or COM2). Cross the R–ECT selection to enable the R–ECT function if needed. Confirmthe selection. The label ” Multiple Performance Monitoring ” is referred to a function notoperative and the relevant small box must not be crossed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
356
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
7 ) When the files of diskette 1 have been all copied the user is requested to insert diskette 2.Remove diskette 1 from the driver and proceed to insert diskette 2. Click OK with the leftmouse–button to confirm.Repeat for diskette 3.
8 ) At the end of the operation an acknowledge message is given
9 ) If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedurewill have to be repeated over again.The NECTAS icon is automatically presented in the Alcatel group by deleting all icons that mighthave been previously created in the same group.If the deleted icon applicative are needed again, launch the application either from the DOSambient or create new icons through Windows.NOTE : NECTAS overwrites the previously installed NECTAS version if any.
10 ) Insert diskette 4 into the disk unit to install the ECT SWP (or EACT SWP)
11 ) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file
12 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating two different selections:
• 1651SM – To install the NE applications• 1651MF20 – To install the Q2 Mediation Function applications, when non–SDH
equipment have to be managed
Click on ”1651SM” for example.
13 ) A window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment management softwarewill be loaded.The default directory is C : ALCATEL. The following two select keys are available:
• ”CONTINUE”: permits to continue the installation procedure.• ”CANCEL”: permits to cancel the selection made.
Click the left mouse–button on the CONTINUE key.
ATTENTION The directory must be the same of the previously installed ”NECTAS” (diskettes 1 to 3).
14 ) When all the files of diskette 4 have been copied the user is requested to insert in sequencediskette 5. Click OK with the left mouse–button to confirm.With EACT–R EACT the diskettes are 4 to 6 numbered.
15 ) In this way the system copies the files of all diskettes. At the end of the operation a message(INSTALLATION COMPLETED), together with the OK key, will appear on the window.Position the cursor on the key and click the left mouse–button.(If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedurewill have to be repeated over again).To complete the Remote Craft Terminal configuration will be necessary create the network asfor para. 4.12 on page 332.
16 ) It is suggested to install, the management applicatives of several equipments (or more softwarereleases of the same equipment) on the same ”ALCATEL” directory.When connecting the equipment proper the relevant software will be automatically selected(after start–up execution).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
357
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
17 ) When the Mediation Function is needed on the NE to manage non–SDH equipment (Q2interface) it is necessary to repeat the installation from diskette number 4.
In this case click on 1651MF20.
Select the same directory of the previous installation and terminate the installation of the otherdiskettes.To complete the Mediation Function configuration will be necessary create the network as forpara. 4.12 on page 332
18 ) Some parameters must be set for the selected port. After having selected in sequential order:Main Program Manager → Control Panel → Ports, select the required port.
The following are the parameters to set:
Bit rate 9600
Data bits 8
Parity odd
Stop bits 1
Flow Control None
19 ) The operator can contemporaneously work with three applications . To have more applicationsproceed as follows:
• select File Manager of Main
• for Your safety , create a backup copy of the WIN.INI system file of WINDOWS
• select WIN. INI of WINDOWS
• Search the ”PEX” key–word
• Under PEX type:
APPLICATIONS=number of applications wanted.
20 ) At this point the applicative software is ready to be activated (see ”Chapter 4. START–UP OFTHE APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE ”SWP ECT 1651 SM”” on page 361).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
358
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3.2.2 Installation with WINDOWS 95 or 98
If dealing with WINDOWS 95 just notice that the ”File Manager” is called ”Windows Explorer” and toactivate it the command to execute is :
Start > Programs > Windows Explorer
The installation set consists of five diskettes:
– The first group of 3 diskettes contains the NECTAS applicative (CIT Alcatel Copyright)
– the second group of two diskettes (numbered 4 and 5) for the SW KIT without EACT or five diskettes(numbered 4 to 8) for the SW KIT with EACT contains the management applicative of the equipment.
If NECTAS Rel. 3.77 (or higher) has already been installed in the same directory where the operatorintends to install the SWP KIT, skip to step 11 ) on page 358
To install the software in a correct mode, execute the following operations:
1 ) Insert diskette 1 into disk unit A (ex.).
2 ) Open the Windows Explorer tool
3 ) Select the driver ”A” from the Windows Explorer to access the disk unit containing the diskette.
4 ) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file.
5 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipmentmanagement software will be loaded.The default directory is C : ALCATEL.
6 ) A window is displayed where it is possible to select the installation’s language and the portCOM1, COM2 . Cross the R–ECT selection to enable the R–ECT function if needed. Confirmthe default selection.
7 ) In this way the WINDOWS system copies the files on the hard disk indicating the percentageof files copied.
8 ) Insert the diskettes 2, 3 in the required order.
9 ) At the end of the operation an acknowledge message is given.
10 ) If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedurewill have to be repeated over again.The NECTAS icon is generated.
11 ) Insert diskette 4 into the disk unit in order to install the ECT ( or EACT) SWP.
12 ) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file
13 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipmentmanagement software will be loaded. The default directory is C : ALCATEL.
ATTENTION – The directory must be as that of the previously installed NECTAS (diskette 1,2, 3).
14 ) Insert the following diskettes in the required order ( 4, 5 for ECT/RECT, 4 to 8 withEACT/REACT).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
359
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
15 ) In this way the system copies the files of all the diskettes. At the end of the operation anacknowledge message is given.If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedurewill have to be repeated over again.
16 ) It is suggested to install the management applicative of several equipment (or more SWversions of the same equipment) on the same Alcatel directory.When connecting the equipment the relevant SW will be automatically selected (after start–upexecution).
17 ) Some parameters must be set for the selected port. To access the table to be compiled activatethe menu in the given order :
My computer > Control Panel > System > Device Manager > Portsand then select the choosen port. It must be the same declared while installing NECTAS.
The following are the parameters to set:
Bit rate 9600
Data bits 8
Parity odd
Stop bits 1
Flow control None
18 ) The operator can work with three applications at the same time. To have more applicationsproceed as follows:
• select File Manager of Main
• select WIN. INI of WINDOWS
• Scroll till [PEX]
• Under PEX type:
APPLICATIONS=number of applications wanted.
19 ) At this point the applicative software is ready to be activated (see ”Chapter 4. START–UP OFTHE APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE ”SWP ECT 1651 SM”” on page 361).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
360
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
361
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4 START–UP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE
4.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes the start–up phases of the applicative software.
4.2 Start–up
4.2.1 Start–up with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 installed
After having started the PC the operator must proceed as follows to activate the software system:
• To connect WINDOWS, type WIN
• Click twice on Program Manager. The screen of Figure 274. will present the icons of the”ALCATEL” group.The NECTAS icon must be used to start the application, clicking twice on it .
• The screen with identifier and password request will appear.
The ”Network Configuration” icon is used in case of R–ECT or R–EACT management softwareIt permits to setup the network, addressing the NEs reachable in Remote way.
The software system can be also connected from DOS prompt, through commands:
CD ALCATEL
WIN NECTAS
These commands prevent connecting the WINDOWS system, and directly activates the application.
Figure 274. Icons to start–up from windows
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
362
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.2.2 Start–up with Windows 95 or 98
In order to activate the ALCATEL product , perform the following sequence :
Start > Programs > Alcatel
and activate the NECTAS icon.
It is possible to have the NECTAS icon in the start menu in order to activate it easily.
To do that perform the following sequence :
Start > Setting > Taskbar > Start Menu Programs
Click on the Add push button and select with the browser the nectas.exe file.
Choose then where to put the icon with the pop–up menu.
Refer to WINDOWS manual for details.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
363
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
OPERATION
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
364
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
365
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1 INTRODUCTION
The operating procedures consist of the following steps:
• Network configuration for Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function management
• NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C software configuration
• Display state of the NE
• Modify the configuration files
• Routine procedures
The routine procedures concern:
– backing–up the configuration files, in case of files modification.
– backing–up the stored alarms or history files when the disks are nearly full.
– backing–up the stored G.784 performance monitoring files.
– backing–up the stored inventory data files.
• Software shut–down and restart
The above operations concern the management applicative with all type of Craft terminal applicative.(ECT / EACT / R–ECT / R–EACT).
The operating mode of the download applicatives is described in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
366
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
367
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL AND Q2MEDIATION FUNCTION
2.1 Purpose of the procedure
The procedure in details described in chapter 4.12 on page 332 shows how the R–ECT operator can seta textual or graphical representation of the network in order to reach each NE simply clicking on a relevantlabel and digit a login, in a remote way.The same chapter also present the same procedure for the Q2 Mediation Function, referred to non– SDHequipment.
In this procedure the main settings and also simplified options are reported. These last are useful whenthe operator want to manage the network not by means the graphical mode but only by a textual one.
The procedure consists of 3 alternative steps:
• Graphical representation of the network
– Local network creation
– Global network creation
• Definition of the NEs names without graphical representation of the network
• Remote CT or Mediation Function option without a graphical support and without equipment’slabel
and of a common part:
• Configuration of the network elements
2.2 Graphical representation of the Network
To create a graphical representation of the network apply the following steps:
1 ) draw the map using a drawing tool
The following operations are carried out by means the Network Configuration Tool of Nectas
2 ) paste the previous copied map
3 ) assign a label and a name to the NE as a local element and locate it on the map
4 ) assign a label and a name to all the NEs of the network and locate them on the map
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
368
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.3 Definition of NEs name without Graph. Repres. of the Network
When no graphical representation is needed but however the operator want to give a name to each NEthat will appear in the synthesis strip of the Alarm Synthesis screen, in the R–ECT management functionor Q2 Mediation Function this procedure is applied:.
1 ) activate the Network Configurator Tool and define a local network
2 ) give a name to the network.
3 ) assign a name to the Global network
4 ) close the Nectas section and open it again to make effective the operations made on thisparagraph.
2.4 Remote craft terminal option without Graphical support and withoutequipment’s label
When is needn’t neither a graphical representation of the network nor the name labels for the Equipment.In this case it is enough to :
1 ) open the Network configurator tool
2 ) assign a name to a fictitious network
3 ) Then close the Nectas section and open it again to make effective the operations made on thisparagraph.
2.5 Configuration of the Network elements
1 ) Configure each NE of the network by means of the ”Local Configuration application” .
– configure the connection by means of the ”local configuration” table.
– In the R–ECT configuration declare all the remote NE You can access in order to collectthe synthesis information and to perform a zoom from R–ECT.
– apply the R–ECT configuration if You like to configure the NE You are connected with, asMASTER.
2 ) activate the remote function selecting the View > Network menu of the Nectas application.To disactivate use the View > Subnetwork Equipment option.
NOTE TIME MANAGEMENT
Time setting for the CTs is carried out by the Control Panel applications ”International and Data Time ”ofWindows .The Time manager (that can be the OS or in absence of it the Master NE), distributes the time to all theNEs and to the CT eventually connected. (See para 4.12.6. on page 347 )
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
369
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3 NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
3.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes how to software configure the equipment.
The configuration procedure consists of 4 main branches:
• Equipment configuration: to configure the units inside the NE
• Connection configuration: utilized to configure STM signal mapping
• Local configuration: to configure the addresses utilized to manage the NE’s through the TMNsupervisory network
• Routing Table: to manage the Routing Tables of the NE’s (TMN).
3.2 Configuration
To configure proceed as follows:
1 ) Select the APPLICATION–CHOICE option and click the left mouse–button.
2 ) The application select window will appear. Select the desired Configuration and click the leftmouse–button.Click OK to confirm.After the upload of the configuration of the NE, the window of the selected application will beopened (see ”CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS” on page 71).
3 ) To utilize this application, the operator must be authorized through the operator’s profileassigned with the administrative application.Furthermore, the access with Craft Terminal must be enabled by the Operation System (AElabel green indication in the Alarm Synthesis).
4 ) If the operator is authorized, he must select the FILE Option and then click the leftmouse–button. An options menu will appear (see subpara. Options File under para.”CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS” on page 71).
5 ) Select the OPEN option and click the left mouse–button. The list of all the configuration files willappear.
6 ) Select the file required and click the left mouse–button.Click OK to confirm.At this point the operator obtains the desired configuration, and has the possibility of modifyingand utilizing it as a new configuration.
7 ) Click the option TABLES (with the left mouse–button).A list of all the tables configured for the selected file will appear in a scrolling window.
No configuration file will be present after the applications have been executed the first time.Therefore, if the operator selects the ”Open...” option from the ”File” menu no file will appear.
To create a configuration file the operator must directly select the ”Tables” option, hence hewill be able to access all the configuration tables.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
370
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
8 ) Select the desired table and click the left mouse–button.Click OK to confirm. A window relative to the selected table will be opened.
The operator can proceed in different ways:
• configure in the order specified in the listed tables starting from Equipment Configuration.The given order follows a correct operative function.
• Configure as required.
A detailed description of the tables and various commands are stated in:
”Equipment Configuration Application” on page 82.
”Connection Configuration with Matrix Application” on page 119.
” Drop Shelf Connection Configuration Application”on page 170
”Local Configuration Application” on page 178.
”Routing Table Configuration Application” on page 189.
9 ) Execute the desired configurations and click OK to confirm.
10 ) To execute other configurations repeat the procedure from point 7, if otherwise select the optionFILE and click the left mouse–button.
11 ) Select the option ”SAVE AS”. At this point the configurations can be saved in a new file (byinserting a new name in the window which appears), by keeping the old configuration.Configurations can also be saved in a new file named as the source file (with option ”SAVE”).Click the OK key to confirm.
12 ) The operator must select the disk utilized to store the file.It is also possible to title the created file with a short description.To this purpose set the pointer in the title row and click the left mouse–button. Type the title.It is also possible insert the operator name.
13 ) Click OK to confirm. At this point the configuration has been stored. To send it to the NetworkElement, select the option FILE.
14 ) Select the option SEND in the menu which appears. This option opens a subwindow whichcontains the list of all the configurations.
15 ) Select the new configuration file and confirm with key OK. At this point the configuration is sentto the NE which assumes it.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
371
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4 DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS
4.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes how to display the status of the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C.
The applications utilized are:
• Alarm Status & Control: permits to show the alarms conditions and the actual status of the NE.
• G.784 Performance Monitoring: permits to check the quality of tributary and aggregate links.
4.2 Display alarm status & control
The Alarm Synthesis window appears after having initialized the NECTAS system (see theCommissioning Procedures),
To display the status of the NE, inherent to the A.S. & C. application, the operator must proceed as follows:
1 ) Select the option CHOICE–APPLICATION with the pointer and then click the left mouse–button.
2 ) The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Alarm Status &Remote Controls and then click the left mouse–button.Then click the OK key with the left mouse–button.
3 ) The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the AS&C applicationappears.This window shows:
• the physical structure of the NE with the equipped units;
• the logical display of the equipped units.
The screen rapresent the alarm condition according the Configuration tables downloaded onthe NE.
4 ) A first synthesis of the alarms can be obtained through the slots equipped on each unit of theNE (see para 4.6 ”ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION” on page 192 ).
5 ) If a unit is alarmed, the operator can enter other subwindows to have further information on thetype of alarm.
To this purpose, select the unit to display through the mouse pointer; when the pointer becomesa magnifier glyph, click the left mouse–button. The required information is displayed.
6 ) With regard to some unit and functions, another screen permits to display more detailedinformation. To this purpose the operator must select the box involved with the pointer and clickthe left mouse–button when the magnifier glyph appears.
7 ) The selection of the NE units to display can be also operated through option VIEW in the AS&Cwindow. This option is described in detail at para. ”Options of the AS&C application” on page254.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
372
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.3 Display G.784 performance monitoring
The alarm synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the CommissioningProcedures).
To display the status of the NE inherent to the G.784 P.M. application, the operator must proceed asfollows:
1 ) Select the option CHOICE–APPLICATION with the pointer and then click the left mouse–button.
2 ) The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication PerformanceMonitoring and then click the left mouse–button.Afterwards, click the OK key with the left mouse–button.
3 ) The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the G.784 P.M.application appears.
Select the points to be monitored and how to proceed.
ATTENTION : the point to be monitored for AU4 B3/PJC in the Aggregate, must be selected in the relevant table in Equipment Configuration.
The results of the P.M. tests made at the test points configured during the Configuration Phaseswill be displayed through this window.
4 ) A detailed description of the G.784 P.M. application is given in para. 4.8 ”G.784 PerformanceMonitoring Application” on page 282.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
373
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
5 LOG ACCESS
5.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes how to access logs.
The Alarm Synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the commissioningprocedures).
Logs can be accessed either:
• through the History option, directly with the Alarm Synthesis window, or in the AS & C application
or
• with the Maintenance Memory Application
5.2 History
This paragraph is referred to the alarms stored in the Craft Terminal (about 3000 events)
To access the stored alarms either directly from the Alarm Synthesis Window or after having entered theAS&C application window, the operator must proceed as follows:
1 ) Select the HISTORY option and click the left mouse–button.This option has two other options which permit to either display or print the alarm messages.
2 ) After having selected one of the two options (by clicking the left mouse–button), a subwindowwith a menu appears and the operator can select the messages to display (see para. ”ALARMSYNTHESIS WINDOW” on page 52 and ”ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION” onpage 192). In the latter case, further detailed information is obtained.
3 ) After having selected the option with the left mouse–button, click the OK key with the samebutton.
4 ) If the selected option is ”DISPLAY”, the messages will appear in a scrolling subwindowcontaining the last messages of that type.If the selected option is ”PRINT”, all the messages of that type will be printed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
374
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
5.3 Maintenance memory
The Maintenance Memory function allows to obtain information on the appearance/clearing of eventsoccurring in the NE. The NE stores the events in a Maintenance Memory. The number of stored eventdepends on the type of event.
The Maintenance Memory is structured as a set of blocks. Each block is associated to an entity definedin the NE. Each entity is in turn associated to a set of events that will be stored in the entity block.
The entity can be grouped in the GROUP ENTITY. The Group Entity and associated entity are defined inthe N.E..
The events can be read from the N.E. only following operator request.
To access the Maintenance Memory proceed as follows:
1 ) Select the option APPLICATION–CHOICE with the pointer and then click the left mouse–button.
2 ) The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Maintenance Memoryand then click the left mouse–button.Then click the OK key with the left mouse–button.
3 ) The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the maintenancememory application appears.A detailed description of this window and relevant options is given in para. ”MAINTENANCEMEMORY APPLICATION” on page 262.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
375
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
6 CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFICATION
6.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes how to modify the configuration files.
6.2 How to modify files
The alarm synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the commissioningprocedures),
To modify the configuration files proceed as follows:
1 ) Select the APPLICATION CHOICE option and click the left mouse–button.
2 ) The window to select the application will appear. Select the Configuration to modify, i.e.:
• ������ ����������� ���� *����9 ��
• Drop Shelf connection Configuration or
• Equipment Configuration, or
• Local Configuration, or
• Routing Table
now click the left mouse–button.Click OK to confirm.The window of the selected Configuration application will be opened (see relevant para. i.e.:”Equipment Configuration Application” on page 82.”Connection Configuration with Matrix Application” on page 119.”Drop Shelf Connection Configuration” on page 170”Local Configuration Application” on page 178.”Routing Table Configuration Application” on page 189.
3 ) To utilize the application, the operator must be authorized through the Operator’s profileassigned with the ADMINISTRATIVE application.
Furthermore, the access with Craft Terminal must be enabled by the Operation System (AElabel green indication in the Alarm Synthesis).
4 ) If the operator is authorized, he must select the FILE Option and then click the leftmouse–button. An options menu will appear (see subpara. OPTIONS FILE under para.”CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS” on page 71)
5 ) Select the OPEN option and click the left mouse–button. The list of all the configuration fileswill appear.
6 ) Select the file to modify and click the left mouse–button.Click OK to confirmAt this point the operator obtains the desired configuration.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
376
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
7 ) Click the option TABLES (through the left mouse–button).A list of all the tables configured for the selected file will appear in a scrolling window.
8 ) Select the desired table and click the left mouse–button.Click OK to confirm. A window relative to the selected table will be opened.
9 ) Execute the desired modifications and click OK to confirm (for the table description see relevantparagraphs.)
10 ) To execute other modifications repeat the procedure from point 7, if otherwise select the optionFILE and click the left mouse–button.
11 ) Select the option ”SAVE AS.”. At this point the modifications can be saved in a new file (byinserting a new name in the window which appears), by keeping the old configuration.Modifications can also be saved in a new file named as the source file (with option ”Save”).Click the OK key to confirm.
12 ) The operator must select the disk utilized to store the file.It is also possible to title the created file with a short description. To this purpose set the pointerin the title row and click the left mouse–button.Write the title.It is also possible to insert the operator name.
13 ) Click OK to confirm. At this point the new configuration has been stored. To send it to theNetwork Element, select the option FILE.
14 ) Select the option SEND in the menu which appears. This option opens a subwindow whichcontains the list of all the configurations.
15 ) Select the new configuration file and confirm with key OK. At this point the configuration is sentto the NE which assumes it.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
377
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
7 OPERATING ROUTINE PROCEDURES
7.1 Introduction
The operating routine procedures consist of:
• the configuration files back–up• the stored alarms/events Maintenance Memory files back–up.• the G.784 Performance Monitoring file back–up• the Remote Inventory file back–up
7.1.1 How to back–up files
In order to backup files , the operator have to distinguish between different situations :
a ) The Remote Craft Terminal is deactivated ( active selection ”View –> Subnetwork” on the NectasMain screen menu ) but a local network is present (i.e. Nectas has been activated with the nameof the local network as parameter).The configuration files are located in the directory :
c:\network\<local_network_name>\<equipment_name>
The directories are automatically generated when creating the local network.
b ) The Operator is dealing with a global network i.e. the Remote Craft terminal is activated(selection ”View –> Network” on the Nectas Main screen menu active)The configuration files are located in the directory :
c:\network\<global_network_name>\<equipment_name>
The directories are automatically generated when creating the global network.
c ) No Remote Craft Terminal is active
The default directory for the configuration files is :
c:\alcatel\<equipment_name>
The root directory must be the one declared installing the SWP ( ALCATEL is the default that canbe changed) . The child directory must be the Equipment’s name and release and is automaticallygenerated.
To back–up the configuration files the operator must proceed as follows:
1 ) Select the configuration directory containing the files to back–up.
2 ) Insert the disk into the floppy unit.
3 ) Create on the ”a” disk the same path You have in ”c” . Example:
a:\network\<global_network_name>\<equipment_name>
4 ) Copy the files from the ”c” configuration directory to the directory created in ”a” by entering thecommand:
COPY filename.(file extension) a: \<path>\filename.(file.extension)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
378
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
This command must be repeated for all the files to back–up.
If the operator is dealing with WINDOWS 95 there is an automatic backup procedure that can be activatedby the following commands :
Start > Programs > System Tools > Backup
Refer to WINDOWS 95 manual for details.
7.2 Configuration files back–up
Following are listed the extension of the configuration files concerning the Equipment Configuration,Connection Configuration with Matrix, Local Configuration and Routing Table Configuration Applications.
• B60 – Equipment Configuration• B56 – Connection Configuration with Matrix• B58 – Drop Shelf Connection Configuration• B55 – Local Configuration• B57 – Routing Table Configuration
Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
7.3 Stored alarms and events file back–up
The back–up files for alarms and events stored in the Maintenance Memory have extension .EVT.
Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
7.4 G.784 Performance monitoring file back–up
The back–up files for alarms and events stored in the Performance Monitoring Application haveextension .CNT
Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
7.5 Remote Inventory file back–up
The back–up files for alarms and events stored in the Remote Inventory Application have extension .RUR
Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 377 for operative details.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
379
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
8 Craft Terminal Logout and Login
8.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes the Shut–down and restart operations of the software system.
8.2 Craft Terminal logout
To logout the craft terminal connection the operator must execute the following operations in the givenorder:
1 ) Close all the previously opened application windows using the CLOSE option. The close optioncan be selected from the Windows menu present in each window .
2 ) Select Application choice and, in sequence:
• Administrative
• Operator
• Logout
as for para. 4.4 on page 63 Confirm with the OK key.
3 ) Craft Terminal and NE are now disconnected and the procedure returns to the initial phaseillustrated in 4.2 on page 50.In this way another operator must insert his own pass–word to enter the software applications.
8.3 Craft Terminal login
For the restart operation refer to chapter ”Chapter 4. START–UP OF THE ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL”APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE on page 361.
– Access the craft terminal with the displayed ”login” window (for detail see para. 4.2 on page 50)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
380
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
381
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
MAINTENANCE
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
382
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
383
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1 INTRODUCTION
The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps:
• Maintenance of the PC (see Chpt. 2 on page 383)
• Shut–down and restart of the PC (see Chpt.3 on page 385)
• Corrective Maintenance (Trouble Shooting) see Chpt. 4 on page 387
• Unit Replacement with spare see Chpt. 5 on page 415.
The ” SWP CRAFT TERMINAL” denomination is referred to all types of software management (ECT/EACT/RECT/REACT).
2 PC MAINTENANCE
With regard to PC maintenance, refer to the constructor’s documentation.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
384
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
385
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL
3.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes the Shut–down and restart the PC should the operator not be able to utilize theSWP CRAFT TERMINAL applicative system; ; i.e. if the craft terminal does not work properly or if it is notresponding to the commands of the operator. The procedure is separately presented for Windows 3.1 or3.11 and for Windows 95.
3.1.1 Shut Down with WINDOWS 3.1 (or 3.11)
+� �� ������� �� ���� �����> �� SWP CRAFT TERMINAL ���������� �6��� �� �����6 �� ����
�� �� ����3�; � ���� ������ �� ����-��� �� �� ������ �� ��
1 ) First of all, he must attempt to shut–down the software system (see ”SOFTWARE SHUT–DOWN AND RESTART” on page 385).
2 ) Regardless of whether the system is shut–down or not, he must try to shut–down the WINDOWsystem by selecting the Windows Menu from the Windows Program Manager window.This menu will display a list of the options.Select the option CLOSE . Click on the OK key displayed in the subwindow. This operation dis-connects the operator from the Windows ambient.
3 ) At this point switch the P.C. off. If the operation is unsuccessful, i.e., neither the applicative sy-stem nor the WINDOWS system have been shut–down, switch the P.C. off anyway.
4 ) Switch on the PC again and try to restart the craft terminal system again (see the following para-graph).
3.1.2 Craft terminal shut–down with Windows 95 or 98
In order to shut down the PC execute the command :
Start > Shut down
A windows s displayed. It permits to shut down the computer or restart it or restart in MS–DOS mode.
3.1.3 Craft terminal restart
For the restart operation refer to chapter ”START–UP OF THE PC” on page 353.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
386
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
387
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING)
4.1 Purpose of the procedure
Troubleshooting involves the detection location and correction of failures in the equipment and replacingthe parts that are defective.
4.1.1 Troubleshooting organization
The troubleshooting procedure is carried out through flow–charts. The latter do not deal with the followingaspects:
• faulty electronic alarm indication processing and detection circuits• faulty wiring
The Maintenance organization can have different structures.
The following typologies are considered:
• with a station supervisory center• on site• with a Remote Craft Terminal management center• with a TMN network management center
In the station supervisory center the maintenance technician refers to the remote alarms received fromthe equipment in a centralized office of the station i.e. :
• INT , URG , NURG , IND : remote alarms relative to the type of (internal , urgent , not urgent,indicative)
• TORC, TANC : remote alarms relative to the malfunction of on or two / all power supply units.• TOR , TAND : remote alarms relative to the decrease or loss of one or both station power supply
DC voltages.• TUP : remote alarm relative to the malfunction of the Equipment Controller unit.• Outgoing parallel contact CP0 : remote alarms configured by the customer.
Bisedes detecting the equipment in alarm, it is also possible to detect the type of failure and the relativesource.
With a Remote Craft Terminal management center the operator in one station, connected to a local NEwith the craft terminal (Master), can remotely manage a max of other 31 NE’s, located in different sites.The ”local NE” can be troubleshot with the two previous cited typologies or directly with the craft terminal.
The ”remote NE” are troubleshot with the Craft Terminal.
With a TMN network management center the maintenance technician must refer to the alarms sent to-wards the TMN’s Operations System (see the relevant TMN handbooks).
After having detected the equipment in alarm, the condition is ”attended” through push–buttonon the Equipment Controller unit or through SW command sent by the Craft Terminal or by theOperation System.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
388
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
This condition causes:
• On the racks
– The yellow LED to light up– RED LED to light off
• On the Equipment Controller front cover:
– Yellow LED (ATTD) to light up– RED LED NURG or URG to light off ( available for other alarms).
If both LEDs are on, a first ”Attended ” command attends the NURG and an eventual sec-ond ”Attended” command attends the URG.
LOCAL Maintenance (station supervisory center and ”on site” typologies)
It is essential to observe the condition of the other LEDs on the unit front coverplates, and use the CraftTerminal (PC).
The Equipment Controller unit is provided with LEDs which indicate :
Red LED URG detection of an urgent alarm
Red LED NURG detection of a not urgent alarm
Yellow LED ABN detection of an ”ABNORMAL” operative condition.
Type: active loopbacks, forging the units into service,
force ON or OFF , try to restore after ALS.
Yellow LED IND detection of an indication alarm.
Yellow LED ATTD indicates storing through push–botton URG , NURG.
Green LED only for SMEC
indicates INSERVICE Unit for 1+1 Protection ( not used in thisrelease ).
The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the type of alarm (URG – NURG – IND) and relevantcondition (ABN = abnormal condition , ATTD = storing).
Both the Equipment Controller unit and the other units (except Power Supply unit) are provided with a redLED indicating unit local failure.
The aggregate units and the 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary units are provided with green LED which glowswhen the unit is working. This LED is OFF for Spare only (Not for 1+N spare tributary).
The trouble–shooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flow–charts andaccording to the Maintenance table to the Par. 4.2 on page 392.:
• Figure 275. on page 390 General flow–chart• Figure 276. on page 391 Power supply alarm
And according to the Maintenance table to the Par. 4.2 on page 392.
As indicated in the flow–chart the trouble–shooting operation is facilitated by the Craft Terminal (PC) , andby the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the Equipment Controller.The PC is cord–connected to the relative connector on the Equipment Controller’s front coverplate.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
389
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
The PC using the Alarm Status and Control applications of the craft terminal, provides in a very shorttime, detailed information on the state of the alarms thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removalas indicated in Maintenance tables of Par. 4.2 on page 392. (Meaning of the Alarms)
The Maintenance Memory application allows to browse through the various classified alarms and com-mands previously stored the equipment.
N.B. To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact configu-ration of the equipment (Configuration applications trough P.C.)The presence of one spare unit enables the equipment to operate correctly even following ur-gent alarms (now defined ”not urgent”).In this case the troubleshooting can be esecuted with low traffic condition.
The aim of the flow–charts which follow and maintenance tables is either to locate the faulty unit and toreplace it with a spare as well as to locate an eventual failure along the link.
The flow–chart/tables are based mainly on the probability of a failure, i.e. the aim of the flow–chart is toidentify the unit or the link most likely to have failed.
The flow–charts/tables should be followed even in the case that the cited LEDs flash, because this flashingcondition might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems.
Remote Craft Terminal management
The Master NE, locally connected to the craft terminal, can be troubleshot following the same proceduresof the LOCAL typology, previously described, or can be maintained directly with the Craft Terminal (seepara. 4.2 on page 392).
The Remote NEs will be remotely troubleshot with the Craft Terminal of the Master station following theindications of para. 4.2 on page 392.
For both the Master and Remote NEs will be anyway useful to look at the notes and general informationinserted in the previous procedures for the LOCAL typologies.
Center Operation System in Telecommunication Management Network:
All the equipment connected to the TMN are controlled by the Operation System.Detailed alarm data obtained (as locally through the PC) tracing the cause of alarm and deciding on thetype of maintenance operations the carry out.
Refer to the Operation System handbooks for more detailed information.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
390
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
START
AN ALARMIS PRESENT
STORE THE ALARM THROUGH PUSH–BUTTON
ON THE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ESCT
ISTHE POWER SUPPLY
UNIT GREEN LED
ON?
NO
ISTHE EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER REDLED ON?
NOIS
THE RED LED URG
NO
ON ?
YES
THROUGH PUSH–BUTTON R
RESET THE UNIT
DOESTHE ALARM
CONDITIONPERSIST ?
NO TRANSITORY
FAILURE
THE UNIT IS FAULTY. REPLACE IT ACCORDING
TO THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN PARA 5
ISONE OF THE
RED LEDS INDICATING UNITALARM ON?
NO
YES
REPLACE THE UNIT IN ALARM.BY CONNECTING THE PC AND
INDICATING THE TYPE OF ALARM,THE FAULTY UNIT CAN BE
REPLACED (OR NOT) IN CASEOF LOW TRAFFIC.
END
CONNECT THE PC TO THEEQUIPMENT AND, ACCORDING TOTHE TYPE OF DETECTED ALARM,
PROCEED AS STATED IN THE PARA 4.1”MEANING OF THE ALARMS”
END
ISTHE NURG RED
LEDON?
NO
YES
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT,
END
AFTER HAVING DETECTED THE TYPEOF FAILURE, ESTABLISH IF
INTERVENTION MUST BE IMMEDIATE ORNOT AS STATED IN THE RELATIVE PARA 4.1
”MEANING OF THE ALARMS”
ALARM REMOTE YELLOW LED(IND) THE MAINTENANCE
OPERATIONS MUST BE PERFORMEDON THE EQUIPMENT CONNECTED
TO THE LOCAL ONE. CONNECT THE PC AND ACCORDING TO
THE TYPE OF ALARM PROCEEDAS INDICATED IN THE PARA 4.1
YES
YES
YES
PROCEED ACCORDING TO ”POWER SUPPLY ALARM” FLOW CHART
IN THIS PARAGRAPH
”UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPSARE”
”MEANING OF THE ALARMS”
Figure 275. General flow chart
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
391
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
START
ISREMOTE ALARM
AND PRESENT ?(N.B.)
SWITCH THE POWER SUPPLYNO
DOES
THE ALARM STOP AND
GREEN LED LIGHTS
YES
UP ?
STATION POWER
SUPPLY FAILURE
NOEND
UNIT FIRST OFF AND THEN ON
REPLACE THEPOWER SUPPLY UNIT
IS
REGULAR OPERATION
RESTORED ?
YES
TRANSITORY FAILURE
END
OVERLOAD LIKELY TO HAVEBEEN CAUSED BY ONE OF THE
ASSEMBLY UNITS
REMOVE ALL THE UNITS FROM THESUBRACK INSERT THEM BACK ONE
AT A TIME UNIT WHEN THE ONECAUSING THE FAILURE HAS BEEN
DETECTED HENCE REPLACE IT.
END
IF NO REMOTE ALARMS ARE USED PROCEED TO CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY
IF ABSENT, GREEN LED OF ALL THE POWER SUPPLY UNITS WILL BE OF
POWER SUPPLYFAILURE
GREEN LED
OFF
N.B.
Figure 276. Power supply alarm
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
392
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.2 Troubleshooting by means of Craft Terminal
The alarm information of the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C can be identified on the craft terminal through theAlarm Status & Control Application (AS&C).The history of past events can be obtained by means of the Maintenance Memory application or the Hi-story application.
To access the relevant procedures, follow the indications given in ”Chapter 3. DISPLAY OF THE NET-WORK ELEMENT STATUS” on page 371, and ”Chapter. 5 LOG ACCESS” on page 373.”ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION” on page 192 illustrates all the screens inherent to thevarious alarm states.
Furthermore, data concerning stored alarms is specified and detailed in para. ”MAINTENANCE MEMORYAPPLICATION” on page 262.
General information on the status and alarms of the NE are present on the ”Alarm Synthesis” and in the”general alarms and status top labels” of the AS &C application.
The relevant description and subsequent maintenance actions are indicated in three tables,fromTable 28. on page 394 up to Table 30. on page 396
Some indication are common to the two tables.
Upon locating the alarms proceed as stated in Table 31. on page 399 thru’ Table 42. on page 408 to ob-tain all the relevant data, including the maintenance operations to carry out.
Table 43. on page 409 thru’ Table 51. on page 413 indicate the Consequent alarms Actions for each unit.
For the individuation of the causes of fault conditions the Operator can be helped by using the ”History”or ”Maintenance Memory” applications.
In case the replacement of a unit is necessary, follow the indications reported in para. 5 on page 415.
ATTENTION: When the units are in the protected configuration, the relevant urgent alarms are declaredNOT URGENT.
When the Equipment Controller unit is in CARD FAIL condition (red LED indicating unit localfailure) never re–insert the extracted unit.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
393
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.2.1 PRELIMINARY CONCEPTS and DEFINITION
The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with theaid of the previously indicated tables.
The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmissionnetwork into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level):
• Transmission bearer level. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physicallevel (Transmission media proper) and Transmission section level. The sections can be eitherregenerator or multiplexer utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of theSDH frame. The interface alarms (or section alarms, indicated in the tables) belong to this level(example: Line LOS, LOF, B2 etc).
• Path level It concerns the transfer of data between the access points and the path. It does notdepend on the service nor on the type of Transmission media. It constitutes the circuit level’ssupport. The path can either be lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacityof transferring data. Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections, the paths too have specificfunctions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The alarms listed in the citedtables, where path level troubleshooting is required, belong to this level (example TU AIS, TULOP).
• Circuit level. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and thecircuit proper. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. It superimposes the SDHfunction and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH order–wire channel associatedfunctions are required. An example of this level alarm is tributary LOS.
The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 277. hereunder.
TRIBUTARIES SDH MUX
G.703
STM–NREGENERATOR
SDHMUX
STM–N
TRIBUTARIESSDH MUX
G.703
STM–N
RSOHREGENERATOR
SECTION
RSOHREGENERATOR
SECTION
MSOHMULTIPLEXER
SECTION
MSOHMULTIPLEXER
SECTION
POH PATH
Figure 277. Transmission network level structure
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
394
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.2.1.1 Troubleshooting starting from the Alarm synthesis indication
In the following are presented the troubleshooting tables referred to the information given in the Alarm Syn-thesis screen and in the top bar of the Alarm Status & Control application .
The following table is referred to the alarm/status recapitulation of the network or of an equipment (GLOB-AL and Local Synthesis bar), that is contained in the Alarm Synthesis window.
Table 28. Alarm Synthesis indication (Global Synthesis – Network Stations)
LABELACRONYM
ALARM/STATUSDESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE
EF Equipment Failure–No answer from NE Reset Craft Terminal. If not OK. reset theEquipment Controller.
DF Dialogue Failure–Wrong answer from NE
Equipment Controller.If not OK, substitute the EquipmentController
AS Alarm Stop
AT Alarm Receiving AttentionWhen URG and NURG alarms are stored,press button on Equipment Controller oruse a CT command to activate AT
UGNG
Urgent alarmNot urgent alarm
See unit detailed indication in thefollowing tables
HA Housekeeping Alarms Check the relevant station alarm associat-ed to the housekeeping indication
SA Service affecting Not operative
DA Distant alarm See unit detailed indication in thefollowing tables
SF Signal Failure Not operative
ST Status Indicator See unit detailed indication in thefollowing tables
TC Craft Terminal connected to the NE Used on the OS to acknowledge the localCT connection
AE Access enableLocal CT is disabled by the OS, theoperator cannot ”write”. If enabling isrequested, ask the OS
DC Default configuration Send the absent configuration files to theNE
LC Loss of configurationSend the configuration files that havebeen lost to the NE. If the alarm persist,replace the Equipment Controller.
BU Three Remote F Terminals connected
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
395
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 29. Alarm Synthesis indication (Local NE)
LABELACRONYM
ALARM/STATUSDESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE
EF Equipment Failure–No answer from NE Reset Craft Terminal. If not OK. resetEquipment Controller.
DF Dialogue Failure–Wrong answer from NE
Equipment Controller.If not OK, substitute the EquipmentController
AT Alarm Receiving AttentionWhen URG and NURG alarms are stored,press button on Equipment Controller orCT command to activate AT
UGNG
Urgent alarmNot urgent alarm
See unit detailed indication in thefollowing tables
HI Housekeeping indication Check the relevant station alarm associat-ed to the housekeeping indication
IN Indicative alarm See unit detailed indication in thefollowing tables
AC Abnormal Condition See unit detailed indication in thefollowing tables
AE Access EnableLocal CT is disabled by the OS, theoperator cannot ”write”. If enabling isrequested, ask the OS
TC Craft Terminal connected to the NE Used on the OS to acknowledge the localCT connection
DC Default configuration Send the absent configuration files to theNE
LC Loss of configurationSend the configuration files that havebeen lost to the NE. If the alarm persist,replace Equipment Controller.
BU Three Remote F Terminals connected
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
396
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 30. Alarm status and remote control general indication
LABELACRONYM
ALARM/STATUSDESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE
AT Alarm receiving attention ––––––
UG Urgent Alarm
NG Not Urgent AlarmSee unit detailed information in the following
IN Indicative Alarm
See unit detailed information in the followingtables
AC Abnormal Condition
AE Access enableIf local CT is disabled by the OS, the operatorcannot ”write”. If enabling is requested, ask tothe OS
HI Housekeeping indication Check the relevant station alarm associated tothe housekeeping indication
UT Unavailable Time
Performance Monitoring indication whenthreshold (fixed in the equipment configuration)have been overtaken. To reset use the RemoteControl in AS&C application.
ET Ethernet Fail Check the Ethernet link with the OS
LFLINE SHELF – Battery : Fuse–bro-ken alarm. OR alarm due to stationpower supply failure.
Check the Station power supply.
LBLINE SHELF – Battery controlFailure / Missing (Service Batt. miss-ing/ AND OR failure or missing)
Check the Service Battery and ANDORsubunit
OS Operation System Isolation
Check Local configuration and Routing Tableconfiguration. Check the link with OS. Checkthe correct operating of OS. Reset and eventually substitute ESCT.
MF Mediation Function OS isolation Verify the link between the OS and the Medi-ation function.
Power Supply alarms (1,2,3)Check power supply unit and, if affected by afailure, replace it.
DF DROP SHELFBattery Fuse–broken alarm
Check the Station power supply
DB
DROP SHELF Battery control Failure / Missing –(Service Batt. missing/ AND ORfailure or missing)
Check the Service Battery and ANDORsubunit
Power Supply alarms (1,2)Check power supply unit and, if affected by afailure, replace it.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
397
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.2.2 Details on the alarms / status common of the various units
The following alarms are common to all units
• Card mismatch unit inserted into a slot equipped with another type of unit• Software mismatch unit with no up–dated software version• Card missing slot equipped but card missing• Card fail internal failure (hardware) see each single unit
The statuses common to all units are:
• Card not responding no dialogue between card and Equipment Controller.
• Active/Stand–by unit active (operating) or stand–by.Not applicable for AUX/EOW unit.
N.B.
• Card not responding” is dealt as status and not as an alarm because it indicates atemporary condition which will be restored. If the condition persists it is due to a unithardware failure. This will activate the Card Fail alarm.
The following operating status are common to some units only:
• Protection switch event Indication of switched TU (PPS), (21x2Mb/s Trib., 3x34 ,3x45 Mb/s Trib., 140/STM1 switch Trib., S–1.1 Trib.)
• Port selected for reference clock selected tributary to send clock to CRU (21x2Mb/s Trib.)
• Commanded switch Indication of switch activated in Remote Control operation(typical for test).
In this release active only for:
� Full Matrix� CRU� Aggregate� Electrical tributaries
• Protected Card (FOR SPARE ONLY) Indication of unit protected in N+1 Trib. protection.
• Low Priority Traffic (FOR SPARE ONLY) For 1:1 switch. Not operative in this release.• (NS–RS) LAPD fail Dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller
referred to DCC management (Aggregate andSTM1 trib.)
The following Automatic Laser Shutdown status is given for optical units (Trib. and Aggregates):
• Shutdown• Forced to ON and OFF• Not implemented• Abnormal Condition
The ON or OFF condition of ALS and the attempts to restore after ALS activate the ABN indication. Thelatter also indicates loopback commands or unit inserted into a slot whose configuration does not corre-spond to the equipped one.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
398
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4.2.2.1 Units troubleshooting tables
In the following are presented the troubleshooting tables subdivided into units
These tables should be used:
– by observing the alarms indications reported on the units detailed views of the AS&C application oncraft terminal (Alarms/Status column of the table)
– by observing the red LED on the front of each unit, indicating unit failure (Unit Fail column)
– by observing the URG, NURG, IND, ABN LEDs on the front of the Equipment Controller unit
the URG alarm indicates a severe alarm that could have impact on the current traffic (interrup-tion or degrade). Thus it requires a rapid intervention to restore the regular working conditionof the equipment.
The indications of Alarm/Status for each unit are obtained by clicking (when cursor becomes a ”magnifier”)in the block representing the unit, in the general view of AS&C application. The complete denominationof an alarm is obtained by clicking (when cursor becomes a ”hand”) in the relevant box symbolizing thealarm.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
399
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 31. Alarms of the STM4/STM16 Aggregates
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
AcronymInt Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss Signal LOS yes Check line
Loss of frame LOF yes Check line
Multiplexer Section AlarmIndication Signal
MS–AIS yesCheck RemoteEquipment
Multiplexer SectionFar–EndReceive Failure
MS–FERF yesCheck RemoteEquipment
Multiplexer SectionSignalDegrade on byte B2
MS–SIG–DEG
yes Check line when possible
Multiplexer SectionExcessiveBit Error Rate on byte B2
MS–EXBER yes Check line
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yes Check line
AU4 Alarm IndicationSignal
AU4–AIS yesCheck RemoteEquipment
Laser Degrade LD yesReplace unit whenpossible
Laser Fail LF yes yes Replace unit
Laser Abnormal Condi-tion
yesAutomatic LaserShutdownin progress
Laser TemperatureExcess
TEMP. yes yesReplace unit whenpossible
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Unit inserted into slotequippedwith other type of unit
Cardmismatch
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
Card MissingCardMissing
yes
Pass–Through fail yesCheck Jumper kit orReplace the Unit.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
400
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 32. Alarms of the STM1 Electrical Tributary (140/STM1 Switch. Unit)
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
Acronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss Signal LOS yes Check line (*)
Loss of frame LOF yes Check line (*)
Multiplexer Section AlarmIndication Signal
MS–AIS yesCheck RemoteEquipment (*)
Multiplexer SectionFar–EndReceive Failure
MS–FERF yesCheck RemoteEquipment (*)
Multiplexer SectionSignalDegrade on byte B2
MS–SIG–DEG
yesCheck line when possible(*)
Multiplexer SectionExcessiveBit Error Rate on byte B2
MS–EXBER yes Check line (*)
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yes Check line (*)
AU4 Alarm IndicationSignal
AU4–AIS yesCheck RemoteEquipment (*)
Unvailable AU Path Indi-cates AIS signal receivedon the AU Path
yes Check All AU Path
Excessive Bit Error Rate(POH–VC4)
EX–BER–(B3)
yesCheck line on VC4 Path(*)
Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yesReplace Matrix or STM1Trib. units.
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Unit inserted into slotequippedwith other type of unit
Cardmismatch
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
* – Tributary side
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
401
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 33. Alarms of the STM1 Optical Tributary
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
AcronymInt Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss Signal LOS yes Check line (*)
Loss of frame LOF yes Check line (*)
Multiplexer Section AlarmIndication Signal
MS–AIS yesCheck RemoteEquipment (*)
Multiplexer SectionFar–EndReceive Failure
MS–FERF yesCheck RemoteEquipment (*)
Multiplexer SectionSignalDegrade on byte B2
MS–SIG–DEG
yesCheck line when possible(*)
Multiplexer SectionExcessiveBit Error Rate on byte B2
MS–EXBER yes Check line (*)
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yes Check line (*)
AU4 Alarm IndicationSignal
AU4–AIS yesCheck RemoteEquipment (*)
Unvailable AU Path Indi-cates AIS signal receivedon the AU Path
yes Check All AU Path
Excessive Bit Error Rate(POH–VC4)
EX–BER–(B3)
yesCheck line on VC4 Path(*)
Loss of Pointer AU4B–LOP yesReplace Matrix or STM1Trib. units.
Laser Degrade LD yesReplace unit whenpossible
Laser Fail LF yes yes Replace unit
Laser AbnormalCondition
yesAutomatic LaserShutdown in progress
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Unit inserted into slotequippedwith other type of unit
Card mis-match
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
* – Tributary side
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
402
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 34. Alarms of the 140 Mbit/s Trib. (140/STM1 Switch. unit)
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
Acronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss signal LOS yes Check line, Tributary side
Line Alarm IndicationSignal
LAIS yesCheck RemoteEquipment Trib. side
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LPO yesReplace Matrix or140Mbit/s Trib. side
Unvailable AU Path Indi-cates AIS signal receivedon the UU Path
yes Check All AU Path
Excessive Bit Error Rate(POH–VC4)
EX–BER(B3)
yesCheck line on VC4 pathAggregate side.
Far–End Receive Failure(POH–VC4)
FERF (G1) yesCheck remote equipmenton Path which terminateVC4, Aggregate side
Signal Label mismatch C2Mism yes Configuration error
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Unit inserted into slotequippedwith other type of unit
Card mis-match
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
403
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 35. Alarms of the 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
Acronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss of 34/45 Mbit/ssignal
LOS yes Check line, Tributary side
Unvailable TU Path Indi-cates AIS signal receivedon the TU Path
yes Check all TU Path
Alarm Indication Signalon TU3
TU–AIS yesCheck other equipmenton Path, Agg. side
VC3 Far–End ReceiveFailure
FERF yesCheck other equipmenton Path, Agg. side
VC3 Signal Label mis-match
SgLbMIS yes Configuration error
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Unit inserted into slotequippedwith other type of unit
Cardmismatch
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
Near 15 M TCA. Thresh-old cross alarm for 15 Mthresholds set on Eq.conf. application
yesCheck VC3 path from theremote termination to thelocal termination
Far 15 M TCA. Thresholdcross alarm for 15 Mthresholds on far endequipment
yesCheck VC3 path from lo-cal termination to remotetermination.
Near DAY TCA yes
Far DAY TCA yes
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
404
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 36. Alarms of the 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s Tributary
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
Acronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss of 2 Mbit/s signal.NOTE
LOS yes Check line, Tributary side
Loss of frame. NOTE LOF yes Check line, Tributary side
Alarm Indication Signalon TU12
TU–AIS yesCheck other equipmenton Path, Agg. side
Unvailable AU Path Indi-cates AIS signal receivedon the UU Path
yes Check All AU Path
VC12 Far–End ReceiveFailureAlarm criteria receivedfrom far– end equipment
FERF yesCheck remote equipmenton Path, Agg. side.
VC12 Signal Label mis-match. Incompliant VC12signal label
SgLbMIS yes Configuration error
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Card mismatch. Unit in-serted into slot equippedwith other type of unit
Cardmismatch
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
Near 15 M TCA. Thresh-old cross alarm for 15 Mthresholds set on Eq.conf. application
yesCheck VC12 path fromthe remote termination tothe local termination
Far 15 M TCA. Thresholdcross alarm for 15 Mthresholds on far endequipment
yesCheck VC12 path from lo-cal termination to remotetermination.
Near DAY TCA yes
Far DAY TCA yes
NOTE – Only for selected clock reference
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
405
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 37. 3/2 TransMux & 5 x 2Mbit/s Trib. Unit alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
AcronymInt Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss of 2 Mbit/s Frame(Note)
LOF yes
Loss of Multiframe onCRC4 (Note)
LOF yes
Check Line Tributary side
Loss of incoming Trib.signal
LOSS yes Check line Trib. side
AIS received on Tx Trib. AIS Tx yesCheck Lower hierarchicallevel equipment.
Unvailable AU Path Indi-cates AIS signal receivedon the AU Path
yes Check all the TU path
VC12 Far–End receivefailure
VC12 FER yesCheck Far–Endequipment on path
VC12 Signal labelmismatch
SgLbMIS yes Configuration error
Loss of 8 Mbit/s framereceived
LOF yes
AIS 8 Mbit/s AIS yesCheck Far–End PDHequipment 8Mbit/s level
FERF 8 Mbit/s FERF yes
Loss of 34 Mbit/sincoming Trib.
LOSS yes
Loss 34 Mbit/s Frame LOF yes Check line on PDH 34
34Mbit/s AIS AIS yesMbit/s Trib. side
34 Mbit/s FERF FERF yes yes
Internal failure (hardware) Card Fail yes Replace unit
Unit inserted into slotequippedwith other type of unit
Card mis-match
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
Near 15 M TCA. Thresh-old cross alarm for 15 Mthresholds set on Eq.conf. application
yesCheck VC12 path fromthe remote termination tothe local termination
Far 15 M TCA. Thresholdcross alarm for 15 Mthresholds on far endequipment
yesCheck VC12 path from lo-cal termination to remotetermination.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
406
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Optical Indication
Alarm DescriptionAlarm
Unit Equipment Controller MaintenanceAcronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Near DAY TCA yes
Far DAY TCA yes
NOTE – Only for selected clock reference
Table 38. Matrix Alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
Acronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Excessive Bit Error Rate(POH–VC4)
EX–BER(B3)
yes Check line on VC4 Path.
Far–End receive failure(VC4–POH)
FERF (G1) yesCheck remote equipmenton path which terminateVC4
Signal label mismatch C2 Mism yes Configuration error
Loss of TU12 Multiframeon VC4
LOM(H4) yesCheck other equipment(likely configuration error)
TU Loss of Pointer TU–LOP yes Check line on path
TU Alarm IndicationSignal
TU–AIS yesCheck other equipmenton Path
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
407
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 39. Clock Reference Unit alarms
OpticalIndication
Alarm Description AlarmAcronym Unit
EquipmentController
Maintenance
Int Urg Nurg
Internal Reference # 1 to # 6 Loss yes
Internal Reference # 1 to # 6 Drift yes Check external reference and
External Reference # 1 to # 6 Loss yes
Check external reference andconnection with the equipment
External Reference # 1 to # 6 Drift yes
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes yes Replace Unit
Unit inserted into slot equip. withanother type of Unit
CardMismatch
yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes Update SW version
Table 40. AUX/EOW Alarms
OpticalIndication
Alarm Description AlarmAcronym Unit
EquipmentController
Maintenance
Int Urg Nurg
Loss of G. 703 signal LOS G. 703 yes Check line G. 703
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace Unit
Unit inserted into slot equip. withanother type of Unit
Card Mis-match
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes Update SW version
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
408
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 41. ADM 600 INTERFACE Alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
AcronymInt Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss of Signal LOS yesCheck Link LINE–DROPShelf
Loss of FRAME LOF yesCheck Link LINE–DROPShelf
Multiplexer Section AlarmInd Sig.
MS AIS yesCheck Link LINE–DROPShelf
Multiplexer Section Far–End Rec. F
MS FERF yesCheck Link LINE–DROPShelf
Multiplexer Section Ex-cess. BIT Error Rate onB2
MS EXBER yesCheck Link LINE–DROPShelf
AU4 Alarm Ind. Sign. onthe Path
AU–AIS yesCheck Link LINE–DROPShelf
Transmitter Fail MIT yesyes(1)
Replace unit
Loss of Multiframe LOM yes Check other Equipment
Card Fail CARD FAIL yes yes Replace Unit
Unit inserted into slotequipped with other typeof unit
Card mis-match
yes yes Insert right unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
(1) Only with the ADM 600 Interface not protected, otherwise with ADM 600 1+1 EPS protected theNURG lamp will be activated
Table 42. STM 1 E MODULE Alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm Description AlarmUnit Equipment Controller Maintenance
Acronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Card Fail CARD FAIL yes Replace Unit
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
409
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 43. Consequent Action Aggregate STM–4/STM–16
Consequent Action
Alarm AIS AIS AIS FERF FERF PPS LSFault
RSOH MSOH AU4
TRIB
G1 MS
LOS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes Yes Yes
AU4–LOP Yes Yes Yes
EX–BER (B3) Yes
Table 44. Consequent Action Trib. STM1 (140/STM1 switch. trib.)
Consequent Action
AlarmAIS AIS AIS FERF FERF FERF PPS
FaultRSOH MSOH AU4
AGG
G1
STM1LINE
G1
AGG MS
LOS Yes Yes Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes Yes
AU4–LOP Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes Yes
UPA Yes Yes
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
410
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 45. Consequent Action Optic STM1 Trib.
Consequent Action
AlarmFault
AIS AIS AIS FERFG1
FERFG1
FERF PPS LS
Fault
RSOH MSOH AU4STM1
LINE
AGGMS
LOS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes Yes Yes
AU4–LOP Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes Yes
UPA Yes Yes Yes
Table 46. Consequent Action 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s trib.
Consequent Action
AlarmFault AIS AIS FERF PPSFault
OUT C3 G1
LOS Yes
AIS Yes
UPA Yes Yes Yes
SgLBUnequ Yes
SgLbMIS Yes Yes
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
411
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 47. Consequent Action Trib. 140 (140/STM1 switch. trib.)
Consequent Action
AlarmFault AIS AIS AIS FERF FERF PPSFault
C4 TRIB LINE C12/3 V5 G1
LOS Yes
AIS
UPA Yes Yes Yes
C2Unequ Yes
C2Mism Yes Yes
Table 48. Consequent Action 21 x 2 / 21 x 1.5 Mbit/s trib.
Consequent Action
AlarmFault AIS AIS FERF PPSFault
TRIB LINE C12 V5
LOS Yes
LOF Yes
AIS Yes
TU –UPA Yes Yes Yes
SgLBUnequ Yes
SgLbMIS Yes Yes
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
412
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 49. Consequent Action 34/2 TransMux and 5 x 2Mbit/s Tributary
Consequent Action
AlarmFault AIS AIS FERF FERF PPSFault
TRIB LINE C12/3 V5 G1
2Mbit/s Loss Yes
2Mbit/s LOF Yes
2Mbit/s AIS Yes
2Mbit/s SgLbUnequip. Yes
2Mbit/s SgLbMIS Yes Yes
Unavailable TU path Yes Yes Yes
34Mbit/s LOSS Yes
34Mbit/s LOF Yes
34Mbit/s AIS Yes
34Mbit/s UNEQ SgLb Yes
34Mbit/s SgLbMIS Yes Yes
34Mbit/s UPA Yes Yes Yes
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
413
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 50. Consequent Action MATRIX
MATRIX
Consequent Action
Alarm AIS FERF FERF FERF AIS PPSFault
AU4 G1
VC4
G1
VC3
G1
V5
TU
AU4–UPA Yes Yes Yes Yes
EXBER (B3) Yes
TU–UPA Yes Yes Yes
C2UNEQ Yes Yes
C2MISM Yes Yes Yes
LOM (H4) Yes Yes Yes
TU–LOP Yes Yes Yes Yes
TU–AIS Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 51. Consequent Action ADM 600 Interface
Consequent Action
AIS FERF
AU4 MS
LOS Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes
LOM Yes
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
414
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
415
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE
No particular indication is given as to spares handling which is left to the Maintenance Administration.
The replacement procedures are executed as follows:
• Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace.The setting options are specified in the tables on the Circuit Schematics which relate the opera-tions to achieve with the setting, and on the Layout drawings which indicate the exact locationof all the setting arrangements.The cited documents are enclosed in the TECHNICAL HANDBOOK.
• Simply replace those units not provided with any software setting
• Replace those units having software setting (except for the Equipment Controller unit).Should the program release of the spare unit be compatible with that of the faulty one, the unitwill become operative after having automatically downloaded the software setting options fromthe Equipment Controller.Should the release differ, then by means of the Craft Terminal download the software releaseupdated on the replaced unit. Following the indications of the General Procedure Section 2.2 on page 433.
• With regard to the Equipment Controller unit refer to the following Par. 5.1 on page 415
5.1 Equipment Controller unit replacement
Various procedures are utilized to replace a faulty controller unit (for both ESCT and SMEC 2 ), they de-pend on the type of spares available:
• Spares belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release identical to the unit toreplace.
• Spares belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release differing from that of theunit to replace.
• Spares belonging to other types of equipment or unknown.In the of the case of ESCT Unit the subunit ”Memory espansion M8 F2R” must be equipped.
The flow–charts of Figure 278. on page 416 and Figure 279. on page 417 illustrates the procedures tofollow for each above mentioned type of spare unit.
The procedures aim at replacing the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwantedfaults.
Therefore, while replacing the Equipment Controller unit the equipment is regularly operating except forthe functions carried out by unit to be replaced (the switching operation of the plesiochronous tributariestoo).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
416
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
REMOVE THE FAULTY EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT
HW–PRESET THE SPARE UNIT IDENTICAL TO THE ONE BEINGREPLACED EXCEPT FOR THE I1 DIP–SWITCH :
INSERT THE SPARE UNIT INTO THE ASSIGNED SLOT
THE RESET IS AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMED DURING THE
THE URG ALARM LED AND THE UNIT ALRM LED ( )ARE LIGHTING UP
CHECK THAT THE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE WITH RIGHTRELEASE HAS BEEN INSTALLED ON THE PC
IF OTHERWISE, LOAD IT AS INSTRUCTED IN THE ”COMMISSIONING ” SECTION
SPARE: SAME EQUIPMENTDIFFERENT RELEASE
SPARE: DIFFERENTEQUIPMENT OR
UNKNOWN SOFTWARE SOURCE
SW AS INSTRUCTED IN THE ”COMMISSIONING SECTION”
LAUNCH THE CONFIGURATION FILESTHROUGH THE VARIOUS CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONSNOTE : ALWAYS SEND FIRST THE ”CONNECTION
CONFIGURATION” FILE, THEN THE ”EQUIPMENTCONFIGURATION” ONE AND FINALLY THE REST.
A BC
A B CNOTE: SEE NEXT FIGURE
SPARE: SAME RELEASE
CONNECT THE PC AND ACTIVATE THE MANAGEMENT
EXTRACT THE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT
DO YOU WANT TO UP–LOAD CONNECTION DATATO SET UP THE LINK WITH OS/RECT ?
YES SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNITWITH THE DIP–SWITCH
I1–1 OPEN , I1–2 OPEN
EXTRACT EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
NO
SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT WITH THE DIP–SWITCHI1–1 CLOSE , l1–2 CLOSE
INSERT AGAIN THE EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
INSERT AGAIN THE SPARE EQUIPMENTCONTROL. UNIT.– CHECK IN THE MAINT.MEMORY THE END OF DATA UP–LOAD
TO FORCE THE CONFIGURATION DATA AUTOMATIC RESET
AT THE END OF THIS PROCEDURE –THAT LASTS UTMOST 1 MIN. –THE ABN LED LIGHTING SHOWS THE CONFIGURATION DATA RESETCOMPLETION
SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT WITH THE DIP–SWITCHI1–1 CLOSE , l1–2 CLOSE
INSERT AGAIN THE EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
CONTROLLER RESTART CONFIGURATION DATA
END OF PROCEDURE
CHECK THE OS/RECT CONNECTION.THE OS/RECT OPERATOR IS ABLE TO SEND THE
CONFIGURATION FILES
I1–1 OPEN (ON), I1– 2 CLOSED (OFF)
Figure 278. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 1
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
417
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
IS THEEQUIPMENT SW
WITH RIGHT RELEASELOADED ON THE
NO
A
PC?
THE EQUIPMENTSOFTWARE WITH RIGHT
RELEASE MUST BEAVAILABLE
LOAD IT ON THE PC ASINSTRUCTED IN THE
OF THE GENERAL PROCEDURE SECTION
IS THEMANAGEMENT SW
LOADED ON THE PC IN THESAME RELEASE LIKE THAT OF
NO
THE SPARE UNIT ?
IS THEMANAGEMENT SW
AVAILABLE ?
NO
LOAD IT ON THE PC ASINSTRUCTED IN THE
CHAPTER 3
”COMMISSIONING SECTION”
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT ANDACTIVATE THE MANAGEMENT SW AS INSTRUCTED
IN THE ”COMMISSIONING” SECTION
ACTIVATE THE ”SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD”APPLICATION AND DOWNLOAD THE RIGHT EQUIPMENT
RELEASE AS INSTRUCTED IN THE ”GENERAL PRODUCERS” SECTION,
AT THE END OF DOWNLOADING THE RIGHT RELEASE MANAGEMENT SW IS ACTIVED.
EXECUTE THE ”LOGIN” PROCEDURE
C
B
THE EQUIPMENT SOFTWAREWITH RIGHT RELEASE AND
THE ”SWP–EQ. CONTROLLERSWDL” PRODUCT SOFTWARE
MUST BE AVAILABLE
IS THE NOEQUIPMENT SWWITH THE RIGHT
RELEASE INSTALLEDON THE PC?
INSTALL IT ON THE PCAS INSTRUCTED IN THE
OF THE GENERALPROCEDURE SECTION
THE ”SWP–EQCONTROLLER SWDL”PRODUCT SOFTWAREMUST BE AVAILABLE
YES
IS THE”SWP–EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER SWDL”PRODUCT INSTALLED
ON THE PC?
NO
INSTALL ATION OF THE PCAS DESCRIBED IN THE
IN THEGENERAL PROCEDURES
SECTION
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT, ACTIVATE THE”SWP–EQ. CONTROLLER SWDL” PRODUCT, AND
PROCEED AS INSTRUCTED IN THE
OF THE GENERAL PROCEDURES SECTIONTO DOWNLOAD THE RIGHT EQUIPMENT RELEASE
YES
YESYES
YES
A B CNOTE: SEE PREVIOUS FIGURE
OF THE
PARA 2.3.2PARA 2.1
PARA 2.1
PARA 2.1
PARA 2.3.1
Figure 279. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 2
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
418
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
419
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
GENERAL PROCEDURES
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
420
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
421
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
1 INTRODUCTION
This section deals with the operations concerning the ”Software download ” procedures.
2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
The following details the operations inherent to software download.
Software download permits to software–load the equipment thereby facilitating release version updatingfollowing product evolution.
The software download operations utilize the applicative software kit SWP–1651 SM of the new Releasecontaining the equipment software program.
To software download:
• install the SWP–1651 SM of the new Release application on the P.C.
• load the SWP–1651 SM of the new Release application on the equipment
To execute the download use is made of the SWP–CRAFT TERMINAL 1651SM applicative.
The type of software download operations depend on operating phase they belong. Specifically :
• Updating the software version during the in–service phase (OPERATION) and with Rel.� 2.1, following the indications stated in para. ”SW DOWNLOAD FROM REL. ≥ 2.1” on page 422In order to upgrade the Equipment SWP starting from Rel. 1.2., an intermediate step beforeRel.2.1 is necessary. ( refer to Rel. 2.1 Operator’s Handbook.).
• Unit replacement with a spare or extensions with different SW version (MAINTENANCEPHASE).Two cases are defined:
– EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER replacement.The sequence of operations is carried out following the procedure indicated inFigure 278. on page 416 and in Figure 279. on page 417.In Figure 279. reference are made to the download operation presented in the followingparagraphs 2.1 on page 422 and 2.3.on page 434.
– Replacement or extension of units other than Equipment ControllerThe operations are described in the paragraph 2.2 on page 433 .
The software product utilizes the Windows system.
The information reported in para. 4 ”INTRODUCTION” on page 49 of the DESCRIPTIONS section is alsoapplicable to instruments, commands and windows handling.PC start–up and windows system control are specified in chapter 2 on page 353 of the COMMISSIONINGsection.
The units with ”Software Mismatch” indication have different software version.
N.B. The Software Download applicative contained in the SWP CRAFT TERMINAL 1651SM isdescribed in para. 4.9 on page 303 ”SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD APPLICATION” of theDescription Section.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
422
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.1 SW Download from REL. equal/greater than 2.1
N.B. Instead of the number of the release, are here indicated the terms ”previous” or ”old”for the release already present on the equipment and the terms ”running” or ”new” forthe release to download on the equipment. The same procedure is used whendownloading different versions of the same release.
PRELIMINARY CHECK BEFORE DOWNLOADING
• Through Craft Terminal check that unstable Alarms are absent and no unit is affected with”CARD NOT RESPONDING” or ”AUTOMATIC LASER SHUT DOWN ” conditions. In thesecircumstances , after having solved the problem, select the CLEAR option in the MaintenanceMemories application and then close the Craft Terminal management applicative.
• Verify that no Remote Force Command is active and that the ABN alarm is lighting–off.
• Verify that the ”AREA ADDRESS” of the OS in the ”OS configuration” of the ”Localconfiguration” application is correct.
• All backward Download or backward Activation of SW version must be done on congruentUnits.
The following procedure must be used to properly install the Sw package taken into account theEquipment Controller type installed on the ADM ( ESCT or SMEC2) and which SW release is running.
If the Equipment controller to download is an ESCT with SW release � 2.1.00 and � 2.1.85 it must beloaded for a first time with the new light SWP 1651SM as described starting from the following point 2)up to point 7). Further download can be performed as indicated for the SMEC2 Unit.
The ESCT unit with the Rel � 2.1.85, or SMEC2 unit must be downloaded with the complete SWP,following the procedure of the next point1 ) then jump to the point 6 ) .
The software version of the units can be checked in the file SWKIT.TXT of the SWP 1651SM,diskette 1 as far as the complete package is concerned.For the ”light” package the file SWKIT.TXT to be read is contained in disk 3. The first row pertainsto the Equipment software version to be loaded.
1 ) Install the complete SWP 1651SM package of the new release on the PC, (equipment SWapplicative) using the following floppies order : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 by performing the followingoperations :
a ) Insert the first diskette of the sequence in driver A
b ) Open Windows File Manager and select driver A.
c ) Activate the CTSFMNG.EXE file
d ) The figure ”Install SW Package” appears; by clicking on the same title the screen ofFigure 280. on page 424 is displayed.
e ) By clicking on the ”Confirm” label the installation begins.
f ) Sequentially insert the other diskette when asked for the next one till the completeinstallation.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
423
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2 ) install the light SWP 1651SM package on the PC using the following floppies in sequence :3, 4, 5, 6, 2 by following the a ) to f ) sequence of operation previously described.
3 ) Download the light SWP on the Equipment and activated it, as described in the followingpoints:
g ) Run the management applicative on the PC. Open the management applicative and selectthe SW Download application, (see Figure 281. on page 425).The Figure 282. on page425 appears.
To obtain the equipment downloading screen carry out the following operations:
• Clicking on ”Software Download Menu” of Figure 282. on page 425, Figure 283. onpage 426 will appear.
• Click on ”SW Downloading” and then Figure 284. on page 426 appears.• Click on Download, Figure 285. on page 427 is displayed.
h ) Delete the two figures representing the NE release on the ”NE type” field that must be”1651SM”. By selecting the ”SW Package SELECTION” a list of the SW packagesinstalled will be displayed. Select the SW version pertaining to the package to bedownloaded (light or complete). Select ”Code Present” for downloading the cards presenton the equipment. By selecting ”Forced Download” all units will be downloaded even if theyare in new release. If no selection is made only the units of a different release will bedownloaded. By selecting ”Implicit Activation” at the end of download the new SW willbecome automatically operative. If this selection is not made, at the end of the Download,activate the new SW by entering the ”Software” option, then the ”SW Management” tobe activated.
N.B. The ”Server identification” selection must be Server on ECT
i ) Select SW new package
j ) Select ”Download” at the bottom–left of the screen indicated in Figure 285. on page 427,and after acknowledgement continue to download. The ”Download progress” screen isdisplayed showing Download status. At the end of the procedure the indication ”Downloadcompleted successfully” will be displayed.
ATTENTION – After having started the SW Download the Operator may wait up to 15 min. toacknowledge a message by the system
k ) Check in the ”SW Information Application” in Figure 286. on page 427 that the newversion has been enabled and activated. Figure 286. on page 427 is obtained by clickingon ”SW Package Information” on the screen of Figure 285. on page 427.
4 ) If the download of the light sw package is aborted , verify in the ”Maintenance memory”application if the cause is a ”SW DL Err Programming FEP” ”SWDL” Group event, ”Usercommands” Group entity. If true, go on without problems to point 6 ) . If not, try again to performthe Download, starting from the first point and if it fails again activate a trouble shootingprocedure.
5 ) If the download is successfully performed, go to point 6 ) .
6 ) Proceed as indicated in points g ) to k ) to download the complete sw package
7 ) When download is completed, sign–off the Craft terminal Management applicative and launchit again.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
424
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
8 ) Recover the configuration files relevant to the previous release through the ”RECEIVE” functionto update the Craft Terminal whit the Configuration files of the NE current Release.
N.B. During the activation of the new downloaded SW, the NE active configuration files areautomatically converted by the Controller.
If the equipment is provided with the ”VC4 Matrix” Units, the new downloaded SWadds a new configuration table referred to the ”140 Mbit/s Tributaries port enabling”in which all the ports are enabled.
The other configuration files on CT, if any, (and not active upon the activation of thedownloaded new SWP) to be used with the new SW Release, must be converted throughthe ADM.EXE file mentioned at para 2.1.1 on page 428.If necessary, they must be sent to the equipment according to the following sequence:firstly the connection files and then the equipment ones.
Figure 280. Install Software Package
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
425
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 281. Application Choice – Software Download (data are an example)
Figure 282. Software Download main screen (data are an example)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
426
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 283. Software Download menu (data are an example)
Figure 284. SW downloading choice (data are an example)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
427
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 285. Software downloading application (data are an example)
Figure 286. SW information (data are an example)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
428
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.1.1 Conversion Files from the previous Release to Rel. 2.7
As cited in para 2.1, point 8 ) on page 424, the active configuration files upon the activation of thedownloaded new SW Release, are automatically converted.
After the equipment download it is possible to convert the Configuration Files not active during theACTIVATION of the new SWP, from the previous release format to the new release one.
The conversion program is called ”adm.exe” and it is located in the directory:
”c:\<your_directory>\<equipment_name_and_rel>” .
Where <your_directory> is the directory where the SWP has been loaded.
The default is c:\alcatel\<equipment_name_and_rel>
The following chap. 2.1.1.1 describes the sequence for the Connection Configuration file conversion and the chap. 2.1.1.2 on page 432 applies to all other type of Configuration files (Local, Routing Table,Drop Shelf, Equipment).
At the end of the conversion procedure, remember to send to the Equipment the ConfigurationFiles just converted, following the sequence: firstly the Connection ad then the Equipment ones.
2.1.1.1 Connection Configuration Files conversion from the previous Release to Rel. 2.7
Having downloaded the equipment in Rel. 2.7 and with the SWP of the same release on the Craft Terminal,proceed as follows:
a ) Look for the conversion program called ”adm.exe” as indicated in the previous chap. 2.1.1. In thisexample for the current Release, the directory: ”c:\ alcatel\1651sm26\adm.exe” is to be selected.
b ) activating the ”adm.exe” program, the Figure 287. appears .
Figure 287. Conversion program – first screen
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
429
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
c ) open the FILE option: ”convert application”
d ) It appears a window that lists all the Configuration Applications as shown in Figure 288.
Figure 288. Conversion program – Configuration Application Selection
e ) activating the Connection Configuration Application, the Figure 289. will be shown.
Figure 289. Conversion program – Old version of Connection Config. file selection
f ) Look for the Old version of description file of Connection Configuration (.b56 extension) to beconverted in the current release, select it and press OK.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
430
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
g ) After a waiting pop–up it appears a table in which the User must select the description file of the Oldversion of the Equipment Configuration (.b60 extension, see Figure 290. in order to associatethis Old version of the Equipment Config. File, to the Old version Connection Config. File, selectedin the previous point f ) .
h ) press OK.
Figure 290. Conversion program – Old version of Equipment Config. file selection to be associated tothe Connect. Config. File
i ) It appears the Figure 291. using which the User must now attribute a name to the ConnectionConfiguration file to be converted in the current Release (new version), and then press OK.
27
sm27
Figure 291. Conversion program – New version of Connection Config. file choice
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
431
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
j ) It follows the window of Figure 292. in which it is possible to add comments about the new convertedfile, and press OK.
27
2.7
Figure 292. Conversion program – New version converted file comments
k ) The OK message of Figure 293. ends the conversion procedure. The conversion program can beminimized to allows eventual further utilization starting from the point c ).
Figure 293. Conversion program – Acknowledgement message
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
432
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.1.1.2 Configuration Files conversion for all Applications other than ConnectionConfiguration
For the Config. Files different from Connection ones ( that means :Local, Routing Table, Drop Shelf,Equipment Config. Files) the procedure will be described following the previous chapter 2.1.1.1 on page428 as far as it is applicable .
Having downloaded the equipment in Rel. 2.7 and with the SWP of the same release on the Craft Terminal,proceed as indicated in the previous chapter 2.1.1.1 from the first point a ) up to the point d ).
Apply the points e ) and f ) to the Configuration File other than Connection. After the OK command theconversion is achieved.
Then jump to the point i ) to give a name to the new converted file.
Also this procedure ends with the points j ) and k ).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
433
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.2 Replacement or Extensions of Units other than Equipment Controller, with no updated SW
This condition is possible when handling spares with other ADM equipment or with other releases of thesame equipment.
Proceed as follows:
• Make sure that the management software is available, if otherwise install it as specified in theINSTALLATION section, chapter 3 on page 355.
• Make sure that the equipment software has been installed, if otherwise proceed to install itas specified in para. 2.1 on page 422.
• Insert the unit in a free slot on the shelf and equip it through the ”Equipment Configuration”application.
• From the ”Application Choice” menu ( Figure 281. on page 425 ) select ”Software Download”:Figure 282. on page 425 will appear.
• Click on ”Software Download Menu” to obtain the screen of Figure 283. on page 426.
• Click on ”SW Down loading”, the screen of Figure 284. on page 426 will appear.
• Select ”Download”, and than Figure 285. on page 427 (”SW Downloading”) will be displayed.
• Figure 285. on page 427 permits to select the following:
– Code Present
– Implicit activation
– N.E. Type: set the indication 1651SM, without release indication
– SW package selection: select the running software
N.B. The ”Server identification” selection must be Server on ECT
– Don’t select ”Forced Download”
• Click on Download label. The screen of ”Download Progress” is presented showing thedownload status.
• At the end of the procedure the screen displays the indication of ”Activation CompletedSuccessfully”.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
434
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.3 Spare Equipment Controller download, with unknown software
The sequence of operation for Equipment Controller replacement with spare, is presented in theflow–chart of Figure 278. on page 416 and Figure 279. on page 417.
This chapter describes the use of the ” SWP–Eq. Controller SWDL”
This applicative must be used when a spare Equipment Controller unit has to be installed on theequipment, when the SW release on the spare unit differs from the current one, and his managementsoftware is not known or not available.
This applicative gives direct access to the SW download of the equipment’s management SW. Throughit the Equipment Controller unit will be updated to the SW being currently used.
Proceed as indicated in the paragraph below.
2.3.1 Installing the ”SWP equipment controller SWDL” applicative on the P.C.
• Insert the SW KIT ”Equipment Controller SWDL” diskette into the disk unit (A or B).
• Enter command:
WIN A:\SETUP
Upon receiving a transitory window, the screen of Figure 294. on page 436 will appear displaying theproduct’s general data.
To obtain information on installation data select HELP (AIUTO)
By selecting EXIT (ESCI) the screen of Figure 295. on page 437 is displayed, and then by clicking on theEXIT (ESCI) key the screen of Figure 296. on page 438 will appear.By clicking on the OK key, the procedure is aborted. By clicking onto CONTINUE (CONTINUA) the screenof Figure 294. on page 436 is accessed again.
• Select CONTINUE (CONTINUA) while working on screen of Figure 294. on page 436 to obtainthat of Figure 297. on page 439 into which the DIRECTORY will be inserted. The defaultdirectory appears.By clicking on the EXIT (ESCI) key, the screen of Figure 295. on page 437 will appear henceaborting the procedure.By selecting HELP (AIUTO) further information on installation is obtained.
• Click on the CONTINUE (CONTINUA) key to start–off the software download programillustrated in Figure 298. on page 440.
This screen gives the possibility to suspend download by clicking on the ”suspend” (sospendi) key, aconfirm message will subsequently appear.
• After a transitory indication, the screen of Figure 299. on page 441 will be automaticallydisplayed stating that installation is completed. By clicking on the OK key the directory is createdspecifying the icons that are automatically present on the Windows Manager Program (seescreen of Figure 300. on page 442 ).If installation is not correct, messages will be sent to the operator.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
435
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
2.3.2 Downloading the running release on the equipment
• The ”Read me” icon permits to obtain information needed to execute the application.
• To access the Download Application sequentially click the icons namely, Communication,Server and Manager. Figure 301. on page 442 will appear.
The sequence to follow is the same stated in para 2.1 on page 422,depending on the type ofEquipment Controller and on the SW release running.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
436
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM
PRODUCTS INSTALLATION
– THIS PROGRAM EXECUTES THE COMPLETE PRODUCT
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CONTINUE EXIT HELP
Figure 294. Initial set–up SW Download
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
437
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM
INSTALLATION INTERRUPTED
– INSTALLATION INCOMPLETE. PRODUCT WILL NOT BE PROPERLY INSTALLED IFYOU QUIT NOW.HOWEVER THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAN BE LAUNCHED AGAIN
CONTINUE EXIT
Figure 295. Download installation interruption
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
438
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM
INCOMPLETE INSTALLATION
– THE PROGRAM HAS NOT BEEN COMPLETELY INSTALLED
– LAUNCH THE SETUP PROGRAM AGAIN
OK
Figure 296. Installation incomplete
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
439
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM
PRODUCTS INSTALLATION
– THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE WILL COPY THE FILE INTO THE FOLLOWINGDIRECTORY:
PATH : C:\ECT\NECTAS\V340
ANY PREVIOUS VERSION WILL BE OVER WRITTEN
CONTINUE EXIT HELP
Figure 297. Directory editing
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
440
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM
SETUP V1.0.1
FILE
A:\SR.SDFSRV.EXE
DESTINATION
C:\ECT\NECTAS\V340\COMSFINT.EXE
SUSPEND
Figure 298. Installation in progress
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
441
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
INSTALLATION PROGRAM
COMPLETE INSTALLATION
THE INSTALLATION HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION SEE THE OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
OK
Figure 299. Installation completed
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
442
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Figure 300. Installation icons
Figure 301. Software Download main screen
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
443
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3 UPGRADING PROCEDURE FROM REL. 2.5/2.5.1 ’C’ TO REL. 2.7/2.7.1
These procedures describe the correct setting steps to follow in order to upgrade the Equipment at thecurrent Release for which the use of new 16x16 Matrix unit becomes mandatory instead of the Full MatrixUnit and the Connection Card Unit is no more to be used.
3.1 Substitution of Connection Card with new 16x16 matrix Unit
In this operation all VC4 Drop–Insert will be lost. Only the VC4 Pass–through of the Node will be saved.
It would be possible to save the local Drop–Insert by means of a temporary network configuration puttingthem in Pass–through in another Node of the Network.
In practice apply the following steps:
1 ) Substitute the two Connection Cards with a new 16x16 Matrix Unit card equipped as Matrix Main( if the Matrix EPS is desired, configure a second 16x16 Matrix Unit card equipped as MatrixSpare)
2 ) Send the new Equipment Configuration File describing the new configuration.
3 ) If the AS&C main screen shows a SW MISMATCH indication on the 16x16 Matrix Unit, thenDownload them with the Rel 2.5 ”C” , otherwise go to the step 4 ).
4 ) Configure the Node with the Drop–Insert connection if needed, keeping into account the newMatrix Units installed.
5 ) Recovered in this way the traffic, Download the Equipment with the new Rel 2.7 .
3.2 Substitution of the Full Matrix Unit with new 16x16 matrix Unit
1 ) With the Equipment still in Rel. 2.5 ”C”, substitute the old Full Matrix Stand by Unit with thenew 16x16 Matrix.
2 ) Send the new Equipment Configuration File describing the new configuration.
3 ) If the AS&C main screen shows a SW MISMATCH on the 16x16 Matrix Unit, then Downloadit with the Rel 2.5 ”C”, otherwise go to the step 4 ).
4 ) Extract the Main Full Matrix Unit activating in this manner the EPS protection that put into servicethe 16x16 Matrix Unit just downloaded.
5 ) Insert the second 16x16 Matrix Unit and repeat for this unit the previous step 2 ) and if neededthe step 3 ).
6 ) Download all the Equipment with the Release 2.7
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
444
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
3.3 DVB and 21x2 Mbit/s Retiming Units spare parts management
Para. 3.3.1 describes the insertion of a Rel. 2.5 ”C” downloaded spare unit, into the current releaseequipment.
Para. 3.3.2. describes the reverse condition, i.e. the insertion of a Rel. 2.7 spare unit, into a Rel. 2.5 ”C”equipment.
The following procedure refers to the DVB Tributary but is also applied to the 21x2Mb unit with Retiming.
3.3.1 Insertion of a Rel.2.5 ”C” spare unit into a Rel. 2.7 equipment
• Place the spare DVB unit into the equipment and access to the Craft Terminal functions.
• In the ”Equipment Configuration” application configure the relative slot as it was assigned to a3x45 Mb unit.
• In the AS&C application verify that an ”SW Mismatch” indication is presented on the same slot.
• Download the unit inserted into Rel. 2.7 and activate it.
• In the AS&C application verify that a ”CARD MISMATCH” indication is displayed on the sameslot.
• In the ”Equipment Configuration” application configure the involved slot as it was assigned tothe DVB unit. Send the new configuration file.
3.3.2 Insertion of a Rel.2.7 spare unit into a Rel. 2.5 ”C” equipment
• Place the spare DVB unit into the equipment and access to the Craft Terminal functions.
• In the ”Equipment Configuration” application configure the relative slot as it was assigned to a3x45 Mb unit. Send the new configuration file.
• In the AS&C application verify that a ”Card Mismatch” indication is presented on the same slot.
• Download the unit inserted into Rel. 2.5 ”C” and then activate it.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
445
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
4 1651SM RING NETWORK UPGRADING INTO 1661SMC RING NETWORK
4.1 Introduction
The procedure described below is utilized to upgrade a two–fiber link from the current release of 1651SMto 1661SMC without loss of traffic.This means modifying the line characteristics of the N.E., i.e., from 1651 SM to 1661 SM–C, withsubsequent replacement of the STM 4 Aggregate units with the STM 16 Aggregate units.
ATTENTION :
This upgrading is not allowed with R–EACT or EACT SWP .
This procedure is intended for ring protected connections.
It is also possible to upgrade point–to–point connections but with no protection mechanismenabled , the traffic will be lost for the time necessary to upgrade the equipments.
4.2 Actions and preliminary verifications for 1651SM
In order to avoid temporary loss of traffic ( max. 30 seconds ), depending to the AU4’s allocation and thecomposition ( structured or not structured ) of the data streams managed by STM4 Aggregates on thenodes terminating a path, some “workarounds”, concerning the “Connections Configuration”, can beadopted .
It is to be considered that for a successful result of this procedure, the main card has to be active wherever( that is for wichever kind of card ) the EPS protection scheme is enabled.
In the following cases of AU4’s connection, the amount of traffic loss is limited to switch time. The needof a possible workaround is indicated:
[1] All AU4s ( from #1 to #4 ) not structured (HO) connected: No workaround is required.
[2] First two or three AU4s ( #1 and #2 or #1, #2 and #3 ) not structured (HO) connected: Noworkaround is required.
[3] Four AU4s ( from #1 to #4 ) structured (LO) connected : Configure the “Enhanced connectivity”mode on each AU4.
[4] Less than four AU4s structured (LO) connected: Realize “TU’s d/i prot” connections in“Enhanced connectivity” mode on the available ( empty ) AU4s so to fill all the line capacity (STM4)and configure the “Enhanced connectivity” mode also on the already connected AU4s.
In the cases of AU4’s connection below reported, a temporary traffic loss ( max. 15 seconds ) could occurwhen updating “Equipment Configuration” file ( see par. 1.3 ) . As regards these cases, the upgradeprocedure is suggested to be done in “not congested” traffic period ( see par. 1.3 for more details ).
[5] Four AU4s structured and not structured connected : Configure the “Enhanced connectivity”mode on each structured AU4.
N.B. The workaround just described, is valid only if :
• • all the managed traffic is connected either to the Tributary cards from Tr1 to Tr4 or to theTributary cards from Tr5 to Tr8.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
446
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
• • structured connections have to be allocated on the first AU4s ( from #1 on ) and notstructured connections have to be allocated immediately after the AUs structured and, amongthe not structured connections, the pass–through ones must be the last to be allocated.
[6] Less than four AU4s structured and not structured connected : Configure the “Enhancedconnectivity” mode on each structured AU4 and realize “AU4’s d/i prot” ( that is not structured ) onthe available AU4s so to fill all the line capacity (STM4).
N.B. The workaround just described, is valid only if :
• • all the managed traffic is connected either to the Tributary cards from Tr#1 to Tr#4 or tothe Tributary cards from Tr#5 to Tr#8
• • structured connections have to be allocated on the first AU4s ( from #1 on ) and notstructured connections have to be allocated immediately after the AUs structured and, amongthe not structured connections, the pass–through ones must be the last to be allocated.
The upgrade from STM4 Aggregate to STM16 Aggregate ( see par. 1.3 ) leads to temporary (30 seconds)loss of traffic in the following cases of AU4’s connection:
[7] Less than four AU4s not strutctured with, at least, either AU4#1 or #2 or #3 not connected or inpass–through connection.
[8] AU4s structured and not structured ( the whole four or less than four ) connected to tributary cardsbelonging to different benches (that is distributed towards the whole group of tributaries from Tr#1to Tr#8).
As previously suggested about cases [5] and [6], also in these cases, the upgrade procedure is suggestedto be done in “not congested” traffic period ( see par. 1.3 for more details ).
4.3 Upgrade
See Figure 302. on page 448
The following, details the operations inherent to upgrade a 1651SM ring network into 1661SMC ringnetwork in order to give a sequence of actions that must be followed in the substitution of the Aggregates.
– 1st step
Load the STM16 Aggregates to be used for upgrading phase with the Connection Configurationsshown in Table 52. on page 448. and with the ”Laser ON” condition active.This operation must be done on stand alone equipment not belonging to the ring under upgrading,equipped with Full Matrix and eight STM1 Tribs to check the working connections and, with the maincard active wherever ( that is for wichever kind of card ) the EPS protection scheme is enabled.
– 2nd step
Disconnect the Section # 1 (Pattern Loss/AIS<50ms), then extract STM4 Aggregate West of theNE #1 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card, just provisioned as “East Aggregate” on thestand–alone equipment.Extract STM4 Aggregate East of the NE#2 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as“West Aggregate”.After an optical power check, connect the fibers.
– 3rd step
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
447
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Disconnect the Section # 2 (Pattern Loss/AIS<50ms and no alarms present on struct. AU 4s), thenextract STM4 Aggregate West of the NE #2 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as“East Aggregate” on the stand–alone equipment.Extract STM4 Aggregate East of the NE#3 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as“West Aggregate” . After an optical power check, connect the fibers.
– 4th step
Using the local Craft Terminal send in NE # 2 the relevant new Equipment Configuration (PatternLoss/AIS<50ms) and Local Configuration for DCC utility.
– 5th step
Repeat the steps 3rd and 4th for the Section # 3 , that is, NE # 3 and NE#4 up to the Section #nth , that is, NE # nth and NE#1.
– Last step
Using the R–ECT / EM tool and starting from the NE#1, remove, if desired, first, the “EnhancedConnectivity” mode from the structured AU4s before configured, then ( i.e. in a second step ), thefictitious connections eventually installed to fill to STM4 capacity line.Finally, send in each NE’s the relevant new connections to recover the complete new ringconfiguration .
Consider that, in general, and according to the needs of the user, the physical substitution of STM4Aggregate cards with STM16 Aggregate cards ( below described in 2nd, 3rd and 5th steps ) can beexecuted at the same step, providing, in a second time, for updating the “Equipment Configuration” fileof each node ( with consistent STM16 Aggregates configuration ) through the R–ECT / EM.In this case:
– Complete “1st step” by provisioning the STM16 Aggregates to be used with the relevant LocalConfiguration for DCC utility and provision, also, each node of the ring to update with relevant LocalConfiguration for DCC utility, about both STM4 ( already enabled ) and STM16 interfaces.
– Then , do not execute the “4th step”, and when all the STM16 cards are inserted ( not configured,yet ), go to “Last step”, updating first, each node of the ring with the consistent STM16 Aggregatecards configuration, then the Connections Configuration as, already described.
This way to realized the procedure is useful in those cases of AU4’s connection ( above described in par.1.2 ), where the upgrade of aggregate cards could produce a temporary traffic loss: after the physicalsubstitution of aggregate cards, the user can decide the right moment when updating the “EquipmentConfiguration”, minimizing the trouble due to possible loss of traffic.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
448
01
957.140.152 R
/3AL 38249 AA AA
448
448
Table 52. Connection Configurations to be used in the upgrade operations
AU4 DROP INSERT ALLOCATION
STM 1 TRIB AU4 NOT STRUCTURED MODE
TRIB # 1 AU4 # 1 D / I Bidir Unp E
TRIB # 2 AU4 # 2 D / I Bidir Unp E
TRIB # 3 AU4 # 3 D / I Bidir Unp E
TRIB # 4 AU4 # 4 D / I Bidir Unp E
TRIB # 5 AU4 # 1 D / I Bidir Unp W
TRIB # 6 AU4 # 2 D / I Bidir Unp W
TRIB # 7 AU4 # 3 D / I Bidir Unp W
TRIB # 8 AU4 # 4 D / I Bidir Unp W
Agg.
STM 4
Agg.
STM 4
Agg.
STM 4
Agg.
STM 4
Agg.
STM 4
Agg.
STM 4
Agg.
STM 4
Agg.
STM 4
section # 1
section # 2 section # 3
section # nth
W
W
WW
E
EE
ENE # 1
NE # 3
NE # 2 NE # nth
Figure 302. 1651SM ring network to be chanced in a1661SM–C ring
END OF DOCUMENT
